SERVICE MANUAL

CODE : 00ZAR208D/A2E

DIGITAL MULTIFUNCTIONAL
SYSTEM

(AR-208S/AR-208D)
AR-208S
MODEL AR-208D
CONTENTS

[1] GENERAL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 - 1
[2] SPECIFICATIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2 - 1
[3] CONSUMABLE PARTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3 - 1
[4] EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURES . . . . . . . . . 4 - 1
[5] UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 - 1
[6] COPY PROCESS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 - 1
[7] OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 - 1
[8] DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 - 1
[9] ADJUSTMENTS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9 - 1
[10] TEST COMMAND, TROUBLE CODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 - 1
[11] MAINTENANCE. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11 - 1
[12] USER PROGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 - 1
[13] ELECTRICAL SECTION . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13 - 1
[14] CIRCUIT DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14 - 1
[15] FIRMWARE DOWNLOAD PROCEDURES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15 - 1

Parts marked with are important for maintaining the safety of the set. Be sure to replace these parts with
specified ones for maintaining the safety and performance of the set.

This document has been published to be used

SHARP CORPORATION for after sales service only.
The contents are subject to change without notice.
 CAUTION

This product is a class 1 laser product that complies with 21CFR 1040 of the CDRH standard and
IEC825. This means that this machine does not produce hazardous laser radiation. The use of controls,
adjustments or performance of procedures other than those specified herein may result in hazardous
radiation exposure.
This laser radiation is not a danger to the skin, but when an exact focusing of the laser beam is achieved
on the eyes retina, there is the danger of spot damage to the retina.
The following cautions must be observed to avoid exposure of the laser beam to your eyes at the time of
servicing.
1) When a problem in the laser optical unit has occurred, the whole optical unit must be exchanged as a
unit, not as individual parts.
2) Do not look into the machine with the main switch turned on after removing the developer unit, toner
cartridge, and drum cartridge.
3) Do not look into the laser beam exposure slit of the laser optical unit with the connector connected
when removing and installing the optical system.
4) The middle frame contains the safety interlock switch.
Do not defeat the safety interlock by inserting wedges or other items into the switch slot.

CAUTION
INVISIBLE LASER RADIATION,
WHEN OPEN AND INTERLOCKS DEFEATED.
AVOID EXPOSURE TO BEAM.
VARO !
AVATTAESSA JA SUOJALUKITUS
OHITETTAESSA OLET ALTTIINA
NKYMTTMLLE LASERSTEILYLLE L
KATSO STEESEEN.

VORSICHT ADVARSEL
UNSICHTBARE LASERSTRAHLUNG,
USYNLIG LASERSTRLNING VED BNING, NR
WENN ABDECKUNG GEFFNET UND
SIKKERHEDSBRYDERE ER UDE AF
SICHERHEITSVERRIEGELUNG BERBRCKT.
FUNKTION. UNDG UDSAETTELSE FOR
NICHT DEM STRAHL AUSSETZEN.
STRLNING.

LASER WAVE LENGTH : 770 795nm VARNING !

Pulse times : 10.24sec OSYNLIG LASERSTRLNING NR DENNA DEL
Out put power : 0.15mW 0.01mW R PPNAD OCH SPRREN R URKOPPLAD.
BETRAKTA EJ STRLEN. STRLEN R
FARLIG.
At the production line, the output power Caution
of the scanner unit is adjusted to 0.57 This product contains a low power laser
MILLI-WATT PLUS 20 PCTS and is device. To ensure continued safety do not
maintained constant by the operation of remove any cover or attempt to gain access
the Automatic Power Control (APC). to the inside of the product. Refer all
Even if the APC circuit fails in operation
for some reason, the maximum output servicing to qualified personnel.
power will only be 15 MILLI-WATT 0.1
MICRO-SEC. Giving and accessible
emission level of 42 MICRO-WATT
which is still-less than the limit of
CLASS-1 laser product.

VAROITUS! LAITTEEN KYTTMINEN MUULLA

KUIN TSS KYTTOHJEESSA MAINITULLA
TAVALLA SAATTAA ALTISTAA KYTTJN
TURVALLISUUSLUOKAN 1 YLITTVLLE
NKYMTTMLLE LASERSTEILYLLE.

VARNING - OM APPARATEN ANVNDS P ANNAT

STT N I DENNA BRUKSANVISNING
SPECIFICERATS, KAN ANVNDAREN UTSTTAS
FR OSYNLIG LASERSTRLNING, SOM
VERSKRIDER GRNSEN FR LASERKLASS 1.

The foregoing is applicable only to the 220V LUOKAN 1 LASERLAITE

model, 230V model and 240V model. KLASS 1 LASER APPARAT

[1] GENERAL
1. Major functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
2. Note for servicing and handling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1
[2] SPECIFICATIONS
1. Basic specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2. Operation specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3. Copy performance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4. SPLC printer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5. Scan function. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6. RSPF. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
[3] CONSUMABLE PARTS
1. Supply list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A. SEC/SECL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2. Environmental . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3. Production control number (lot No.) identification . . . . . . . . . . . .
4. Toner cartridge replacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
[4] EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURES
1. Appearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2. Internal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3. Operation panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4. Motors, solenoids and clutch. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5. Sensors and switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6. PWB unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7. Cross sectional view . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
[5] UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION
1. Copier installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
2. Cautions on handling. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
3. Checking packed components and accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1
4. Unpacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
5. Removing protective packing materials. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
6. Developer unit installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-2
7. Toner cartridge installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-3
8. Loading the paper tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
9. Power to copier . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-4
10. Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
A. Before installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
B. Installing the software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-5
C. Setting up Button Manager . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-8
11. Interface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
A. USB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
12. Moving. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-9
13. Scanner moisture-proof kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
A. Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
B. Precautions at installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
C. Attachment method . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-10
[6] COPY PROCESS
1. Functional diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1
2. Outline of print process . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
3. Actual print process. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-2
[7] OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS
1. Outline of operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2. Scanner section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A. Scanner unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B. Optical system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C. Drive system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3. Laser unit. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A. Basic structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B. Laser beam path . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
C. Composition . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4. Fuser section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A. General description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5. Paper feed section and paper transport section . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A. Paper transport path and general operations. . . . . . . . . . . . .
6. RSPF section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
A. Outline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
B. Document transport path and basic composition . . . . . . . . . .
C. Operational descriptions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D. Cases where a document jam is caused . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
E. RSPF open/close detection (book document detection) . . . .
CONTENTS
7. D-D (Duplex to Duplex) mode paper/document transport
(Duplex model) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
A. Initial state . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
B. Front copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
C. Back copy . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-8
2-1
8. Shifter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-9
2-1
[8] DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY
2-2
1. High voltage section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
2-3
A. List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
2-3
B. Drum replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1
2-3
C. Disassembly procedure (Transfer charger unit) . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
D. Assembly procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
3-1 E. TC unit cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-3
3-1 F. Charger wire replacement. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
3-1 2. Operation panel section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
3-1 A. List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
3-2 B. Disassembly procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-4
C. Assembly procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
4-1 3. Optical section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
A. List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
4-1
B. Disassembly procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-5
4-2
C. Assembly procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
4-3
4. Fusing section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
4-4
A. List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
4-5
B. Disassembly procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-7
4-6
C. Assembly procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
5. Tray paper feed/transport section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
A. List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
B. Disassembly procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-10
C. Assembly procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
6. Manual paper feed section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
A. List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
B. Disassembly procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-16
C. Assembly procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
D. Pressure plate holder attachment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
7. Rear frame section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
A. List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
B. Disassembly procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-18
C. Assembly procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
8. Power section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
A. List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
B. Disassembly procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
C. Assembly procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
9. DV unit section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
A. Developer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-19
B. DV seal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
C. DV blade . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
D. DV doctor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-20
E. DV sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
10. Duplex motor section (AR-208D only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
A. List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
B. Disassembly procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
C. Assembly procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
7-1 11. Reverse roller section (AR-208D only) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
7-2 A. List. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
7-2 B. Disassembly procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
7-2 C. Assembly procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-21
7-2 12. RSPF section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
7-3 A. Front cabinet, rear cabinet . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
7-3 B. Upper door unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
7-3 C. Document tray unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
7-3 D. Upper door open/close sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
7-3 E. Reverse clutch, paper exit roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-22
7-4 F. Drive unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-23
G. Shutter solenoid . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24
7-4
H. Pickup roller, take-up roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-24
7-4
I. Paper empty sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25
7-7
J. PS roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-25
7-7
K. Upper transport roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26
7-7
L. Paper sensor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26
7-7
M. Lower transport roller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-26
7-8
N. Paper exit sensor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-27
7-8
[9] ADJUSTMENTS
1. Optical section. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
A. Copy magnification ratio adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1
2. Copy density adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
A. Copy density adjustment timing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
B. Note for copy density adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-3
C. Necessary tool for copy density adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
D. Features of copy density adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
E. Copy density adjustment procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-4
3. High voltage adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
A. Main charger (Grid bias) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
B. DV bias check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
4. Duplex adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
A. Adjusting the paper reverse position in memory
for duplex copying . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-5
B. Adjusting trailing edge void in duplex copy mode . . . . . . . . . 9-6
5. RSPF scan position automatic adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
6. RSPF mode sub scanning direction magnification ratio
adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-7
7. Automatic black level correction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-8
[10] TEST COMMAND, TROUBLE CODES
1. Entering the test command mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
2. Key rule . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
3. List of test commands . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1
4. Descriptions of various test commands. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-3
5. Trouble codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39
A. Trouble codes list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39
B. Details of trouble codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-39
[11] MAINTENANCE
1. Maintenance table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
2. Maintenance display system . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
3. Remaining toner indication . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1
[12] USER PROGRAM
1. User programs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
A. Copy mode. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-1
B. Print mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-2
2. Selecting a setting for a user program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12-3
[13] ELECTRICAL SECTION
1. Block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
A. Overall block diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-1
2. Signal name list . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13-2
[14] CIRCUIT DIAGRAM
1. MCU PWB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-1
2. OPERATION PWB . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-17
3. ACTUAL WIRING DIAGRAM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 14-20
[15] FIRMWARE DOWNLOAD PROCEDURES
1. Initial setting (Serial number setting procedures) . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1
2. Download procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-1
3. Version acquisition procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-3
4. EEPROM data acquisition procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-4
5. Installing procedures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 15-5
[1] GENERAL
1. Major functions
Configurations
Item Color
CPM SB/ GDI Sharp IEEE External
2 Tray SPF R-SPF Scanner SPLC E-SORT Duplex Shifter FAX USB RJ45
(Letter) MB printer desk 1284 NIC
Model (push)
AR-208S 20 MB Opt Opt Opt
(250) (2.0Hi)
AR-208D 20 MB Opt Opt Opt
(250) (2.0Hi)

Descriptions of items
CPM: Copy speed (Copies Per Minute)
SB/MB: SB = Manual feed single bypass,
MB = Manual feed multi bypass
2 tray: Second cassette unit
SPF: Original feed unit
R-SPF: Duplex original feed unit
Color scanner: Color scanner function
GDI printer: GDI printer function with USB
SPLC: SPLC printer function (AR-208S/AR-208D)
E-SORT: Electrical sort (Options)
Duplex: Auto duplex copy function
Shifter: Job separator function
FAX: FAX function
Sharpdesk: Scanner utilities
IEEE1284: Interface port (parallel)
USB: Interface port (USB)
AR-D33 AR-NB2A
RJ45: Interface port (Network)
External NIC: AR-NB2A
Descriptions of table
: Standard provision
: No function or no option available
Opt: Option

AR-FX13

2. Note for servicing and handling

When the main unit power is repeatedly turned OFF/ON rapidly (for about 1sec), the IC (OA982) on the MCU PWB may malfunction to cause an error
(E1-00 Communication error), which does not boot the machine. In case of this error, the blank display is kept for several tens seconds and then "E1-
00" is displayed on the panel display.
<Countermeasure>
Turn off the power and keep it for more than 10sec. Then turn on the power.
When the machine is booted.: There is no problem in the MCU PWB.
When the machine is not booted.: The MCU PWB trouble

AR-208S/208D GENERAL 1 - 1
[2] SPECIFICATIONS
1. Basic specifications
Item
Type Desktop
Copy system Dry, electrostatic
Segment (class) Digital personal copier
Copier dimensions AR-208S 20-1/2 (W) x 17-5/8 (D) x 14-5/8 (H) (518mm (W) x 445mm (D) x 371mm (H))
AR-208D 20-1/2 (W) x 17-5/8 (D) x 14-5/8 (H) (518mm (W) x 445mm (D) x 371mm (H))
Weight (Approximately) AR-208S 43.9lbs.(19.9kg) DV unit is not included.
AR-208D 45.4lbs.(20.6kg)

2. Operation specifications
Section, item Details
Paper feed Paper feed system 1 tray (250 sheets) + multi-bypass (50 sheets)
section Inch Tray paper feed section Paper size 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 13", 8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 5-1/2"
system (Landscape)
Paper weight 15 - 21 lbs.
Paper feed capacity 250 sheets
Kinds Standard paper, specified paper, recycled paper
Remark User adjustment of paper guide available
Multi-bypass paper Paper size Max, feedable size: 8-1/2" x 14" /
feed section Min, feedable size: 3.87" x 5.83"
Paper weight 15 - 34.5 lbs.
Paper feed capacity 50 sheets
Kinds Standard paper, specified paper, recycled paper, OHP,
Label, Envelop (Single copy)
Remark User adjustment of paper guide available
AB system Tray paper feed section Paper size A4, B5, A5 (Landscape)
Paper weight 56 - 80g/m2
Paper feed capacity 250 sheets
Kinds Standard paper, specified paper, recycled paper
Remark User adjustment of paper guide available
Multi-bypass paper Paper size Max, feedable size: A4 / Min, feedable size: 89 x 140mm
feed section Paper weight 56 - 128g/m2
Paper feed capacity 50 sheets
Kinds Standard paper, specified paper, recycled paper, OHP,
Label, Envelop (Single copy)
Remark User adjustment of paper guide available
Paper exit section Exit way Face down
Capacity of output tray 200 sheets
Originals Original set Center Registration (left edge)
Max. original size A4 (8-1/2" x 14")
Original kinds sheet, book
Original size detection None
Optical Scanning Scanning system 3 CCDs (RGB) sensor scanning by lighting white lamp
section section CCD sensor Resolution 600 dpi
Lighting lamp Type CCFL
Voltage 560Vrms
Power consumption 2.8W
Output data Output: R, G, B 1 or 8 bits/pixel /
Input: A/D 16 bits (12 bits actual)
Writing Writing system Writing to OPC drum by the semiconductor laser
section Laser unit Resolution 600 dpi
Image forming Photoconductor Type OPC (30)
Life 25K
Charger Charging system Saw-tooth charging with a grid, / (-) scorotron discharge
Transfer system (+) DC corotron system
Separation system (-) DC corotron system
Developing Developing system Dry, 2-component magnetic brush development system
Cleaning Cleaning system Counter blade system (Counter to rotation)

AR-208S/208D SPECIFICATIONS 2 - 1
 Section, item Details
Fusing section Fusing system Heat roller system
Upper heat roller Type Teflon roller
Lower heat roller Type Silicon rubber roller
Heater lamp Type Halogen lamp
Voltage 120V
Power consumption 800W
Electrical section Power source Voltage 120V
Frequency Common use for 50 and 60Hz
Power consumption Max. Less than 1000W
Average (during copying) 380Wh/H
Average (stand-by) 80Wh/H
Pre-heat mode 28Wh/H
Auto power shut-off mode 12.5W or less

3. Copy performance
Section, item Details
Copy magnification Fixed magnification 4 Reduction + 3 Enlargement
ratios (Inch system: 25, 50, 64, 78, 100, 129, 200, 400%)
(AB system: 25, 50, 70, 86, 100, 141, 200, 400%)
Zooming 25 - 400% (376 steps in 1% increments)
magnification ratios 50 - 200% when using RSPF (151 steps in 1% increments)
Manual steps (manual, photo) 5 steps
Copy speed (CPM) First-copy time *1 8.0 seconds (When user program 24 is set to OFF)
(Approximately) 10.7 seconds (When user program 24 is set to ON)
(paper: A4 (8-1/2" x 11"), exposure mode: AUTO, copy ratio: 100
Inch system Same size 20
8-1/2" x 11"
(Landscape)
AB system Same size 20
A4 (Landscape)
AB system Same size 20
B5 (Landscape)
Max. continuous copy quantity 99
Void Void area Leading edge 1 - 4mm
Trailing edge 4mm or less
Side edge void area 0.5mm or more (per side)
4.5mm or less (total of both sides)
Image loss Leading edge same size: 3.0mm or less (OC) / 4mm or less (RSPF)
Enlarge: 1.5mm or less (OC) / 3mm or less (RSPF)
Reduction (50%): 6.0mm or less (OC) / 8mm or less (RSPF)
Warm-up time 0 sec. Immediately the ready lamp is lit.
Power save mode reset time 0 sec. Immediately the ready lamp is lit.
Paper jam recovery time 0 sec.
Jam recovery condition: Recovery time from 60 sec of door open.
*1: The first-copy time is measured after the power save indicator turns off following power on, using the document glass with the polygon rotat-
ing in the copy ready state and "Selection of copy start state" set to ON in the user programs (8-1/2" x 11" (A4), paper fed from paper tray).
The first-copy time may vary depending on machine operating conditions and ambient conditions such as temperature.

AR-208S/208D SPECIFICATIONS 2 - 2
4. SPLC printer
Print speed Max. 20ppm (Paper size: A4, excluding manual paper feed)
* Varies depending on the PC performance.
First print time 8 sec. (without data transfer time)
Duplex Yes (AR-208D only)
ROPM Yes
CPU None
Memory 64MB
Interface USB2.0 (Hi Speed)
Network Option: Network expansion kit the AR-NB2A
Emulation SPLC (JBIG GDI)
MIB support No
Resolution 600dpi *1
Supported OS Windows 98/Me, Windows 2000 Professional, Windows XP Home Edition/Professional, Windows Vista
WHQL support Yes *2
Application Status window
*1: Engine Resolution
*2: Running change

5. Scan function
Type Flat Bed Color Scanner
Scanning system Document glass / RSPF
Light source 3 CCDs (RGB) sensor scanning by lighting white lamp (1 pcs of CCFL)
Resolution Optical: 600 x 1200dpi Setting range: 50 - 9600dpi
(Preview resolution is fixed at 75dpi)
Originals Sheet type / Book type
Output data R, G, B 1 or 8 bits/pixel / A/D 16bit
Scan range OC / RSPF: 8.5" (297mm) (L) x 14" (431mm) (W)
Original position: Platen: Left center / RSPF: Right center
Scan speed OC / RSPF: Max. 2.88ms/line(Color/Gray scale)
Protocol TWAIN / WIA (Only XP Vista) / STI
Support file format RAW / JPEG
Interface USB2.0 (Hi Speed data transmission)
Scanner utility Button Manager / Sharpdesk / Composer
Scan key/lamp Yes
Duplex scan Yes (AR-208D only)
Supported OS Windows 98/Me, 2000 Professional, XP Home Edition / Professional, Vista
Void area No
WHQL supported Yes *1
*1: Running change

6. RSPF
Original capacity 50 sheets (56 - 90g/m2) or 6.5mm, 1/4" or less.
Original size A4, B5, A5 / 8-1/2" x 14", 8-1/2" x 11", 8-1/2" x 5-1/2"
Original replacement speed 8-1/2" x 11" about 14 sheets (70%)
A4 about 13 sheets (65%)
Job speed (Tray1,Landscape) Single copy S to S About 14CPM (8-1/2" x 11") About 13CPM (A4)
S to D About 10CPM (1 - 30 sheets)(*1) About 5.6CPM (31 sheets ~)
D to S About 6CPM
D to D About 6CPM (1 - 30 sheets)(*1) About 5.6CPM (31 sheets ~)
Multi copy S to S About 20CPM
S to D About 13CPM (1 - 30 sheets)(*1) About 5.6CPM (31 sheets ~)
D to S About 16CPM
D to D About 13CPM (1 - 30 sheets)(*1) About 5.6CPM (31 sheets ~)
Original placement Face up
Original weight 15 - 23.9lbs. (56 - 90g/m2)
Mixed feeding No
Original which cannot Thermal papers, originals with punch holes for files, be used folded paper, transparent
originals such as OHP films, stapled or clip used originals with cover up liquid used, Originals
with tape sealed, originals with high level frictional coefficient such as photos or catalogs.
[Conditions] Speed with tray 1, normal size, paper size of 8.5" x 11" (A4), and RSPF.
*1: Indicates the speed from 1st to 30th sheet (i.e., 60th surface).

AR-208S/208D SPECIFICATIONS 2 - 3
[3] CONSUMABLE PARTS
1. Supply list
A. SEC/SECL
No. Name Content Life Product name Packing form
1 Toner cartridge Toner (Toner: Net Weight 243g) 10 80K AR-208MT One carton of the
(Black) Polyethylene bag 10 (8K x 10Pcs) (A4 6% document) AR-208MT includes
10 toner cartridges.
2 Developer Developer (Developer: Net Weight 170g) 10 250K AR-208MD One carton of the
(25K x 10Pcs) AR-208MD includes
10 developers.
3 Drum kit Drum 1 25K AR-152DR One carton of the
Drum fixing plate 1 collective package
includes 10 units of the
AR-152DR.
Note: Printing of the master/individual cartons is made in 2 languages, English/French.
Packed together with the machine: DR 25K/Developer UN/Process UN

2. Environmental (4) Supply storage condition

The environmental conditions for assuring the copy quality and the Humidity (RH)
machine operations are as follows: 90%
(1) Normal operating condition
Temperature: 20C to 25C
Humidity: 65 5%RH
(2) Acceptable operating condition
Humidity (RH)
85%
20%

60%
5C 45C

3. Production control number (lot No.)

identification
20%
<Toner cartridge>

10C 30C 35C

Production month
(3) Transportation condition Production day
Destination code
Humidity (RH)
(Dealer, distributor, OEM, etc.)
90%
Production place
(SOCC: Fixed to B.)
60% End digit of year
Version No.

<Drum cartridge>
The label on the drum cartridge shows the date of production.
(SOCC production)
15%

Production month
25C 30C 40C
Production day
Destination code
(Dealer, distributor, OEM, etc.)
Production place
(SOCC: Fixed to B.)
End digit of year
Version No.

AR-208S/208D CONSUMABLE PARTS 3 - 1

 4) Put Toner unit in a collection bag immediately after removing it
from the copier

Production control
label attachment position

Note: Never carry exposed Toner unit. Be sure to put it in the

collection bag.

Production control
label attachment position(*1)

1 The production control label is not attached to the cartridge of a

China product.
<Developer>

Sub lot
Production day
Production month
End digit of year
Production place

4. Toner cartridge replacement

1) Open the front and side cabinets of the copier.
2) Keep holding Toner lover, and
3) Carefully pull out Toner unit from the copier.

AR-208S/208D CONSUMABLE PARTS 3 - 2

[4] EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURES
1. Appearance

RSPF Interface

9 18
10
1 12
2 11
5
3 6 13
7 14
4
8 15
16
16 17

1 Document glass 2 Operation panel 3 Front cover

4 Paper tray 5 Side cover 6 Side cover open button
7 Bypass tray paper guides 8 Bypass tray 9 Original guides
10 Document feeder cover 11 Document feeder tray 12 Exit area
13 Paper output tray 14 Paper output tray extension 15 Power switch
16 Handles 17 Power cord 18 USB connector

2. Internal

Toner cartridge Drum cartridge

1 4
5

1 Front cover 2 Side cover 3 Fusing unit release lever

4 Transfer charger 5 Charger cleaner

AR-208S/208D EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURES 4 - 1

3. Operation panel

1 2 3 4 5

AR-208D
Display
READY TO COPY.
100% 8.5x11 0

18 19 20 21

6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17

1 [MODE SELECT] key / Mode indicators 2 Display

Press this key to select the mode. The indicator of the selected This shows messages indicating the machine status and any
mode lights (copy, printer, scanner, fax mode indicators). problems that occur, as well as user programs and function
setting menus.
3 Numeric keys 4 [CLEAR] key ( )
Use these to enter the number of copies and other numerical Use this to clear the set number of copies, as well as cancel a
settings. job that is in progress. When a setting menu appears, use this
The keys can also be used to select items in function setting key to move back to the previous menu level.
menus.
5 Power save indicator 6 RSPF indicator
This lights up when the power save function is activated. This lights up when an original is placed in the RSPF.
7 Error indicator 8 [TRAY SELECT] key ( )
This lights steadily or blinks when a paper misfeed or other error Use to select the paper tray that has the desired paper for
occurs. copying.
9 Tray location indicator 10 [MENU] key
Indicates the selected paper tray. The indicator blinks when the Press this key to select the paper size for copying, to configure a
tray is out of paper during operation or is not closed properly. user program or to display the total count.
11 [2-SIDED COPY] key (AR-208D) 12 [E-SORT/SP.FUN] key
[2-SIDED SCAN] key (AR-208S) Press to select the sort function, 2 IN 1 copy function, or margin
Press in copy mode to select one-sided or two-sided settings for shift function.
the original and for the output.
13 [ ] key ( ), [ ] key ( ), [ENTER] key 14 [EXPOSURE] key
Press the [ ] key ( ) or [ ] key ( ) to select an item in Use to switch from auto exposure adjustment to text mode or
a function setting menu. photo mode.
Press the [ENTER] key to enter a selection.
15 [COPY RATIO] key 16 [CLEAR ALL] key ( )
Press to select an enlargement or reduction ratio. This returns all functions to the default settings. When pressed in
To select a preset ratio setting, press the [COPY RATIO] key and a setting menu, this returns the settings and display to the initial
select the desired preset ratio. To select a ratio that is not preset, state.
press the [COPY RATIO] key, select the preset ratio that is
closest to the desired ratio, and then press the [ ] key ( )
or [ ] key ( ) to increase or decrease the ratio in
increments of 1%.
17 [START] key ( ) / Ready indicator 18 Shows the current copy ratio.
The ready indicator lights up when copying or scanning is
possible.
To begin copying, press the [START] key ( ).
The [START] key ( ) is also pressed to return to normal
operation from auto power shut-off mode.
19 Shows the selected paper size. 20 Shows the number of copies that has been entered with the
numeric keys.
21 A checkmark " " appears when the exposure has been
changed, or when two-sided copying, sort, 2 IN 1, or margin shift
is selected.

AR-208S/208D EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURES 4 - 2

4. Motors, solenoids and clutch

11

12

10 7
6

3
9

No. Part name Control signal Function / Operation

1 Main motor MM Drives the copier.
2 Scanner motor MRMT Drives the optical mirror base (scanner unit).
3 Toner motor TM Supplies toner.
4 Cooling fan motor VFM Ventilate the fuser section.
5 Resist roller solenoid RRS Resist roller rotation control solenoid
6 Paper feed solenoid CPFS1 Cassette Paper feed solenoid 1
7 Multi paper feed solenoid MPFS Multi manual pages feed solenoid
8 Drive motor SPMT Drives the RSPF.
9 Duplex motor DMT Devices the duplex paper transport section (Duplex model only)
10 Shifter motor SFTM Drives the shifter.
11 Reverse clutch SRVC Reverses the rotating direction of the roller.
12 Paper feed solenoid (RSPF) SPUS Feeds paper.

AR-208S/208D EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURES 4 - 3

5. Sensors and switches

7 8
2
1

10

11

No. Name Signal Type Function Output

1 Scanner unit home position MHPS Transmission sensor Scanner unit home position detection "H" at home position
sensor
2 POD sensor POD Transmission sensor Paper exit detection "H" at paper pass
3 PPD2 sensor PPD2 Transmission sensor Paper transport detection 2 "L" at paper pass
4 Cassette detection switch CED1 Micro-switch Cassette installation detection "H" at cassette insertion
5 PPD1 sensor PPD1 Transmission sensor Paper transport detection 1 "L" at paper pass
6 Door switch DSW Micro-switch Door open/close detection 1 or 0V of 24V at door open
(safety switch for 24V)
7 Paper empty sensor SPID Transmission sensor Paper entry detection "H" paper empty
8 Paper exit sensor SRJD Transmission sensor Paper exit detection "H" paper empty
9 PD1 sensor PD1 Micro-switch Paper width detect "H" at A4 size or less
"L" at A4 size or more
10 Upper door open/close sensor SCOD Transmission sensor Cover open/close detection "L" open
11 Paper sensor SPPD Transmission sensor Paper transport detection "H" paper empty

AR-208S/208D EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURES 4 - 4

6. PWB unit

5 2

11
1

10

4
3
7

No. Name Function

1 Exposure lamp invertor PWB
2 Main PWB (MCU)
3 Operation PWB
4 High voltage PWB
5 CCD sensor PWB
6 LSU motor PWB
7 TCS PWB
8 LSU PWB
9 FAX-operation PWB
10 Power PWB
11 Modem PWB
Exposure lamp (CCFL) control
Copier control
Operation input/display
High voltage control
For image scanning
For polygon motor drive
For toner sensor control
For laser control
FAX operation input (AR-FX13 option)
AC power input, DC voltage control
FAX control (AR-FX13 option)

AR-208S/208D EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURES 4 - 5

7. Cross sectional view

3 18 5 15 16 17

1 2 4

19
20

10

14 13 12 11

No. Part name Function and operation

1 Scanner unit Illuminates the original with the copy lamp and passes the reflected light to the lens unit (CCD).
2 Exposure lamp Exposure lamp (CCFL) Illuminates original
3 LSU (Laser unit) Converts the original image signal into laser beams and writes onto the drum.
4 Paper exit roller Roller for paper exit
5 Main charger Provides negative charges evenly to the drum surface.
6 Heat roller Fuses toner on the paper. (Teflon roller)
7 Pressure roller Fuses toner on the paper. (Silicon rubber roller)
8 Drum Forms images.
9 Transfer unit Transfers images onto the drum.
10 Pickup roller Picks up the manual feed paper. (In multi feed only)
11 Manual paper feed tray Tray for manual feed paper
12 Manual paper feed roller Transport the paper from the manual paper feed port.
13 PS roller unit Takes synchronization between the lead edge and the rear edge of the paper.
14 Paper feed roller Picks up a sheet of paper from the cassette.
15 Pickup roller Picks up documents.
16 Separation roller Separates documents to feed properly.
17 Upper transport roller Transports of a document.
18 Paper exit roller Discharges documents.
19 Lower transport roller Transports of a document.
20 PS roller Feeds documents to the scanning section.

AR-208S/208D EXTERNAL VIEWS AND INTERNAL STRUCTURES 4 - 6

[5] UNPACKING AND 2. Cautions on handling
INSTALLATION Be careful in handling the copier as follows to maintain the perfor-
mance of this copier.
1. Copier installation Do not drop the copier, subject it to shock or strike it against any
object.
Improper installation may damage the copier. Please note the fol-
lowing during initial installation and whenever the copier is moved.
Caution: If the copier is moved from a cool place to a warm place,
condensation may form inside the copier. Operation in this
condition will cause poor copy quality and malfunctions.
Leave the copier at room temperature for at least 2 hours
before use.
Do not install your copier in areas that are:
damp, humid, or very dusty

Do not expose the drum cartridge to direct sunlight.

Doing so will damage the surface (green portion) of the drum car-
tridge, causing poor print quality.

exposed to direct sunlight

Store spare supplies such as drum cartridges and toner cartridges

in a dark place without removing from the package before use.
poorly ventilated
If they are exposed to direct sunlight, poor print quality may result.
Do not touch the surface (green portion) of the drum cartridge.
Doing so will damage the surface of the cartridge, causing poor
print quality.

3. Checking packed components and

accessories
Open the carton and check if the following components and acces-
subject to extreme temperature or humidity changes, e.g., near sories are included.
an air conditioner or heater.

Operation manual

The copier should be installed near an accessible power outlet for

easy connection.
Software CD-ROM
Be sure to connect the power cord only to a power outlet that meets
the specified voltage and current requirements.
Also make certain the outlet is properly grounded.
Drum cartridge
Be sure to allow the required space around the machine for servic- (installed in unit)
ing and proper ventilation.

8" (20cm) 8"(20cm)

4" 4"
(10cm) (10cm)

AR-208S/208D UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION 5 - 1

4. Unpacking
Be sure to hold the handles on both sides of the machine to unpack
the machine and carry it to the installation location.
6. Developer unit installation
1) 2) 3) Open the side and front cabinets of the copier.
4) Remove the locking tape of the developer unit.
5) Remove the screw which is fixing the copier and Developer unit.
6) Remove Developer unit slowly from the copier.

5 2
1
5. Removing protective packing 3
materials
1) Remove all pieces of tape shown in the illustration below and
then open the RSPF and remove the protective materials. Take
out the bag containing the toner cartridge.

7) Remove the screw (1 pc).

8) Remove Upper developer unit.

2) Release the scan head locking switch.

Grasp here and turn in

the direction of the arrow.

(A)
Lock Unlock

3) Open the bypass tray, and then open the side cover while
pressing the side cover open button.
9) Shake the aluminum bag to stir developer
10) Supply developer from the aluminum bag to the top of the MX
roller evenly.

4) Remove the CAUTION tape from the front cover and remove
the two protective pins from the fusing machine by pulling the
strings upward one at a time.

Protective pins
Note: Be careful not to splash developer outside Developer
CAUTION tape unit.

AR-208S/208D UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION 5 - 2

11) Attach Upper developer unit and fix it with a screw. 2) Hold the section of Toner unit shown in the figure below, remove
12) Rotate the MG roller gear to distribute developer evenly. the packing tape, and remove the cushion.
3) Pull out the cushion in the arrow direction.

4) Insert Toner unit carefully into the copier.

Note: Never rotate the gear in the reverse direction. 5) Insert until the hook is engaged with the copier as shown in the
figure below.
Note: When carrying Developer unit, do not tilt it extremely as
shown with the arrow in the figure below.
(Prevention of splash of developer)

6) Pull out the shutter in the arrow direction.

13) Insert Developer unit carefully into the copier.
Note: Quick insertion may result in splash of developer. Be
sure to insert carefully.
14) Confirm that Developer unit is completely inserted to the bottom
of the machine, fix Developer unit and the machine with a
screw.
15) Completion of Developer unit installation

7. Toner cartridge installation

1) To prevent against uneven distribution of toner, hold Toner unit
with both hands and shake it several times horizontally.

Note: Do not hold and carry the shutter. Otherwise the shutter
may drop and Toner unit may drop.
7) Completion of Toner unit installation
Close the front and side cabinets.

AR-208S/208D UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION 5 - 3

8. Loading the paper tray
Note: Make sure that the paper is not torn, is free of dust, and has
no wrinkles or curled edges.
1) Raise the handle of the paper tray and pull the paper tray out
until it stops.
2) Remove the pressure plate lock. Rotate the pressure plate lock
in the direction of the arrow to remove it while pressing down on
the pressure plate of the paper tray.
3) Store the pressure plate lock which has been removed in step
2. To store the pressure plate lock, rotate the lock to secure it as
shown below.
Pressure plate lock
4) Squeeze the lock lever of the front guide and slide the paper
guide (A) to match the width of the paper, and move the paper
guide (B) to the appropriate slot as marked on the tray.
Paper guide (B)
Paper guide (A)
The front guide is a slide-type guide. Grasp the locking knob
on the guide and slide the guide to the indicator line of the
paper to be loaded.
The left guide is an insert-type guide. Remove it and then
insert it at the indicator line of the paper to be loaded.
AR-208S/208D UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION 5 - 4
5) Fan the paper and insert it into the tray. Make sure that the
edges go under the corner hooks.
Note:
Do not load paper above the maximum height line ( ).
Exceeding the line will cause a paper misfeed.
If the paper is not fanned, double-feeds or misfeeds may occur.
Make sure the stack of paper is straight before loading it. When
adding paper, take the remaining paper out and combine it into a
single stack with the new paper.
Make sure that all the paper in the stack is the same size and
type.
When loading paper, ensure that there is no space between the
paper and the guide, and make sure that the guide is not set too
narrow and causes the paper to bend. Incorrect loading will
cause the paper to skew or misfeed.
6) Gently push the paper tray back into the machine.
Note:
If you loaded a different size of paper than was loaded previously
in the tray.
When not using the machine for an extended period, remove all
paper from the paper tray and store it in a dry place. If paper is
left in the machine for an extended period, the paper will absorb
moisture from the air, resulting in paper jams.
9. Power to copier
1) Ensure that the power switch of the copier is in the OFF posi-
tion.
Insert the attached power cord into the power cord socket at the
rear of the copier.
2) Plug the other end of the power cord into the nearest outlet.
3) The document stopper may fall down by vibrations during transit
of the product. If documents are set under such a state, the
JAM display may be indicated.
If the JAM display is indicated, remove the documents, turn
OFF/ON the power SW, complete initializing of the RSPF, then
set the documents again.
10. Software B. Installing the software
Note:
The CD-ROM that accompanies the machine contains the following
software: The screen images in this manual are mainly for Windows XP.
With other versions of Windows, some screen images may be dif-
MFP driver ferent from those in this manual.
Printer driver In the following explanations it is assumed that the mouse is con-
The printer driver enables you to use the printer function of the figured for right hand operation.
machine. If an error message appears, follow the instructions on the screen
The printer driver includes the Print Status Window. This is a utility to solve the problem. After the problem is solved, the installation
that monitors the machine and informs you of the printing status, procedure will continue. Depending on the problem, you may
the name of the document currently being printed, and error mes- have to click the "Cancel" button to exit the installer. In this case,
sages. reinstall the software from the beginning after solving the prob-
Please note that the Print Status Window does not operate when lem.
the machine is used as a network printer. 1) The USB cable must not be connected to the machine. Make
Scanner driver* sure that the cable is not connected before proceeding.
The scanner driver allows you to use the scanning function of the If the cable is connected, a Plug and Play window will appear. If
machine with TWAIN-compliant and WIA-compliant applications. this happens, click the "Cancel" button to close the window and
disconnect the cable.
Sharpdesk*
Note: The cable will be connected in step 13).
Sharpdesk is an integrated software environment that makes it
2) Insert the CD-ROM into your computer's CD-ROM drive.
easy to manage documents and image files, and launch applica-
tions. 3) Click the "start" button, click "My Computer", and then double-
click the CD-ROM icon.
Button Manager* In Windows Vista, click the "Start" button, click "Computer",
Button Manager allows you to use the scanner menus on the and then double-click the CD-ROM icon.
machine to scan a document.
In Windows 98/Me/2000, double-click "My Computer", and
*: The scanning feature can only be used with computers that are then double-click the CD-ROM icon.
connected to the machine by a USB cable.
4) Double-click the "setup" icon.
A. Before installation In Windows Vista, if a message screen appears asking you for
confirmation, click "Allow".
Hardware and software requirements
5) The "SOFTWARE LICENSE" window will appear. Make sure
Check the following hardware and software requirements in order to
that you understand the contents of the software license, and
install the software.
then click the "Yes" button.
Computer type IBM PC/AT or compatible computer equipped Note: You can show the "SOFTWARE LICENSE" in a different lan-
with a USB 2.0/1.1*1 guage by selecting the desired language from the language
Operating Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows 2000 menu. To install the software in the selected language, con-
system*2 *3 Professional*4, Windows XP Professional*4, tinue the installation with that language selected.
Windows XP Home Edition*4, Windows Vista*4 6) Read the "Readme First" in the "Welcome" window and then
Display 1024 x 768 dots (XGA) display with 16bit click the "Next" button.
Hard disk free 150 MB or more 7) To install all of the software, click the "Standard" button and go
space to step 12).
Other hardware An environment on which any of the operating To install particular packages, click the "Custom" button and go
requirements systems listed above can fully operate to next step.
*1: Compatible with Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows 2000
Professional, Windows XP Professional, Windows XP Home
Edition or Windows Vista preinstalled model standardly
equipped with a USB port.
*2: Printing is not available in MS-DOS mode.
*3: The machine does not support printing from a Macintosh envi-
ronment.
*4: Administrator's rights are required to install the software using
the installer.
Installation environment and usable software
The following table shows the drivers and software that can be
installed for each version of Windows and interface connection
method.
Operating Printer Scanner Button
Cable Sharpdesk
system driver driver Manager
1
USB Windows 98/ Available* Available
Me/2000/XP/
Vista
*1: The printer driver that is installed will vary depending on the
type of connection between the machine and your computer.
Install the software according to the Operation Manual.

AR-208S/208D UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION 5 - 5

8) Click the "MFP Driver" button. Installing the Utility Software
Click the "Display Readme" button to show information on pack- 11) Click the "Button Manager" or the "Sharpdesk" button.
ages that are selected. Click the "Display Readme" button to show information on pack-
ages that are selected.
Follow the on-screen instructions.

9) Select "Connected to this computer" and click the "Next" button.

Follow the on-screen instructions.
Caution: In Windows 98/Me/2000, if the following screen appears,
click the "Skip" button or the "Continue" button as appro-
priate to continue the Sharpdesk installation.
If "Skip" is selected, the Sharpdesk installation will con-
tinue without installing Sharpdesk Imaging.
If "Continue" is selected, Sharpdesk Imaging will be
installed. If Imaging for Windows is installed on your com-
puter, Sharpdesk Imaging will overwrite Imaging for Win-
dows.

Caution:
If you are using Windows Vista and a security warning window
appears, be sure to click "Install this driver software anyway".
If you are running Windows 2000/XP and a warning message
appears regarding the Windows logo test or digital signature, be
sure to click "Continue Anyway" or "Yes".
10) You will return to the window of step 8). If you wish to install But-
ton Manager or Sharpdesk, click the "Utility Software" button.
12) When installing is finished, click the "Close" button.
If you do not wish to install the Utility Software, click the "Close"
Caution:
button and go to step 12).
If you are using Windows Vista and a security warning window
Note: After the installation, a message prompting you to restart
appears, be sure to click "Install this driver software anyway".
your computer may appear. In this case, click the "Yes" but-
ton to restart your computer. If you are running Windows 2000/XP and a warning message
appears regarding the Windows logo test or digital signature, be
sure to click "Continue Anyway" or "Yes".
A message will appear instructing you to connect the machine
to your computer. Click the "OK" button.
Note: After the installation, a message prompting you to restart
your computer may appear. In this case, click the "Yes" but-
ton to restart your computer.
13) Make sure that the power of the machine is turned on, and then
connect the USB cable.
Windows will detect the machine and a Plug and Play screen
will appear.

AR-208S/208D UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION 5 - 6

14) Follow the instructions in the plug and play window to install the (2) Using the machine as a shared printer
driver. If the machine will be used as a shared printer on a network, follow
Follow the on-screen instructions. these steps to install the printer driver in the client computer.
Caution: Note: To configure the appropriate settings in the print server, see
If you are using Windows Vista and a security warning window the operation manual or help file of your operating system.
appears, be sure to click "Install this driver software anyway". 1) Perform steps 2) through 6) in "Installing the software".
If you are running Windows 2000/XP and a warning message 2) Click the "Custom" button.
appears regarding the Windows logo test or digital signature, be
sure to click "Continue Anyway" or "Yes".
This completes the installation of the software.
If you installed Button Manager, set up Button Manager as
explained in "C. Setting up Button Manager".
If you installed Sharpdesk, the Sharpdesk setup screen will
appear. Follow the instructions in the screen to set up Sharpdesk.
(1) Connecting a USB cable
Follow the procedure below to connect the machine to your com-
puter.
A USB cable for connecting the machine to your computer is not
included with the machine. Please purchase the appropriate cable
for your computer.
Caution:
USB is available with a PC/AT compatible computer that was orig-
inally equipped with USB and had Windows 98, Windows Me,
Windows 2000 Professional, Windows XP or Windows Vista pre-
installed. 3) Click the "MFP Driver" button.
Do not connect the USB cable before installing the printer driver. Click the "Display Readme" button to show information on pack-
The USB cable should be connected during installation of the ages that are selected.
printer driver.
Note
If the machine will be connected using a USB 2.0 port of your
computer, please purchase a USB cable that supports USB 2.0.
To obtain the fastest USB 2.0 data transfer speed, "USB2.0
MODE SWITCH" in the machine's user programs must be set to
"HI-SPEED". For more information, see "[12] USER PROGRAM".
Use the machine's "HI-SPEED" mode only when using a com-
puter that is running Windows 2000/XP/Vista.
Even when the Microsoft USB 2.0 driver is used, it may not be
possible to obtain full USB 2.0 speed if a PC card supporting
USB 2.0 is used. To obtain the latest driver (which may enable a
higher speed), contact the manufacturer of your PC card.
Connection is also possible using a USB 1.1 port on your com-
puter.
However, the specifications will be USB 1.1 specifications (Full-
Speed).
1) Insert the cable into the USB connector on the machine. 4) Select "Connected via the network" and click the "Next" button.

2) Insert the other end of the cable into your computer's USB port.

AR-208S/208D UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION 5 - 7

5) Click the "Add Network Port" button.
In Windows Vista, the "Add Network Port" button does not
appear.
6) Select the network printer that is shared and click the "OK" but-
ton.
Ask your network administrator for the server name and printer
name of the machine on the network.
7) In the printer port selection window, verify the network printer
that is shared and whether the machine is to be used as the
default printer, make the selections and click the "Next" button.
Follow the on-screen instructions.
Caution:
If you are using Windows Vista and a security warning window
appears, be sure to click "Install this driver software anyway".
If you are running Windows 2000/XP and a warning message
appears regarding the Windows logo test or digital signature, be
sure to click "Continue Anyway" or "Yes".
8) You will return to the window of step 3). Click the "Close" button.
Note: After the installation, a message prompting you to restart
your computer may appear. In this case, click the "Yes" but-
ton to restart your computer.
This completes the installation of the software.
C. Setting up Button Manager
Button Manager is a software program that works with the scanner
driver to enable scanning from the machine.
To scan using the machine, Button Manager must be linked with the
scan menu on the machine. Follow the steps below to link Button
Manager to scanner events.
(1) Windows XP/Vista
1) Click the "start" button, click "Control Panel", click "Printers and
Other Hardware", and then click "Scanners and Cameras".
In Windows Vista, click the "Start" button, select "Control Panel"
and click "Hardware and Sound", and then click "Scanners and
Cameras".
AR-208S/208D UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION 5 - 8
2) Click the "SHARP AR-XXXX" icon and select "Properties" from
the "File" menu.
In Windows Vista, select "Properties" from the "Organize"
menu.
3) In the "Properties" screen, click the "Events" tab.
4) Select "SC1:" from the "Select an event" pull-down menu.
5) Select "Start this program" and then select "Sharp Button Man-
ager T" from the pull-down menu.
6) Click the "Apply" button.
7) Repeat Steps 4) through 6) to link Button Manager to "SC2:"
through "SC6:".
Select "SC2:" from the "Select an event" pull-down menu.
Select "Start this program", select "Sharp Button Manager T"
from the pull-down menu, and then click the "Apply" button. Do
the same for each ScanMenu through "SC6:".
When the settings have been completed, click the "OK" button
to close the screen.
Button Manager is now linked to the scan menu (1 through 6).
The scan settings for each of scan menu 1 through 6 can be
changed with the setting window of Button Manager.
For the factory default settings of the scan menu and the proce-
dures for configuring Button Manager settings, see "Button Man-
ager Settings" in the Online Manual.
(2) Windows 98/Me/2000
1) Click the "Start" button, select "Settings", and then click "Con-
trol Panel".
2) Double-click the "Scanners and Cameras" icon.
Note: If the "Scanners and Cameras" icon does not appear in Win-
dows Me, click "view all Control Panel options".
3) Select "SHARP AR-XXXX" and click the "Properties" button.
In Windows Me, right click "SHARP AR-XXXX" and click "Prop-
erties" in the pop-up menu.
4) In the "Properties" screen, click the "Events" tab. 11. Interface
5) Select "SC1:" from the "Scanner events" pull-down menu.
A. USB
Connector
4-pin ACON UBR23-4K2200
Type-B connector
Cable
Shielded twisted pair cable
(2 m (6 feet) Max.: high-speed transmission equivalent)
Pin configuration
The pin numbers and signal names are listed in the following table.
Pin No. Signal name
1 +5V
2 -DATA
3 +DATA
4 GND

6) Select "Sharp Button Manager T" in "Send to this application". 2 1

3 4

Note: If other applications are shown, deselect the checkboxes for
the other applications and leave only the Button Manager
checkbox selected.
7) Click the "Apply" button.
8) Repeat Steps 5) through 7) to link Button Manager to "SC2:"
through "SC6:".
Select "SC2:" from the "Scanner events" pull-down menu.
Select "Sharp Button Manager T" in "Send to this application"
and click the "Apply" button.
Do the same for each ScanMenu through "SC6:".
When the settings have been completed, click the "OK" button
to close the screen.
Button Manager is now linked to the scan menu (1 through 6).
The scan settings for each of scan menus 1 through 6 can be
changed with the setting window of Button Manager.
For the factory default settings of the scan menu and the proce-
dures for configuring Button Manager settings, see "Button Man-
ager Settings" in the Online Manual.
12. Moving
Moving instructions
When moving the unit, follow the procedure below.
Note: When moving this unit, be sure to remove the toner cartridge
in advance.
1) Turn the power switch off and remove the power cord from the
outlet.
2) Open the side cover and front cover, in that order. Remove the
toner cartridge and close the front cover and side cover, in that
order.
To open and close the side cover and front cover, and to remove
the toner cartridge.
3) Raise the handle of the paper tray and pull the paper tray out
until it stops.
4) Push the center of the pressure plate down until it locks in place
and lock the plate using the pressure plate lock which has been
stored in the front of the paper tray.
5) Push the paper tray back into the unit.
6) Lock the scan head locking switch.
Note: When shipping the unit, the scan head locking switch must
be locked to prevent shipping damage.
7) Close the multi-bypass tray and the paper output tray extension,
and attach the packing materials and tape which were removed
during installation of the unit.
8) Pack the unit into the carton.

AR-208S/208D UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION 5 - 9

13. Scanner moisture-proof kit 3) Remove the rear cover for the document glass.
<1> Remove the two screws and then remove the right glass
If the machine is installed in a highly humid environment, you can holder.
alleviate dew condensation inside the scanner by installing the
<2> Slide the rear cover for the document glass to remove it.
scanner moisture-proof kit described below.
<3> Remove the table glass.
A. Components
Scanner moisture-proof kit (DKIT-0016QSZZ)
1
Name Part code Qty
1 Scanner condensation PSHEZ0493QSZZ 3
prevention mylar
2 Optical right hole mylar B PSHEZ0469QSZZ 2
3 Scanner motor metal plate PMLT-0106QSZZ 2 3
cushion 2
4 Scanner upper surface cushion PMLT-0105QSZZ 1
5 Scanner motor lower mylar PSHEP0600QSZZ 1
6 Scanner UPG mylar J3 PSHEP0599QSZZ 1
7 Fan housing cushion PMLT-0108QSZ1 1

B. Precautions at installation
Clean the position where each cushion/mylar is attached with
industrial alcohol before the work. 4) Attach the Scanner condensation prevention mylar at the 3
C. Attachment method positions on the rear side of the main unit as described below.

Turn the main switch to the "OFF" position and remove the power Note: The hole should be covered with the mylar.
plug from the outlet. Align the edge of the mylar to the R part (the yellow line in the
diagram below) so that the hole of the metal plate is covered as
1) Detach the RSPF.
much as possible.
Detach the RSPF from the copier and softly place it on top of
the original table as shown below.

2) Remove the rear cabinet.

Align the edge of the mylar to the R part (the yellow line in the
<1> Unscrew the screw and remove the rear cabinet diagram below) so that the hole of the metal plate is covered as
shielding plate. (Save the screw.) much as possible.
<2> Unscrew three screws and remove the rear cabinet. (Save
the screws.)
<3> Disconnect the connector of the RSPF, and remove the
RSPF from the machine.

AR-208S/208D UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION 5 - 10

 Attach along the edge of the projection (the yellow line in the
diagram below).
6) Attach the Scanner motor metal plate cushion at 1 position on
the attachment plate of the motor on the rear side of the main
unit.
Note: The hole on the top of the motor unit should be covered
with the mylar.
Align the edge of the metal plate and the edge of the cushion
(the yellow line in the diagram below).

5) Attach the Optical right hole mylar B at the 2 positions shown in

the diagrams below which are at the top of the rear side of the 20mm - 25mm
main unit.
Note: The holes should be covered with the mylar.
Attach along the edge of the cushion (the yellow line in the dia-
gram below). Press and attach the cushion aligning it to the metal plate so
that there will be no gap between them.
Align with the inside line of the bent part (the yellow line in the
diagram below).

Stick the excessive part on the side.

Align with the raised part (the yellow line in the diagram below).
Match the center of the mylar (in the horizontal direction) to the
center of the raised part.

Stick the excessive part on the side.

AR-208S/208D UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION 5 - 11

7) Attach the Scanner upper surface cushion on the top and the
rear side at the rear side of the main unit.
Align the cushion with the side of the raised part (the yellow line
in the diagram below).
9) Attach the Scanner motor lower mylar at 1 position under the
motor attachment plate on the rear side of the main unit.
Note: The mylar should cover the hole under the motor unit.
Attach matching the hole (the yellow mark in the diagram) and
along with the side edge (the yellow arrow in the diagram).
Disconnect the motor harness from the connector and take off
the snap band from the hole.

Do not cover this hole. Align the edge of the cushion with
the edge of the metal plate.

Bend the part which is sticking out to the rear side of the scan-
ner and attach to the surface.
Press the mylar with a sharp-pointed stick or something so that
it is stuck correctly.
10) Attach the Scanner motor metal plate cushion covering the bot-
tom part of the Scanner motor lower mylar.
Note: The hole under the motor unit should be covered.
Attach the cushion to cover the gap between the mylar and the
metal plate (the yellow mark).
Press the cushion at the steps shown in the diagram so that
there will be no gap.
Press the cushion to make sure all the holes are covered.
8) Bend the edge of the Scanner motor lower mylar and stick
together.

Stick the lower part of the cushion to the mylar, too.

Stick together. Stick together.

AR-208S/208D UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION 5 - 12

 Press the cushion with a sharp-pointed stick or something to fill
the gap between the mylar and the metal plate.
13) Attach the Fan housing cushion to the cooling fan at the posi-
tion shown in the diagram below.
Cover the top and the right side of the fan housing when you
see the fan housing from the backside of the machine.
Note: Please make sure the double-sided tape is not exposed
where the cushion is sticking out from the edge of the fan
housing.

11) Attach the motor connector and the snap band to the original
position.

View from Back side

the arrow A

12) Attach the Scanner UPG mylar J3 to cover the hole on the right
side of inside of the scanner.
Note: The mylar should cover the hole shown by the arrow in
the diagram. Reference position
Attach along with the bent part of the metal plate and align the Attach the cushion leaving 3 - 7mm
edge of the mylar with the line shown in the diagram (the yellow from the edge.
line in the diagram).

3 - 7mm

Attach the cushion leaving 3 - 7mm from the edge so that the
gap between the Fan housing cushion and the filter of the rear
cabinet is filled for sure.
14) Attach the parts removed in the items 1), 2), and 3).

AR-208S/208D UNPACKING AND INSTALLATION 5 - 13

[6] COPY PROCESS
An OPC drum is used for the photoconductor.
(Structure of the OPC drum layers)
OPC layer
(20 microns thick)
Pigment layer (0.2
to 0.3 microns thick)
Aluminum drum

1. Functional diagram

Main charger

Laser beam Cleaning blade

MG roller Drum

Transfer unit

Resist roller

(Basic operation cycle)

Semiconductor laser

Focus correction lens

Main high voltage unit

Exposure

Saw tooth Charge

Toner

Drum Developing
Developer
Cleaning
Cleaning blade

Waste toner box PS roller

To face Synchronization
Paper release Fusing Separation Transfer with drum
Manual feed
down tray

Heat roller Electrode Transfer charger Cassette

paper feed

Heater lamp Transfer high

voltage unit
Print process

Paper transport route

AR-208S/208D COPY PROCESS 6 - 1

2. Outline of print process
This printer is a non-impact printer that uses a semiconductor laser
and electrostatic print process. This printer uses an OPC (Organic
Photo Conductor) for its photoconductive material.
First, voltage from the main corona unit charges the drum surface
and a latent image is formed on the drum surface using a laser
beam. This latent image forms a visible image on the drum surface
when toner is applied. The toner image is then transferred onto the
print paper by the transfer corona and fused on the print paper in
the fusing section with a combination of heat and pressure.
Step-2: Exposure (laser beam, lens)
A Laser beam is generated from the semiconductor laser and con-
trolled by the print pattern signal. The laser writes onto the OPC
drum surface through the polygon mirrors and lens. The resistance
of the OPC layer decreases for an area exposed by the laser beam
(corresponding to the print pattern signal). The beam neutralizes
the negative charge. An electrostatic latent image is formed on the
drum surface.
Semiconductor laser

Step-1: Charge
Step-2: Exposure
* Latent image is formed on the drum.
Step-3: Developing
Latent image formed on the drum is then changed into visi-
ble image with toner. Exposure
Step-4: Transfer (semiconductor laser)
The visible image (toner image) on the drum is transferred
OPC layer
onto the print paper.
Pigment
Step-5: Cleaning layer
Residual toner on the drum surface is removed and col- Aluminum
lected by the cleaning blade. drum
Step-6: Optical discharge
Residual charge on the drum surface is removed, by semi-
conductor laser beam. Drum surface charge
after the exposure
3. Actual print process OPC layer
Pigment
Step-1: DC charge layer
A uniform negative charge is applied over the OPC drum surface by Aluminum
the main charging unit. Stable potential is maintained by means of layer
Non-image area Image area
the Scorotron charger.
Positive charges are generated in the aluminum layer.

About
DC5.5KV

( 580V/ 400V)

AR-208S/208D COPY PROCESS 6 - 2

Step-3: Developing (DC bias) Step-4: Transfer
A bias potential is applied to the MG roller in the two component The visible image on the drum surface is transferred onto the print
magnetic brush developing method, and the toner is charged nega- paper by applying a positive charge from the transfer corona to the
tive through friction with the carrier. backside of the print paper.
Non-image area of the drum surface charged with negative poten-
tial repel the toner, whereas the laser exposed portions where no
negative charges exist, attract the toner. As a result, a visible image
appears on the drum surface.

:Carrier (Magnetized particle)

:Toner (Charge negative by friction)
(N) (S) Permanent magnet
(provided in three locations)

About DC 5.2kV

MG roller
DC
400V 8V Step-5: Separation
Since the print paper is charged positively by the transfer corona, it
is discharged by the separation corona. The separation corona is
connected to ground.

Step-6: Cleaning
Toner remaining on the drum is removed and collected by the
cleaning blade. It is transported to the waste toner collecting section
in the cleaning unit by the waste toner transport roller.

Toner is attracted over the shadowed area because of the develop-

ing bias.

AR-208S/208D COPY PROCESS 6 - 3

Step-7: Optical discharge (Semiconductor laser) Start
Before the drum rotation is stopped, the semiconductor laser is 1) Because the grid potential is at a low level, the drum potential is
radiated onto the drum to reduce the electrical resistance in the at about -400V. (Carrier may not be attracted though the carrier
OPC layer and eliminate residual charge, providing a uniform state is pulled towards the drum by the electrostatic force of -400V.
to the drum surface for the next page to be printed. 2) Developing bias (-400V) is applied when the photoconductor
When the electrical resistance is reduced, positive charges on the potential is switched from LOW to HIGH.
aluminum layer are moved and neutralized with negative charges 3) Once developing bias (-400V) is applied and the photoconduc-
on the OPC layer. tor potential rises to HIGH, toner will not be attracted to the
Semiconductor laser drum.
Stop
The reverse sequence takes place.
Retaining developing bias at an abnormal occurrence
Function
The developing bias will be lost if the power supply was removed
during print process. In this event, the drum potential slightly abates
and the carrier makes deposits on the drum because of strong
static power. To prevent this, the machine incorporates a function to
retain the developing bias for a certain period and decrease the
Charge by the Scorotron charger voltage gradually against possible power loss.
Function
Basic function
The Scorotron charger functions to maintain uniform surface poten-
Normally, the developing bias voltage is retained for a certain time
tial on the drum at all times, It control the surface potential regard-
before the drum comes to a complete stop if the machine should
less of the charge characteristics of the photoconductor.
stop before completing the normal print cycle. The developing bias
Basic function can be added before resuming the operation after an abnormal
A screen grid is placed between the saw tooth and the photocon- interruption. Therefore, carrier will not make a deposit on the drum
ductor. A stable voltage is added to the screen grid to maintain the surface.
corona current on the photoconductor.
As the photoconductor is charged by the saw tooth from the main
corona unit, the surface potential increases. This increases the cur-
rent flowing through the screen grid. When the photoconductor
potential nears the grid potential, the current turns to flow to the grid
so that the photoconductor potential can be maintained at a stable
level.
Process controlling
Function
The print pattern signal is converted into an invisible image by the
semiconductor laser using negative to positive (reversible) develop-
ing method. Therefore, if the developing bias is added before the
drum is charged, toner is attracted onto the drum. If the developing
bias is not added when the drum is charged, the carrier is attracted
to the drum because of the strong electrostatic force of the drum.
To avoid this, the process is controlled by adjusting the drum poten-
tial and the grid potential of the Scorotron charger.
Basic function
Voltage added to the screen grid can be selected, high and low. To
make it easily understood, the figure below shows voltage transition
at the developer unit.
START STOP
0
Print potential

Toner attract
potential Developing bias
2)

3)

1) Low

Drum potential
4) High
Time

AR-208S/208D COPY PROCESS 6 - 4

[7] OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS
1. Outline of operation
The outline of operation is described referring to the basic configuration.
(Basic configuration)

(Option)
FAX
FAX modem
Scanner section

Operation
CCD (Option)
section
USB Network
Network
FAX I/F
Box

USB
MCU (Main control/image process section) Printer/ PC
Scanner I/F
USB

LSU (Laser unit)

Laser diode, Polygon mirror lens

Laser beam
Paper exit
Fusing section
Process section
Printer section

Paper transport section

Cassette paper Manual paper

feed section feed section

(Outline of copy operation) Printing

Setting conditions 7) Electrostatic latent images are formed on the OPC drum
according to the laser beams, and the latent images are devel-
1) Set copy conditions such as the copy quantity and the copy
oped to be visible images(toner images).
density with the operation section, and press the COPY button.
The information on copy conditions is sent to the MCU. 8) Meanwhile the paper is fed to the image transfer section in syn-
chronization with the image lead edge.
Image scanning
9) After the transfer of toner images onto the paper, the toner
2) When the COPY button is pressed, the scanner section starts images are fused to the paper by the fusing section. The copied
scanning of images. paper is discharged onto the exit tray.
The light from the copy lamp is reflected by the document and
passed through the lens to the CCD. (Outline of printer operation)
The print data sent from the PC are passed through the I/F and the
Photo signal/Electric signal conversion
MCU to the LSU. The procedures after that are the same as above
3) The image is converted into electrical signals by the CCD circuit
5) and later.
and passed to the MCU.
(Outline of scanner operation)
Image process
The scan data are passed through the MCU and the I/F to the PC
4) The document image signal sent from the CCD circuit is pro-
according to the conditions requested by the PC or set by the oper-
cessed under the revised conditions and sent to the LSU (laser
ations with the operation panel.
unit) as print data.
Electric signal/Photo signal (laser beam) conversion
5) The LSU emits laser beams according to the print data.
(Electrical signals are converted into photo signals.)
6) The laser beams are radiated through the polygon mirror and
various lenses to the OPC drum.

AR-208S/208D OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 7 - 1

2. Scanner section
A. Scanner unit
The scanner unit in the digital copier scans images. Spectral sensitivity characteristics (Standard characteristics)

It is composed of the optical unit and the drive unit. The optical unit
performs scanning in the main scan direction with the light receiving
elements (color CCD). The drive unit performs scanning in the sub
scanning direction by moving the optical unit.

Relative sensitivity
B. Optical system
Two white lamps are used as the light source.
Light radiated from the light source is applied to the document on
the document table. The reflected light from the document is
reflected 4 times by No. 1 - No. 3 mirrors and passed through the
reduction lens to form images on the light-receiving surface of 3-line
CCD.
The light-receiving surface of the color CCD is provided with 3 line
scanning sections for RGB. Separate images scanned in each color
section are overlapped to complete color scanning. (When PC Wavelength [nm]
scanning)
The resolution is 600dpi. (Spectrum characteristics of the color CCD)
When copying, only the green component is used to print with the
printer. 1 9 8 10 8 9
The color component for printing can be switched to red or blue by
the service simulation.
100
100.0

75
6
Sensitivity

50.2
50
45.4

25

7
380 480 580 680 780

Wavelength [nm]

(Spectrum characteristics of the lamp) 3 5 4 2

(Optical unit)
1 Table glass 2 Optical unit 3 Lens
4 Mirror 1 5 Mirror 2 6 Mirror 3
7 CCD PWB 8 Lamp 9 Reflector
10 Original

C. Drive system
The drive system is composed of the scanner motor, the pulley
gear, the idle pulley, the idle gear, the belt 473, the belt 190, and the
shaft.
The motor rotation is converted into reciprocated movements of the
belt 473 through the idle gear, the pulley gear, the belt 190, and the
idle pulley to drive the optical unit.

9 1
7

3 4 6 2 8 5 3

1 Scanner motor 2 Pulley gear 3 Idle pulley

4 Belt 473 5 Belt 190 6 Optical unit
7 Shaft 8 Idle gear 9 Table glass

AR-208S/208D OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 7 - 2

3. Laser unit B. Laser beam path
The image data sent from the MCU (image process circuit) is sent
to the LSU (laser unit), where it is converted into laser beams.

A. Basic structure
The LSU unit is the writing section of the digital optical system.
The semiconductor laser is used as the light source, and images
are formed on the OPC drum by the polygon mirror and f lens, etc.
The laser beams are passed through the collimator lens, the cylin-
drical lens, the polygon mirror, the f lens, and the mirror to form
images on the OPC drum in the main scanning direction. The laser
emitting PWB is provided with the APC (auto power control) in order
to eliminate fluctuations in the laser power. The BD PWB works for
measurement of the laser writing start point.
4 3 2 1
6

5 C. Composition
Effective scanning width: 216mm (max.)
Resolution: 600dpi
Beam diameter: 75um in the main scanning direction, 80um in the
sub scanning direction
Image surface power: 0.18 0.01mW (Laser wavelength 770 -
6 3 795nm)
Polygon motor section: Brushless motor 20.787rpm
No Component Function No. of mirror surfaces: 5 surfaces
1 Semiconductor laser Generates laser beams.
2 Collimator lens Converges laser beams in parallel. 4. Fuser section
3 Cylinder lens Takes the focus.
4 Polygon mirror, Reflects laser beams at a constant
polygon motor rpm.
5 BD (Lens, PWB) Detects start timing of laser
scanning.
6 f lens Converges laser beams at a spot on
the drum.
Makes the laser scanning speeds at
both ends of the drum same as each
other. (Refer to the figure below.)
Makes the laser scanning speeds at both ends of the drum same as
each other.

abc d=e=f
a b c d e f

f LENS

AR-208S/208D OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 7 - 3

A. General description
General block diagram (cross section)
Thermal fuse
2) The surface temperature of the upper heat roller is set to 160 -
200C. The surface temperature during the power save mode is
set to 100C.
Separator pawl 3) The self-check function comes active when one of the following
malfunctions occurs, and an "H" is displayed on the multicopy
PPD2 window.
a. When the heat roller surface temperature rises above 240C.
b. When the heat roller surface temperature drops below 100C
during the copy cycle.

Separator pawl c. Open thermistor

d. Open thermal fuse
e. When the heat roller temperature does not reach 190C within
27 second after supplying the power.
Thermistor (4) Fusing resistor
Pressure roller
Fusing resistor
Heat roller This model is provided with a fusing resistor in the fusing section to
improve transfer efficiency.
Paper guide Since the upper heat roller is conductive, when using copy paper
that contains moisture and the distance between the transfer unit
Top view and the fusing unit is short, the transfer current may find a path to
ground via the copy paper, the upper heat roller and the discharging
Thermal fuse
Thermistor brush.
Heat roller Heater lamp
5. Paper feed section and paper
transport section
A. Paper transport path and general operations
4 3 5 2

Separator pawl

(1) Heat roller 1

A Teflon roller is used for the heat roller and a silicone rubber roller
is used for the lower heat roller for better toner fusing performance 6
and paper separation.
7
(2) Separator pawl 8
Three separator pawls are used on the upper heat roller. The sepa- 9
rator pawls are Teflon coated to reduce friction with the roller and 10
prevent a smear on the paper caused by the separator pawl.
(3) Thermal control
1) The heater lamp, thermistor, main PWB, DC power supply 14 13 12 11
PWB, and triac within the power supply unit are used to control
the temperature in the fuser unit. 1 Scanner unit 8 Drum
To prevent against abnormally high temperature in the fuser 2 Copy lamp 9 Transfer unit
unit, a thermal breaker and thermal fuse are used for safety pur- 3 LSU (Laser unit) 10 Pickup roller
poses. 4 Paper exit roller 11 Manual paper feed tray
5 Main charger 12 Manual paper feed roller
6 Heat roller 13 PS roller unit
Heated by the heater 7 Pressure roller 14 Paper feed roller
lamp. (800W) Paper feed is made in two ways; the tray paper feed and the manual
paper feed. The tray is of universal-type, and has the capacity of
Safety device
250 sheets.
(thermal breaker, thermal The surface temperature The front loading system allows you to install or remove the tray
fuse) of the upper heat roller is from the front cabinet.
sensed by the thermistor.
The general descriptions on the tray paper feed and the manual
paper feed operation are given below.

Level of the thermistor is

controlled by the main PWB.
Triac (in the
power supply unit)

With the signal from the

main PWB, the triac is
controlled on and off.
(power supply PWB)

AR-208S/208D OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 7 - 4

(1) Cassette paper feed operation
1) The figure below shows the positions of the pick-up roller, the
paper feed clutch sleeve, and the paper feed latch in the initial
state without pressing the COPY button after lighting the ready
lamp.
The paper feed latch is in contact with the projection of the
clutch sleeve.
2) When the COPY button is pressed, the main drive motor starts
rotating to drive each drive gear.
The pick-up drive gear also is driven at that time. Since, how-
ever, the paper feed latch is in contact with the projection of the
clutch sleeve, rotation of the drive gear is not transmitted to the
pick-up roller, which does not rotate therefore.
PFS
RRS
OFF
OFF
3) After about 0.1 sec from when the main motor start rotating, the
tray paper feed solenoid (PFS) turns on for a moment.
This disengages the paper feed latch from the projection of the
clutch sleeve, transmitting rotation of the pick-up drive gear to
the paper feed roller shaft, rotating the pick-up roller to feed the
paper.
PFS
RRS
OFF
OFF
4) After more than half rotation of the pick-up roller, the paper feed
latch is brought in contact with a notch on the clutch sleeve,
stopping rotation of the pick-up roller.
AR-208S/208D OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 7 - 5
5) At this time, the paper is fed passed the paper entry detection
switch (PPD1), and detected by it. After about 0.15 sec from
detection of paper by PPD1, the tray paper feed solenoid (PFS)
turns on so that the clutch sleeve projection comes into contact
with the paper feed latch to stop the pick-up roller. Then the
pick-up roller rotates for about 0.15 sec so that the lead edge of
the paper is evenly pressed on the resist roller, preventing
against skew feeding.
PFS
RRS
ON
OFF
6) To release the resist roller, the tray paper feed solenoid and the
resist solenoid are turned on by the paper start signal to disen-
gage the resist start latch from the clutch sleeve, transmitting
rotation of the resist drive gear to the resist roller shaft. Thus the
paper is transported by the resist roller.
7) After the resist roller starts rotating, the paper is passed through
the pre-transfer guide to the transfer section. Images are trans-
ferred on the paper, which is separated from the OPC drum by
the drum curve and the separation section.
PFS
RRS
OFF
ON
8) The paper separated from the drum is passed through the fus-
ing paper guide, the heat roller (fusing section), POD (paper out
detector) to the copy tray.
(2) Manual multi paper feed operation 3) When pawl C of the manual paper feed clutch sleeve is
1) Before paper feed operation, the manual paper feed solenoid engaged with the manual feed latch, the manual feed stopper
(MPFS) is turned OFF as shown in the figure below. falls and the manual take-up roller rises. At that time, the man-
ual paper feed roller is rotating.

A
C A
C

OFF
MPFS
2) When the PRINT button is pressed, the manual paper feed
solenoid (MPFS) turns on to disengage the manual paper feed
latch.
A from the manual paper feed clutch sleeve A, rotating the man-
ual paper feed roller and the manual take-up roller. At the same
time, the manual paper feed stopper opens and the manual
take-up roller is pressed to the surface of the paper to start
paper feeding.
ON
MPFS
4) The lead edge of the transported paper is pressed on the resist
roller by the transport roller. Then the paper is stopped tempo-
rarily to allow synchronization with the lead edge of the image
on the OPC drum.
From this point, the operation is the same as the paper feed
operation from the tray. (Refer to A-5 - 8.)
5) The solenoid turns off to close the gate and return to the initial
state.

C
A
A C

ON OFF
MPFS MPFS

AR-208S/208D OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 7 - 6

(3) Conditions of occurrence of paper misfeed C. Operational descriptions
a. When the power is turned on:
PPD or POD is ON when the power is turned on.
Time chart (Tray feed)
b. Copy operation
Document set
a PPD1 jam PPD1 does not turn off within 4 sec after turning
on the resist roller.
SPID ON Document set sensor
b PPD2 jam PPD2 is off immediately after turning on the
resist roller.
Document feed unit lamp ON
PPD2 does not turn off within 1.2 sec after
turning off the resist roller.
PSW ON Copy start
c POD jam POD does not turn on within 2.9 sec after turning
on the resist roller.
MIRM rotation The scanner is shifted
POD does not turn off within 1.5 sec - 2.7 sec to the exposure position.
after turning off PPD2. (Copier side) (SPF side)

MM rotation Main motor rotation SPFM rotation SPF motor rotation

6. RSPF section
A. Outline CPFS ON Paper feed

The RSPF (Reverse Single Path Feeder) is installed to the AR- SPUS ON Document feed

208D / AR-208S as a standard provision, and it automatically cop- PPD ON

ies up to 50 sheets of documents of a same size. (Only one set of
copies) RRC ON Synchronization SPPD ON Document transport sensor
Paper transport Document transport
B. Document transport path and basic
(Transfer) (Exposure)
composition
1 2 3 4 5 (Fusing) SRJD ON

POD ON (Document exit)

(Paper exit)
In the zooming mode, the magnification ratio in the sub
scanning direction (paper transport direction) is adjusted
by changing the document transport speed.

10 98 7 6

1 Pickup roller 2 Separation roller

3 Paper empty sensor 4 Upper transport roller
5 Paper sensor 6 PS roller
7 Lower transport roller 8 Reverse self-weight gate
9 Paper exit sensor 10 Paper exit roller

PSW
MRMT
SPF M
CL
SPUS
SPPD
560msec
SCANST 1200msec
SRVC
SRJD

MAIN M
CPFS1
RRS
PPD1
PPD2
POD

AR-208S/208D OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 7 - 7

D. Cases where a document jam is caused
1) The SPPD is ON when turning ON the power.
2) The SPPD does not turn ON for 4.0sec from starting document
feed. (in 100% copy)
3) The SPPD does not turn OFF for 4.7sec after detecting turning
ON of the SPPD. (100% copy)
4) The RSPF cover or the OC cover is opened during document
transportation.
5) The SRJD is ON when the power is turned ON.
6) The SRJD is not turned ON for 2.4sec from release of PS in
paper feed from the document set position. (100% copy)
7) The SRJD is not turned OFF for 1.6sec from completion of doc-
ument scan in the case of complete document exit. (100%
copy)

E. RSPF open/close detection

(book document detection)
RSPF open/close detection (book document) detection is per-
formed by detecting the interval between the reference lines on the
white Mylar attached to the paper exit guide (document scanning
section) by the scanner (CCD) and detecting the varied quantity.

B (Floating)
A
(White Mylar)

Reference line Reference line

(CCD)
B A - B = Varied quantity of pixels
A (pixel)

Note: When replacing the carriage unit, be sure to execute TC41-

06.
If TC41-06 is not executed, the carriage unit may not read C. Back copy
the reference line on the white Mylar, preventing the docu-
ment from being fed. Document transport:
By switchback operation, the document is sent through the upper
7. D-D (Duplex to Duplex) mode paper/ transport roller and the PS roller to the exposure section, where the
back surface of the document is exposed.
document transport (Duplex model) The document is sent to the document exit section by the lower
A. Initial state transport roller and the paper exit roller.

Set duplex documents on the document tray. The document is sent to the intermediate tray. (However, it is not
discharged completely.)
Set paper on the cassette. (In the duplex mode, the manual feed
The document is stopped once, and switchback operation is per-
tray cannot be selected.)
formed.
B. Front copy The document is sent through the upper transport roller and the
Document transport: PS roller and the exposure section (without being exposed) to the
document exit section.
The document feed roller feeds the document from the paper feed
roller to the PS roller. The document is discharged to the document exit tray.
The document is exposed in the exposure section, and trans- Paper transport:
ported to the document exit section by the lower transport roller Switchback operation is performed.
and the paper exit roller. The paper is sent through the upper side of the gate section and
The document is transported to the paper exit tray. (However, it is the duplex transport section and the PS roller, and the images on
not discharged completely.) the back surface are transferred.
The document is stopped once, and then switchback operation is The paper is sent through the fusing section and discharged to
performed. (To the back copy) the paper exit tray.
Paper transport:
The paper is passed through the paper feed roller and the PS roller,
and the images on the front surface are transferred.
The paper is passed through the fusing section and the lower
side of the gate section to the paper exit tray side. (However, it is
not discharged completely.)
The paper is stopped once, and switchback operation is per-
formed. (To the back copy)

AR-208S/208D OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 7 - 8

Rotation copy mode:
The front and the back are in upside down each other.

Copy mode without rotation:

The front and the back are not in upside down.

8. Shifter

Shift width: 2.5cm

The offset function by the shifter is turned ON/OFF by the user pro-
gram.
According to the setting, offset operation is performed for every job.
(Default: ON)

AR-208S/208D OPERATIONAL DESCRIPTIONS 7 - 9

[8] DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 2) Remove the drum fixing plate and the photoconductor drum.
(Note) Dispose the drum fixing plate which was removed.
Before disassembly, be sure to disconnect the power cord for
safety.
1. Do not disconnect or connect the connector and the har-
ness during the machine is powered. Especially be careful
not to disconnect or connect the harness between the
MCU PWB and the LSU (MCU PWB: CN20) during the
machine is powered. (If it is disconnected or connected
during the machine is powered, the IC inside the LSU will
be destroyed.)
2. To disconnect the harness after turning on the power, be
sure to turn off the power and wait for at least 10 sec LO C K

before disconnection. (Note that a voltage still remains

immediately after turning off the power.)

The disassembly and assembly procedures are described for the

following sections:
1. High voltage section (2)
2. Operation panel section
3. Optical section
4. Fusing section
5. Tray paper feed/transport section
(3)
6. Manual paper feed section
7. Rear frame section
8. Power section
3) Check the cleaning blade and the red felt for no damage.
9. DV unit section
If there is any damage, execute all procedures from item 5)
10. Duplex motor section (AR-208D only)
and later.
11. Reverse roller section (AR-208D only)
If there is no damage, execute the procedure of item 12).
12. RSPF section
4) Remove the main charger.
(When uneven charging occurs, clean the screen grid and the
1. High voltage section sawteeth with an air blower.)
A. List
No. Part name Ref.
1 Drum
2 Transfer charger unit
3 Charger wire

B. Drum replacement
1) Remove the drum cover. (4 Lock Tabs)

AR-208S/208D DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 1

5) Remove the cleaning blade. 9) Attach the felt.
Note: Dispose the cleaning blade which was removed. : Check while pressing the blade.
If a cleaning error occurs, replace the cleaning blade. Cleaning blade
(Recommendable replacement cycle: Every 25K)

0 0.3 mm 0 0.3 mm

Moquette R
Moquette F

0.2 0.5 mm

0.2 0.5 mm
Sub blade

0 0.5 mm 0 0.5 mm

Cleaning blade

Moquette R
Moquette F

6) Clean the cleaning section and the waste toner pipe to remove
waste toner completely with a vacuum cleaner.
7) Remove the felt and duplex tape completely. Sub blade
Note: Be careful not to scratch or bend the sub blade. Be careful not to allow the
8) Attach the cleaning blade. moquette to cover the sub blade.

Securely insert the plate section of the cleaning blade into the Example of NG
unit and fix it with a screw.
Attach the mocket with slightly pressing section A of the clean-
Do not touch the cleaning blade rubber with your hand.
ing blade.
When attaching the cleaning blade, press the cleaning blade in
Do not touch the tip of the cleaning blade.
the arrow direction and attach.
Do not put the mocket under the cleaning blade.
Do not put the mocket on the sub blade.
Do not press the sub blade with the mocket.
If the moquette F/R is deformed or damaged, replace it. (Rec-
ommendable replacement cycle: Every 25K)
10) Attach the main charger.
Securely set the MC holder on the projection of the process
frame.
Securely insert two projections of the MC holder into the groove
in the process frame.
When attaching the MC holder ass'y, be careful not to make
contact with the cleaning blade.

AR-208S/208D DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 2

11) Attach the drum fixing plate and the photoconductor drum. 2) Push up the lock pawls (2 positions) of the side cover, and
Apply grease to the inside of the photoconductor drum. (Dia. 2) remove the transfer charger.

Lock pawl rear

1)

2)

Transfer
charger 1)
Attach the drum from (b). (Prevention against the sub blade
edge breakage)
Attach the drum so that its position with the sub blade is as
shown.
12) Attach the drum cover.
Note: After attaching the drum cover, do not make a copy.
When attaching the drum cover, engage the detection
gear 20T rib with the 30T gear rib, and attach the drum Lock pawl rear
cover to the process frame.
13) Insert the process unit into the machine until it is fully engaged. D. Assembly procedure
C. Disassembly procedure (Transfer charger unit) For assembly, reverse the disassembly procedure.
1) Press the side cover open/close button and open the side E. TC unit cleaning
cover.
1) Remove the charger cleaner from the manual paper feed unit.

1)

1)

2)

AR-208S/208D DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 3

2) Clean the TC front guide and the TC holder with alcohol. F. Charger wire replacement
1) Remove the TC cover and remove the screw.
2) Remove the spring and remove the charger wire.
3) Install a new charger wire by reversing the procedures (1) and
(2).
At that time, be careful of the following items.
The rest of the charger wire must be within 1.5mm. Refer to Fig.1
The spring hook section (charger wire winding section) must be
in the range of the projection section.
Be careful not to twist the charger wire.

3)

3) Set the charger cleaner to the transfer unit, and move it recipro-
cally a few times in the direction of the arrow shown in the fig- 1)
ure below.

4) Charger wire
3) 1)

2)
2)

1)

1mm
Protrusion

1.5mm

Fig.1

2. Operation panel section

A. List
No. Part name Ref.
1 Operation panel unit
2 Operation PWB

B. Disassembly procedure
1) Open the side door, and Open the front cover.

1)

2)

AR-208S/208D DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 4

2) Remove the screws (4 pcs.), the harness, and the operation 3. Optical section
panel unit.
A. List
1)
NO. Part name Ref.
1 Copy lamp unit
2 Copy lamp
3 Lens unit
1)
B. Disassembly procedure
1) Remove four screws, and remove the rear cabinet and the rear
cabinet cover.

1)

2)

1)

1)
2)
3) Remove four screws, and remove the operation cabinet.
4) Disconnect the connector.
5) Remove eight screws, and remove the operation PWB.

2) 1)

3)
1)
2)
1)
2) Remove the connector and the clamp, and remove the RSPF
2) 5) unit.
5)

5) 5)

4)

C. Assembly procedure
For assembly, reverse the disassembly procedure
4)
3)

2)

1)

AR-208S/208D DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 5

3) Remove five screws, remove the operation unit, and disconnect 11) Remove the screw, and remove the rod stopper.
the connector. 12) Remove the rod.
4) Remove the right cabinet.
5) Remove the left cabinet.
6) Remove the rear cover.
7) Remove the table glass.
3)

1)
6)
1)
5)
7)

1)

2)
3) 4) 1)

2)
13) Lift the rear side of the carriage, remove the belt and the con-
nector, and remove the carriage.
1) Note: When replacing the carriage unit, be sure to execute TC41-
06.
1) If TC41-06 is not executed, the carriage unit may not read
the reference line on the white Mylar, preventing the
8) Move the carriage to the position indicated on the figure. document from being fed.
9) Loosen the screw which is fixing the tension plate.
4) 1)
10) Move the tension plate in the arrow direction to release the ten-
sion, and remove the belt.

2)
3)

2) 4)
3)

1)

AR-208S/208D DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 6

C. Assembly procedure 4. Fusing section
CCD core A. List
1) Insert the CCD-MCU harness into the CCD PWB of the car-
riage unit. No. Part name Ref.
2) Attach the CCD-MCU harness to the duplex tape on the back 1 Thermistor
surface of the carriage unit. Clean and remove oil and dirt from 2 PPD2 sensor
the attachment surface. 3 Heater lamp
3) Pass the CCD-MCU harness through the square hole in the 4 Pressure roller
base plate. 5 Heat roller
4) Attach the CCD-MCU harness to the base plate with duplex
tape. B. Disassembly procedure
5) Attach two cable fixing sheets to fix the CCD-MCU harness to 1) Remove the connectors (3 pcs.) of the rear cabinet.
the base plate. 2) Open the side cover, remove two screws, and remove the fus-
6) Pass the core through the CCD-MCU harness and fix the core. ing unit.
7) Insert the CCD-MCU harness into the MCU PWB.

Note: Attach the FCC to the base

plate securely with duplex tape to
prevent against coming loose.

1)

3)
2)

Note: Attach the FCC to

fit with the marking line. Marking line.

2)

3) Cut the binding band, remove the screw, and remove the ther-
mistor.

1)

2)

Thermistor 3)

AR-208S/208D DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 7

4) Remove the screw and remove the resistor. 6) Remove the screw and remove the PPD2 sensor.
Remove the screw and remove the U-turn guide.

1)

3) 2)
4) PPD2 sensor

2) 7) Remove the plate spring on the right and remove the heater
lamp.

1)

Note: When installing the resistor, check to confirm that the dis-
charge brush section (A) is in contact with the upper heat
roller.
Also check to confirm that the fusing lower earth spring (B)
does not extend over the fusing bearing (C) after tightening
the screw.

1)

2)

A
B
C Heater lamp

Pressure roller section disassembly

5) Remove three screws, remove the fusing cover lower on the
right side, and open the heat roller section. 8) When opening the fusing unit, slide the fusing lower earth
spring in the arrow direction, and open the unit.
2)
4) If the fusing unit is opened without sliding the fusing lower earth
3) spring, the fusing lower earth spring is deformed.
If the fusing lower earth spring is once deformed, the earth
6) function may not work properly. Replace the deformed spring
with a new one.

5) 1)

6)
5)

AR-208S/208D DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 8

9) Remove the spring, and remove the upper separation pawls (3 12) Remove the pressure release levers on the right and the left
pcs.). sides.

3)

1)

2)

1)

13) Remove the pressure roller, the pressure bearing, and the
spring.
1)
Note: Apply grease to the sections specified with an asterisk ().
Grease: "JFE552" UKOG-0235FCZZ

10) Remove the E-ring and remove the reverse gate.

Pressure roller
3)
1)
3)
2)
1)
1)
2)
2)

3)
11) Remove the spring, and remove the lower separation pawls (4
pcs.).

2)

2)

2)

2)

1)

AR-208S/208D DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 9

Heat roller disassembly
(Continued from procedure 4).)
5) Remove screws, remove the fusing cover, and open the heat 1)
roller section.
Note: When opening the fusing unit, be careful not to deform the
fusing lower earth spring as described in the item 8) of
"Pressure roller section disassembly.

3)

2) 1)
2)

3)
2) 3)
6) Remove the C-ring and the fusing bearing, and remove the heat
roller.

1)
2) 3) Heat roller
C. Assembly procedure
For assembly, reverse the disassembly procedure.

5. Tray paper feed/transport section

A. List
No. Part name Ref.
1 Paper holding arm
2 PPD1 sensor PWB
3 LSU unit
4 Intermediate frame unit
5 Paper feed roller

7) Remove the parts from the heat roller. B. Disassembly procedure

Note: Apply grease to the sections specified with 1. 1) Remove the paper holding arm.
Grease: "JFE552" UKOG-0235FCZZ Remove the arm holder from the main unit, and remove the
1 holder from the arm.

1)

2)
1 3)
2) 2)
1
1)

8) Remove two screws and remove the thermo unit.

Note: The set temperature of the thermostat differs from that of the
current model. 3)
4)
Temperature
Current model 210C
AR-208S/208D 230C

AR-208S/208D DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 10

2) Remove two screws, and remove the hinge guide R. 7) Remove the screw, and open the upper paper guide.
3) Remove the fan duct and disconnect the connector. (2 posi-
tions) 1)
1)
4) Remove six screws, and remove the scanner unit.
2)
5) 6)
5)
3) 5)
5)
5)

1)

2)

4)
8) Remove the roller, and remove the belt.
2)
4)

1)

5)
1)

5) Disconnect the connector from the MCU PWB.

6) Disengage the pawls (2 positions), and remove the sensor
PWB.

3) 9) Disengage the pawl, and remove the roller knob.

10) Disengage the pawl, and shift the pulley and the bearing.

3) 2)

2)
1)

4)

1) 11) Remove the paper exit roller, and remove the belt, the pulley,
and the bearing.

1)
2)

AR-208S/208D DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 11

12) Remove the connector and the screw, and remove the speaker 17) Remove two screws and remove the toner motor.
unit. (When the AR-FX13 is installed)

2)

13) Remove the connector. 1)

14) Remove four screws, and remove the FAX PWB unit. (When the
AR-FX13 is installed)
18) Remove three screws, and remove the DUP motor unit and the
belt.

2) 2)

1)
1)
2) 3)
3)
2) 1)
2) 19) Remove the harness guide.

15) Disconnect the connectors.

16) Remove three screws, and remove the MCU PWB.

1)

3)

2)
2)

2)
1)

1)

AR-208S/208D DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 12

20) Remove five screws and the grounding wire, and remove the 22) Remove the screw, slide the left cabinet to the left to detach it.
main drive unit. Remove each pawl, and remove the paper exit tray.
2)
3)

1)

1)

1)

1)

5)

1)
2)

4)

CAUTION:Attach the gears securely

23) Remove two screws and remove the fusing connector.
21) Remove the parts as shown below, and remove the pressure 24) Remove five screws and the connector, and lift the intermediate
release solenoid and the paper feed solenoid. frame unit to remove.

3)
3)
3)
3)

3)

4)
4)
2)

1)

2)
1)
4)
2)
2) 3)

1)

AR-208S/208D DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 13

25) Remove four screws, and remove the lower paper guide unit. 28) Remove the screw, and remove the grounding plate and the
[Note for installation] gear.
Fit the lower paper guide hole (a) with the shifter gear hole (b) 29) Remove the E-ring, the gear, and the bearing, and remove the
so that the black resin (c) of the shifter unit can be checked. shifter roller.

1)
c b
a

1) 2)
1) 1)
1)

2)

3)

30) Put the lower paper guide unit upside down, remove two
screws, and remove the shifter motor.

1)

2)

26) Disengage the pawl, and remove the pulley.

27) Shift and remove the shifter unit.

3)

2)
4)
31) Remove four screws, and remove the LSU.

1)
3)
1) 1) 1)

2)

AR-208S/208D DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 14

Note: When assembling, turn it to the right and attach. 34) Remove three screws and remove the TC front paper guide.
1)

2)

32) Remove the screw and the E-ring, and remove the PS semi-cir-
cular earth plate and the PS roller unit. 35) Remove the screw and the connector, and remove the PPD1
sensor PWB.
33) Remove the E-ring and remove the spring clutch from the PS
roller unit.

1)
5)

4)

PS roller unit 2)

Use grease of
Floil FG40H
only to apply to
this section.

4)

PS semi-circuler
PS semi-circular
earth plate
earth plate 1)

2)

3)

AR-208S/208D DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 15

36) Remove two E-rings and remove the paper feed roller. 6. Manual paper feed section
37) Remove three E-rings and remove the clutch unit.
A. List
Back No. Part name Ref.
5) 1 Manual transport roller
2 Cassette detection switch
3 PPD1 sensor PWB
Clutch unit 4 Side door detection unit
4)
B. Disassembly procedure
Paper feed
Multi unit
roller
1) Remove the screw and remove the multi upper cover.

1)
4)

3)

Front

1)
2)

2)

38) Remove the semi-circular roller unit.

39) Remove the semi-circular rubber.

2)

2) Remove the screw and remove the side door detection unit.

1) 1)

2)

1)

Back Wire treatment

C. Assembly procedure
For assembly, reverse the disassembly procedure.

AR-208S/208D DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 16

3) Remove three screws and remove the multi paper feed upper 5) Remove three E-rings and remove the manual paper feed roller
frame. B9.

1)

1)
1)

1)

1)

2)
3)

2)

L O CK

T O
K

4) Remove two screws and remove the multi feed bracket unit
from the multi paper feed upper frame.

6) Remove the pick-up roller.

2)

1)

1) 1)
2)

2)

AR-208S/208D DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 17

7) Cut the binding band and remove the multi paper feed solenoid. 7. Rear frame section
1) A. List
No. Part name Ref.
1 FAX PWB (When the AR-FX13 installed)
2 Mirror motor
3 Main motor
4 Exhaust fan motor
5 Main PWB

B. Disassembly procedure
1) Remove the rear cabinet.
2) Remove the connector.
3) Remove four screws, and remove the FAX PWB unit. (When the
AR-FX13 is installed)

3) 2)
Multi paper feed
solenoid

2) 2)

1)

3)
2)

2)

4) Disconnect the connector.

5) Remove two screws, and remove the scanner motor.
C. Assembly procedure
For assembly, reverse the disassembly procedure.

D. Pressure plate holder attachment 1)

1) Attach the pressure plate holder so that the resin section is not
covered with the seal M1-N.
3)
Seal M1-N

Pressure plate
holder
2)
Attachment
reference
6) Remove two screws and one harness, and remove the main
motor.

Attachment
reference

3)

1)

2)

AR-208S/208D DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 18

7) Remove two screws and one connector, and remove the 8. Power section
exhaust fan motor.
Note: Be careful of the installing directions of the fan. A. List
Attach it so that the blowing direction faces outside.
No. Part name Ref.
1 Power PWB
1)
B. Disassembly procedure
1) Disconnect each connector.
2) Remove the screw, and remove the earth line.
3) Remove two screws, and remove the power PWB unit.

3) 4)

1)
1) 1) 1)

2)
2)
1)
3)

Blowing direction

8) Disconnect the connectors.

9) Remove five screws, and remove the MCU PWB. 5)
4)
2)

1)
C. Assembly procedure
For assembly, reverse the disassembly procedure.

9. DV unit section
A. Developer
2) 1) Remove the screw, slide the pawl to the right side, and remove
the TN guide.

3)

1)
2)
2)
1)
2)
1)

C. Assembly procedure
For assembly, reverse the disassembly procedure.

2)

AR-208S/208D DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 19

2) Remove the screw, and remove the DV cover. C. DV blade
1) 1) Peel off the old DV blade.
2) Clean the attachment surface with alcohol.
3) Attach the new DV blade to the reference position.
2)
A

A
0.5 0
DV blade IC

DV-BOX AS
B

D. DV doctor
3) Remove the used developer.
1) Remove the screw, and remove the DV doctor.
* Clean the edge (A) section.

4) Supply new developer. 1)

A
2)

1)

Note for installation

1) Insert the DG check gauge as shown in the figure.
2) After checking, install the doctor gap and fix it with a screw.
* Apply screw lock to the screw tightening section as shown in the
figure below.
MG-ROL
DG check
gauge

C
DG sect
B. DV seal F/R :1.5 ion
DG se 5
1) Peel off the old DV seal. :1. ctio 0.15
5 n
0.1
2) Clean the attachment surface with alcohol. 0
3) Attach the new DV seal to the reference position.

DV side seal F C
DV side seal R
A
D

A
B
0 C 0.5
* After checking the DG,
0.5 0
0.5 apply screw lock.
X FRONT REAR
D
0.5
0
B

0
X
Magnification ratio:
Bump
B
200%
1 20 F 10 10 C R 20
2
110
DG check
X-X
position
DG check DG check DG check
gauge gauge gauge

AR-208S/208D DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 20

E. DV sensor 11. Reverse roller section (AR-208D only)
1) Remove the Mylar.
A. List
2) Remove the screw, and remove the DV sensor.
* Clean the sensor (A) section. No. Part name Ref.
1 Reverse roller
1)
B. Disassembly procedure
2) 1) Remove four screws
3) 2) Remove the spring, and the earth wire
2)
3) Remove the reverse unit.

2
10. Duplex motor section (AR-208D only)
A. List
No. Part name Ref.
1 Duplex motor

B. Disassembly procedure
1) Remove the rear cabinet. 3
2) Remove two screws.
3) Remove the Duplex motor cover.
1
4) Remove the Duplex motor. 4) Bend the reverse roller and remove it.

3 1 C. Assembly procedure
2
1 For assembly, reverse the disassembly procedure.

Note: When reassembling, be sure to engage the Duplex motor

gear with the belt on the main body side.

C. Assembly procedure
For assembly, reverse the disassembly procedure.

AR-208S/208D DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 21

12. RSPF section C. Document tray unit
1) Release the shaft on the front side.
A. Front cabinet, rear cabinet
2) Remove the tray unit.
(1) Open the upper door unit.

1
2

(2) Front cabinet and rear cabinet removal

1) Remove two screws.
2) Disengage the five pawls.
1
3) Remove the front cabinet and the rear cabinet.

Note for reassembly

Use care so that the paper exit Mylar in not pinched between the
3 paper exit roller and the follower roller.
3 2 2
2
D. Upper door open/close sensor
1
1) Disconnect one connector.
2) Remove the upper door open/close sensor.

2
2

B. Upper door unit

1) Release the shaft on the front side.
2) Remove the upper door unit.
E. Reverse clutch, paper exit roller
(1) Reverse clutch removal
1) Disconnect one connector.
2) Remove the resin E-ring.
3) Remove the reverse clutch.

3
1
2

1
2
Note for reassembly
Attach the stopper of the reverse clutch along with the rib on the
motor mounting plate.

AR-208S/208D DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 22

(2) Paper exit roller removal 8) Remove four screws.
1) Remove the E-ring. 9) Remove the transport unit.
2) Slide the bearing.
8
3) Remove the paper exit roller. 8
4) Remove the E-ring. 8 9
5) Remove the bearing.

4
5 1

2
Note for reassembly
Before assembly, be sure to check that the harness is passed
through the rib.
F. Drive unit Arrange the RSPF harness to the outside of the base tray so that it
(1) Transport unit removal is nit pinched before assembly.
1) Disconnect four connectors. (2) Drive unit removal
2) Remove the harness from the clamp. 1) Remove three screws.
3) Remove the snap band. 2) Remove the drive unit.
4) Remove one screw.
5) Remove the earth wire. 1
6) Remove one screw.
7) Disconnect the RSPF harness.

1
5
4
3 1 1
2

1 1

(3) Drive motor removal

6 1) Remove the gear.
1
2) Remove two screws.
2
3) Remove the drive motor.

Note for reassembly

Connect the connectors according to the arrow indication marked
on the motor mounting plate.

AR-208S/208D DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 23

G. Shutter solenoid H. Pickup roller, take-up roller
(1) Shutter solenoid unit removal (1) Paper feed unit removal
1) Remove the harness from the edge saddle. 1) Remove the E-ring.
2) Remove one screw. 2) Side the bearing.
3) Remove the shutter solenoid unit. 3) Remove the stopper arm.
4) Release the paper feed shaft pressure release spring.
5) Remove the paper feed unit.
6) Remove the paper feed shaft release arm.
2 1
6

Note for reassembly 2

4
Install the paper feed solenoid under the state where the projection
of the paper feed planet arm is lower than the paper feed solenoid
lever. 3

(2) Shutter solenoid removal

1) Remove the paper feed solenoid spring from the shutter sole- (2) Parts removal
noid. 1) Remove the E-ring.
2) Remove the paper feed solenoid lever. 2) Remove the resin E-ring.
3) Slide the shaft.
4) Remove the spring pin.

2
1

4
3

1
2

Note for reassembly

When assembling, use care so that the paper feed solenoid spring
(3) Paper feed roller removal
does not extend out of the paper feed solenoid lever. 1) Pull out the shaft.
2) Remove the clutch boss and the clutch spring from the pickup
roller.

AR-208S/208D DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 24

(4) Pickup roller removal (3) Paper empty sensor removal
1) Disengage one pawl. 1) Disconnect one connector.
2) Remove the pickup drive gear from the pickup roller. 2) Remove the paper empty sensor.

3
2

I. Paper empty sensor J. PS roller

(1) Paper feed PG unit removal (1) Parts removal
1) Remove the harness. 1) Remove the gear.
2) Remove three screws. 2) Remove the pulley.
3) Lift the front side, and remove the paper feed PG unit. 3) Remove the belt.

3
2
2

1
3

1
2
(2) Parts removal
(2) Paper feed PG support plate removal 1) Remove one screw.
1) Remove one screw. 2) Remove the earth wire.
2) Slide and remove the paper feed PG support plate. 3) Remove the E-ring.
4) Remove the bearing.
5) Open the scan plate.

2
4
1 1
4
3
5
2

Note for reassembly

Pass the earth wire through the hole to the outside of the frame,
then install parts.

AR-208S/208D DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 25

(3) Scan plate removal (2) Upper transport roller removal
1) Remove the scan plate. 1) Remove the upper transport roller.

L. Paper sensor
(4) PS roller removal 1) Disconnect one connector.
1) Remove the PS roller. 2) Remove the paper sensor.

M. Lower transport roller

K. Upper transport roller (1) Reverse self-weight gate removal
1) Remove the reverse self-weight gate.
(1) Parts removal
1) Remove the gear.
2) Remove the upper transport release arm.
3) Remove the bearing.
4) Remove the E-ring.
5) Remove the bearing.

5 4 1

2 3
1

Note for reassembly

Use care so that the rib on the upper transport release arm catches
the guide.

AR-208S/208D DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 26

(2) Lower transport roller removal
1) Remove the E-ring.
2) Remove the gear.
3) Remove the bearing.
4) Remove the lower transport roller.

3
2
1

N. Paper exit sensor

(1) OC mat removal
1) Remove the OC mat.

(2) Paper exit sensor removal

1) Disconnect one connector.
2) Remove the paper exit sensor.

AR-208S/208D DISASSEMBLY AND ASSEMBLY 8 - 27

[9] ADJUSTMENTS 5) Calculate the main scanning direction magnification ratio.
Main scanning direction magnification ratio

1. Optical section Copy image dimensions

= X 100 (%)
Original dimension
A. Copy magnification ratio adjustment
(When a 100mm scale is used as the original.)
The copy magnification ratio must be adjusted in the main scanning Original (Scale)
HARDENED
direction and in the sub scanning direction. To adjust, use TC 48- JAPAN
STAINLESS
mm
01. 1/2mm 10 20 100 110 120 130 140 150
Shizuoka

(1) Outline
The main scanning (front/rear) direction magnification ratio adjust- HARDENED
STAINLESS
ment is made manually. Paper feed mm
10 20 100 110 120
JAPAN
130 140 150
direction 1/2mm

The adjustment is made by manual key operations. (The zoom data Shizuoka

register set value is changed for adjustment.) Reference Comparison point Copy
The magnification ratio in the sub scanning direction is adjusted by 110
changing the carriage (scanner) scanning speed.
(2) Main scanning/sub scanning direction
magnification ratio adjustment
6) Check that the copy magnification ratio is within the specified
a. Cases when the adjustment is required
range. If it is not within the specified range, perform the follow-
1) When the main PWB is replaced. ing procedures.
2) When the EEPROM in the main PWB is replaced. 7) Execute TC 48-01 to select the main scanning direction copy
3) When "U2" trouble occurs. magnification ratio adjustment mode.
4) When repairing or replacing the optical section. To select the adjustment mode, use the [/] key.
b. Necessary tools Display Default
Mode LED
Scale item value
Main scan direction F-R 50 PRINT mode lamp
c. Main scanning direction adjustment procedure
magnification ratio
1) Set the scale vertically on the document table. (Use a long OC mode sub scan SCAN 50 SCAN mode lamp
scale for precise adjustment.) direction magnification ratio
8) Enter the new set value of main scanning direction copy magni-
fication ratio with the copy quantity set key, and press the
[START] key.
9) Change the set value and repeat the adjustment until the ratio is
within the specified range.
When the set value is changed by 1, the magnification ratio is
changed by 0.1%.
d. Sub scanning direction adjustment procedure
1) Set the scale on the document table as shown below. (Use a
long scale for precise adjustment.)

2) Set the copy magnification ratio to 100%.

3) Make a copy on A4 or 81/2" x 11" paper.
4) Measure the length of the copied scale image.

AR-208S/208D ADJUSTMENTS 9 - 1
2) Set the copy magnification ratio to 100%. Display
Mode Default LED TC
3) Make a copy on A4 or 81/2" x 11" paper. item
4) Measure the length of the copied scale image. Print center offset TRAY1 50 COPY mode lamp
5) Calculate the sub scanning direction copy magnification ratio (Main cassette paper Main cassette lamp
using the formula below. feed)
(*) Print center offset TRAY2 50 COPY mode lamp
Copy image dimensions (2nd cassette paper
= X 100 (%) 2nd cassette lamp
Original dimension feed)
50-10
Print center offset MFT 50 COPY mode lamp
110 (Manual paper feed) Manual paper feed
lamp
2nd print center SIDE2 50 PRINT mode lamp
offset (Main cassette Main cassette lamp
Original (Scale)
paper feed)
HARDDENCD
JAPAN
STAINLESS The modes can be selected by pressing [/] key.
mm
1/2mm 10 20 100 110 120 130 140 150
Shizuoka
(*): Support for the installation models. For non-installation models,
skip.
Paper feed
* In the 2nd print center offset adjustment, print is made forcibly as
HARDDENCD

JAPAN
STAINLESS direction 1to2/Long Edge from OC regardless of duplex setting.
mm
1/2mm 10 20 100 110 120 130 140 150
Shizuoka (1) Lead edge adjustment
Reference Comparison point Copy 1) Set a scale to the center of the paper lead edge guide as shown
below, and cover it with B4 or 8 1/2" x 14" paper or OC cover.
6) Check that the actual copy magnification ratio is within the
specified range. (100 1.0%).
If it is not within the specified range, perform the following pro-
cedures.
7) Execute TC 48-01 to select the sub scanning direction copy
magnification ratio adjustment mode.
To select the adjustment mode, use the [/] key. (SCAN
mode lamp ON)
8) Enter the new set value of sub scanning direction copy magnifi-
cation ratio with the copy quantity set key, and press the
[START] key.
Repeat procedures 1) - 8) until the sub scanning direction actual
copy magnification ratio in 100% copying is within the specified
range.
When the set value is changed by 1, the magnification ration is
changed by 0.1%.

B. Image position adjustment

The employed test commands and the contents are as follows: 2) Execute TC 50 - 01
3) Set the print start position (A: AE mode lamp/COPY mode lamp
Display ON), the lead edge void amount (B: TEXT mode lamp/PRINT
Mode Default LED TC
item mode lamp ON), the scan start position (C: PHOTO mode lamp/
Print start position TRAY1 50 COPY mode lamp SCAN mode lamp) to 1, and make a copy of the scale at 100%.
(Main cassette paper Main cassette 4) Measure the image loss (Rmm) of the scale.
feed) lamp
Set C = 10 x R (mm). (Example: Set to 40.)
(*) Print start position TRAY2 50 COPY mode lamp
When the value of C is increased by 10, the image loss is
(2nd cassette paper 2nd cassette lamp decreased by 1mm. (Default: 50)
feed)
Print start position MFT 50 COPY mode lamp 5) Measure the distance (Hmm) from the paper lead edge to the
(Manual paper feed) image print start position.
Manual paper
50-01 Set A = 10 x H (mm). (Example: Set to 50.)
feed lamp
Image lead edge void DEN-A 50 PRINT mode lamp When the value of A is increased by 10, the image lead edge is
amount moved to the paper lead edge by 1mm. (Default: 50).
Image scan start RRC-A 50 SCAN mode lamp 6) Set the lead edge void amount to B = 50 (2.5mm). (Default: 50)
position When the value of B is increased by 10, the void is extended by
Image rear edge void DEN-B 50 COPY mode lamp about 0.1mm. (For 25 or less, however, the void amount is
amount PRINT mode lamp regarded as 0.)
SCAN mode lamp * The RSPF adjustment is made by adjusting the RSPF image
scan start position after OC adjustment.

AR-208S/208D ADJUSTMENTS 9 - 2
(Example) Document guide
Distance from the paper lead edge
to the image lead edge, H = 5mm

Image loss, R = 4mm

Center

5mm Copy paper

(A4 or 8 1/2 11)
10mm

2) Execute TC 50-10 to select the print center offset (cassette

paper feed) adjustment mode.
The set adjustment value is displayed on the copy quantity dis-
play.
3) Make a copy and check that the copied center line is properly
(2) Image rear edge void amount adjustment positioned.
1) Set a scale to the rear edge section of A4 or 11" x 8 1/2" paper The standard value is 0 2mm from the paper center.
size as shown in the figure below, and cover it with B4 or 8 1/2" 2.0mm or less
(Copy A)
x 14" paper.
Copy image
B4 or 8 1/2 14 paper
Copy paper
Shift folding line

A4 size rear edge

2.0mm or less
(Copy B)
Copy image

Copy paper
Shift folding line

(Paper feed direction)

2) Execute TC 50 - 01 to select the image rear edge void amount
adjustment mode. 4) If the measured value is out of the specified range, change the
The set adjustment value is displayed on the copy quantity dis- set value and repeat the adjustment procedure.
play. When the set value is increased by 1, the copy image is shifted
3) Make a copy and measure the void amount of image rear edge. by 0.1mm toward the rear frame.
For the manual paper feed, change the manual paper feed
Void amount (Standard value: 2 - 3mm) adjustment mode and perform the similar procedures.
Since the document center offset is automatically adjusted by the
CCD which scan the reference lines (F/R) on the back of docu-
ment guide, there is no need to adjust manually.
Scale image
2. Copy density adjustment
Paper rear edge A. Copy density adjustment timing
The copy density adjustment must be performed in the following
cases:
When maintenance is performed.
4) If the measurement value is out of the specified range, change
the set value and repeat the adjustment procedure. When the developing bias/grid bias voltage is adjusted.
The default value is 50. When the optical section is cleaned.
(3) Center offset adjustment When a part in the optical section is replaced.

1) Set the self-made test chart for the center position adjustment
so that its center line is aligned with the center mark of the doc-
ument guide.
Test chart for the center position adjustment.
Draw a line at the center of A4 or 8 1/2" x 11" paper in the paper
transport direction.
When the optical section is disassembled.
When the OPC drum is replaced.
When the main control PWB is replaced.
When the EEPROM on the main control PWB is replaced.
When the memory trouble (U2) occurs.
B. Note for copy density adjustment
1) Arrangement before execution of the copy density adjustment
Clean the optical section.
Clean or replace the charger wire.
Check that the voltage at the high voltage section and the devel-
oping bias voltage are in the specified range.

AR-208S/208D ADJUSTMENTS 9 - 3
C. Necessary tool for copy density adjustment (2) Perform the adjustment in each mode.
One of the following test charts: 1) Execute TC 46-01 (300dpi). To adjust in 600dpi, execute TC 46-
UKOG-0162FCZZ, UKOG-0089CSZZ, KODAK GRAY SCALE 02.
B4 (14" x 8 1/2") white paper 2) Select the mode to be adjusted with the exposure mode select
The user program AE setting should be "3." key. Set the exposure level to 3 (center) for all adjustment.
(Except for the auto mode.)
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 W
TEXT
| | | | | (1) Exposure mode, level display

Test chart comparison table

UKOG- (2) Mode select key
0162FCZZ
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 W
DENSITY
No. Adjustment Display Sharp gray chart
LED
UKOG- mode item adjustment level
0089CSZZ Auto mode AE COPY mode lamp "3" is slightly
0.1 0.2 0.3 0.5 1.9 0
DENSITY copied.
No. Text mode TEXT PRINT mode lamp "3" is slightly
KODAK copied.
GRAY 1 2 3 4 19 A Photo mode PHOTO SCAN mode lamp "3" is slightly
SCALE copied.
Text T/S mode TSTXT PRINT mode lamp "3" is slightly
D. Features of copy density adjustment SCAN mode lamp copied.
For the copy density adjustment, the image data shift function pro- Auto T/S mode TSAE COPY mode lamp "3" is slightly
vided in the image process LSI is used. SCAN mode lamp copied.
List of the adjustment modes 3) Make a copy.
Auto Mode Brightness 1 step only Check the adjustment level (shown in the above table) of the
Manual Mode Brightness 5 steps. Adjustment of only the exposure test chart (Sharp Gray Scale).
center brightness is made. Sharp Gray Scale adjustment level
Photo Mode Brightness 5 steps. Adjustment of only the Non toner 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 W
center brightness is made. save mode
Manual T/S Brightness 5 steps. Adjustment of only the
mode center brightness is made.
Slightly copied.
T/S Auto mode Brightness 1 step only
Not copied.

E. Copy density adjustment procedure Toner save 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 W

The copy density can be adjusted in 300dpi or in 600dpi. mode
Main code Sub code Resolution for copy density adjustment
01 300dpi Slightly copied.
46 Not copied.
02 600dpi
For selection of modes, use the copy mode select key. (When too bright): Decrease the value displayed on the copy
(1) Test chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ) setting quantity display.
1) Place the test chart so that its edge is aligned with the A4 (Let- (When too dark): Increase the value displayed on the copy
ter) reference line on the document table. Then place a A4 (14" quantity display.
x 8 1/2") white paper on the test chart and close the document * The value can be set in the range of 1 - 99.
cover.

White paper

Test chart

AR-208S/208D ADJUSTMENTS 9 - 4
3. High voltage adjustment
A. Main charger (Grid bias)
Note:
Use a digital multi meter with internal resistance of 10M or more
measurement.
After adjusting the grid LOW output, adjust the HIGH output. Do
not reverse the sequence.
Procedures
1) Set the digital multi meter range to DC700V.
2) Set the positive side of the test rod to the connector CN11-3
(GRID) of high voltage section of the power PWB and set the
negative side to the frame ground (power frame).
3) Execute TC 8-02. (The main charger output is supplied for 30
sec in the grid voltage HIGH output mode.)
4) Adjust the control volume (VRG1) so that the output voltage is
580 12V.
4. Duplex adjustment
A. Adjusting the paper reverse position in
memory for duplex copying
This step adjusts the front surface printing (odd-number pages of a
document set) in the S-D mode copying and the leading edge posi-
tion of an image on even-number pages in the D-S mode.
That is, it covers the adjustment of the second surface printing
mode (image loss at the front edge of an image) in which image
data is once stored in memory.
The image data is read, starting from its front end in the document
delivery direction (Reference direction of document setting in the
OC mode)and stored in memory.
This stored image data is printed starting at the printing start posi-
tion, in the order of last-stored data to the first-stored data.
In other words, the front edge image loss of the image can be
adjusted by changing the document read end position.
(Adjustment procedure)
1) Preparing test chart (Draw a scale at the rear end of one side of
a sheet of A4 white paper or letter paper)

5 10

VRG1

2) Set the test chart so that the scale is positioned as shown

below, in the S-D mode and the D-S mode.

Scale (S-D mode) Scale (D-S mode)

B. DV bias check
Note: A digital multi meter with internal resistance of 1G must
be use for correct check.
The adjustment volume is locked, and no adjustment can
be made.
Procedures
1) Set the digital multi meter range to DC500V. 3) Execute test command 50-18.
2) Set the positive side of the test rod to the connector CN-10-1 Display
(DV BIAS) and set the negative side to the frame ground (power Mode Default LED
item
frame). OC memory reverse OC 50 COPY mode lamp
3) Execute TC 25-01 to output the developing bias for 30sec, and output position
check that the output is 4008V. RSPF memory reverse SPF 50 PRINT mode lamp
output position
Select the RSPF memory reverse output position, and press
[START] key to make a copy.
VRDV
Adjust the setting so that the front edge image loss is less than
4.0 mm in the RSPF mode.
An increase of 1 in setting represents an increase of 0.1 mm in
image loss.

Front edge of paper

The front edge of the

scale on test chart Void area

5 10
less than 4 mm

AR-208S/208D ADJUSTMENTS 9 - 5
 2) Set the test chart on the document glass as shown below.

Document guide The trailing edge has a scale

2nd printing surface where scale is printed (lower side)

B. Adjusting trailing edge void in duplex copy Table glass

mode
This is the adjustment of the first surface printing mode (rear end 3) Execute test command 50-19 to turn on the PRINT mode lamp
void) in duplex copying. and make the printing mode in OC-D mode.
In a duplex copying operation, the paper is delivered starting from Make a copy of the test chart to check the void area of the scale
the rear end of the first printing surface. It is therefore necessary to on the image.
make a void area at the rear end on the first printing surface to pre- Void position to be check
vent paper jam at the fusing part.
There are two adjustment modes:
1) Image cut rear end void quantity (RSPF) 50-19 (SCAN mode Paper
lamp)
The size (length) of a document read from the RSPF is
detected, the image at the trailing edge of the first printing sur-
face is cut to make a void area. (The adjustment of void quantity
at the time when the cassette paper size is not recognized.)
2) Paper trailing edge void quantity 50-19 (PRINT mode lamp)
This adjustment is made when the cassette paper size is recog-
nized. The trailing edge void quantity can be adjusted by chang-
ing the trailing edge image laser OFF timing.
The paper void quantity should be first adjusted before the image
The trailing edge void on the first printing surface
cut trailing edge void quantity (RSPF) is adjusted.
is shown above.
The adjustment modes can be selected by pressing [/] key.
(Adjustment range; 1 99) Adjust the setting so that the void area is 4 - 5 mm. An increase in 1
Enter the adjustment value and press [START] key to save the set of setting represents 0.1 mm in void area.
value and make a copy. (The paper information is cleared for every (2) Image cut trailing edge void quantity (RSPF)
copy.)
1) Set the test chart so that the scale is positioned as shown
When the set value is increased by 1, the void amount is increased
below.
by about 0.1mm.
Display
Mode Default LED
item
Paper rear edge void DEN-B 50 PRINT mode lamp
amount
Print start position RRC-D 50 SCAN mode lamp
(Duplex back surface)
* The initial value of duplex setting is 2to2. Scale (D-D mode)
(Adjustment procedure)
2) Execute test command 50-19 to turn on the SCAN mode
(1) Paper trailing edge void quantity lamp(on the operation panel) and make the printing mode in the
1) Preparing test chart (Draw a scale at the rear end of one side of D-D mode.
a sheet of A/4 white paper or letter paper) 3) Remove and reinsert the cassette.
Note: Make sure to carry out this step before making a copy during
this adjustment.
4) Make a copy and check the void area of the scale on the image.
Adjust the setting so that the void area is 2 - 4 mm. An increase
of 1 in setting represents an increase of 0.1 mm in void area.
l Void position to be checked

AR-208S/208D ADJUSTMENTS 9 - 6
5. RSPF scan position automatic 6. RSPF mode sub scanning direction
adjustment magnification ratio adjustment
Place a A4 paper (white chart) so that it covers the RSPF scan Note: Before performing this adjustment, be sure to check that the
glass and the OC glass together, and close the RSPF. OC mode adjustment in copying has been completed.
When test command 53-08 is executed, the current adjustment 1) Put a scale on the original table as shown below, and make a
value is displayed as the initial display. normal copy (100%) on the front and the back surfaces to make
* Default is 1. Adjustment range is 1 99. Adjustment unit 1 = a test chart.
about 0.127mm
* If the values are kept as the default values, RSPF scan is not per-
formed properly. The front area of the proper scan position may
be scanned.
In case of AUTO, press [START] key, and the mirror unit scans from
the home position to the RSPF scan position with the adjustment
value displayed. The RSPF glass cover edge position is calculated
from the difference between the RSPF glass cover edge and the
OC side document glass CCD output level. If the adjustment is nor-
mal, the adjusted value is displayed. If abnormal, the error LED
lights up with the current set value displayed.
During the error LED is lighted, when [START] key is pressed again, Note: Since the printed copy is used as a test chart, put the scale
execution is performed again. in paralled with the edge lines.
2) Set the test chart on the RSPF and make a duplex copy (D-D
Display
Mode Default LED or D-S) in the normal ratio (100%).
item
RSPF scan position AUTO 1 COPY mode lamp 3) Compare the scale image and the actual image.
auto adjustment If necessary, perform the following adjustment procedures.
RSPF scan position MANU 1 PRINT mode lamp 4) Execute TC 48-05.
manual adjustment 5) The current front surface sub scanning direction magnification
ratio correction value is displayed in two digits on the display
Operation section.
The operation is similar to test command 46-01. (In MANUAL) To select SIDE1 and SIDE2, use [/] keys.
OK/ERR display in AUTO 6) Enter the set value and press the start key.
<When OK> <When ERR> When adjusting the RSPF, use [2-SIDED COPY] key to select
single/duplex after entering the one page print mode,
53-08 SPF AUTO 53-08 SPF AUTO performing 2-page single copy.
AUTO 100% ** OK AUTO 100% ** ERR
Display
Mode Default LED
item
Sub scan magnification ratio SIDE1 50 COPY
adjustment on the surface of mode lamp
RSPF document
Sub scan magnification ratio SIDE2 50 PRINT
adjustment on the surface of mode lamp
RSPF document
* When there is no document in RSPF, copy is inhibited.
<Adjustment specification>
Adjustment Setting
Spec value TC Set value
mode range
Sub scanning At normal: 48-5 Add 1: 1 99
direction 1.0% 0.1% increase
magnification Reduce 1: 0.1%
ratio (RSPF decrease
mode)

6cm or more is required.

AR-208S/208D ADJUSTMENTS 9 - 7
7. Automatic black level correction
a. Cases when the adjustment is required
1) When the main PWB is replaced.
2) When the EEPROM in the main PWB is replaced.
3) When "U2" trouble occurs.
4) When repairing or replacing the optical section.
b. Adjustment procedure
Used to acquire the black level target value used for the black level
adjustment of white balance.
When test command 63-02 is executed, the current correction value
is displayed in 3 digits of 12bit hexadecimal number.
Place the gray gradation chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ) used as the cor-
rection document so that the density 10 (black side) comes on the
left side and that the chart is upside down at the center of the plate
left center.

10

Chart back surface

When [ENTER/START] key is pressed, the mirror base unit scans

the chart and calculates the correction value.
After completion of correction, the corrected value is displayed on
the LCD.
* Default: 0
* If the value is set to the default, operation is made with 0x60.
c. Operation
1) Initial display
63-02 BLACK LEVEL
0
2) [ENTER/START] Correction start
63-02 BLACK LEVEL
EXECUTING...
<During canceling - When C/CA is pressed->
After canceling, the machine goes into the sub code entry standby
mode.
THE JOB IS BEING
CANCELED.
3) After execution
63-02 BLACK LEVEL
*** OK
3) In case of an error
63-02 BLACK LEVEL
*** ERR

AR-208S/208D ADJUSTMENTS 9 - 8
[10] TEST COMMAND, TROUBLE CODES
1. Entering the test command mode
To enter the serviceman test command mode, press the keys as fol-
lows:
[#] key [*] key [C] key [*] key
To cancel the test command mode, press the [CA] key.

2. Key rule
[10KEY]: Entry of MAIN CODE/SUB CODE
Selection of an item
Setup of an adjustment value in case of test commands for adjustment
[/]: Selection of MAIN CODE/SUB CODE
Selection of an item
[ENTER/START]: Settlement
<In case of test commands for print>
[ENTER]: Settlement (Without print)
[START]: Settlement/Print
[C]: (Interrupting operation check) Returns to the upper hierarchy.
In case of test command of operation check, terminates the operations.
[CA]: Exits from the test command mode.
For a test command of adjustment, the display returns to the initial display (00-00).

3. List of test commands

Main Sub
Contents
code code
1 01 Mirror scan (SCAN CHK)
02 Mirror home position sensor (MHPS) status display
(MHP-SENSOR)
06 Mirror scan aging (SCAN AGING)
2 01 Reversing Single Pass Feeder (RSPF) aging
(SPF AGING)
02 RSPF sensor status display (SPF SENSOR)
03 RSPF motor operation check (SPF MOTOR CHK)
08 RSPF paper feed solenoid operation check
(SPF SPUS CHK)
09 RSPF reverse solenoid operation check
(RSPF SPFS CHK)
3 03 Shifter operation check (SHIFTER CHK)
5 01 Operation panel display check (LCD/LED CHK)
02 Fusing lamp, cooling fan operation check
(HT LAMP CHK)
03 Copy lamp ON check (C-LAMP CHK)
6 01 Paper feed solenoid (CPFS1, CPFS2, MPFS)
operation check (PSOL CHK)
02 Resist roller solenoid (RRS) operation check
(RES.R SOL CHK)
7 01 Check of warm-up display and aging with JAM
(W-UP/AGING)
06 Interval aging (INTERVAL AGING)
08 Shift to copy with warm-up display (W-UP C-MODE)
8 01 Developing bias output (DVLP BIAS SET.)
02 Main charger output (Grid HIGH) (MHV(H) SET.)
03 Main charger output (Grid LOW) (MHV(L) SET.)
06 Transfer charger output (THV SET.)
9 01 Duplex motor normal rotation check (DPLX ROT.)
(AR-208D only)
02 Duplex motor reverse rotation check
(DPLX ROT.REV.) (AR-208D only)
04 Duplex motor rotating speed adjustment
(DPLX ROT.SPEED) (AR-208D only)
10 Toner motor operation (TONER MOTOR)
14 Cancel of trouble other than U2 (TRBL CANC.)
Main Sub
Contents
code code
16 U2 trouble cancel (U2 TRBL CANC.)
20 01 Maintenance counter clear (M-CNT CLR.)
21 01 Maintenance cycle setting (M-CYCLE)
22 01 Maintenance counter display (M-CNT)
02 Maintenance preset display (M-CNT PRESET)
04 JAM total counter display (JAM TTL CNT)
05 Total counter display (TTL CNT)
06 Developer counter display (DVLP CNT)
08 RSPF counter display (SPF CNT)
11 FAX-related counter display
(Executable only when the FAX is installed.)
12 Drum counter display (DRUM CNT)
13 CRUM type display (CRUM TYPE)
14 ROM version display (ROM VER.)
16 Duplex counter display (DPLX CNT) (AR-208D only)
17 Copy counter display (COPIES CNT)
18 Printer counter display (PRT.CNT)
19 Scanner mode counter display (S-MODE CNT)
21 Scanner counter display (SCAN CNT)
22 RSPF JAM counter display (S JAM CNT)
24 01 JAM total counter clear (JAM TTL CLR.)
04 RSPF counter clear (SPF CLR.)
05 Duplex counter clear (DPLX CLR.) (AR-208D only)
06 Developer counter clear (DVLP CLR.)
07 Drum counter clear (DRUM CLR.)
08 Copy counter clear (COPIES CLR.)
09 Printer counter clear (PRT.CLR.)
10 FAX counter clear (FAX CLR.)
(Executable only when the FAX is installed.)
13 Scanner counter clear (SCAN CLR.)
14 RSPF JAM total counter clear (S JAM TTL CLR.)
15 Scanner mode counter clear (S-MODE CLR.)
25 01 Main motor operation check (MAIN MOTOR CHK)
10 Polygon motor operation check (LSU CHK)

AR-208S/208D TEST COMMAND, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 1

Main Sub
Contents
code code
26 02 (R)SPF setting (SPF/RSPF)
03 Second cassette setting (2ND TRAY)
04 Main unit duplex setting (DPLX)
06 Destination setting (DESTINATION)
07 Machine conditions check (CPM)
20 Rear edge void setting (END EDGE)
30 CE mark support control ON/OFF (CE MARK)
37 Cancel of stop at developer life over
(DVLP LIFE END)
39 Memory capacity check (MEM.CHK)
40 Polygon motor OFF time setting (Time required from
completion of printing to turning OFF the motor)
(LSU MOTOR OFF)
42 Transfer ON timing control setting (TC ON TIMING)
43 Side void amount setting (SIDE VOID)
54 life correction setting (GAMMA CTRL)
62 Energy-save mode copy lamp setting (C-LAMP E-S)
30 01 Paper sensor status display (P-SENSOR)
41 06 OC cover float detection level adjustment
(OC FLOAT LEVEL)
07 OC cover float detection margin setting
(OC FLOAT MGN)
43 01 Fusing temperature setting (Normal copy) (FU TEMP)
04 Fusing temperature setting in multi copy
(FU TEMP MULTI)
05 Fusing temperature setting in duplex copy
(FU TEMP DPLX) (AR-208D only)
14 Fusing start temperature setting (FU TEMP START)
46 01 Copy density adjustment (300dpi) (EXP.LEVEL 300)
02 Copy density adjustment (600dpi) (EXP.LEVEL 600)
12 Density adjustment in the FAX mode
(Collective adjustment)
(Executable only when the FAX is installed.)
13 FAX mode density adjustment (normal text)
(Executable only when the FAX is installed.)
14 FAX mode density adjustment (Fine text)
(Executable only when the FAX is installed.)
15 FAX mode density adjustment (Super fine)
(Executable only when the FAX is installed.)
18 Image contrast adjustment (300dpi) (GAMMA 300)
19 Exposure mode setting (AE MODE)
20 RSPF exposure correction (EXP.LEVEL SPF)
29 Image contrast adjustment (600dpi) (GAMMA 600)
30 AE limit adjustment (AE LIMIT)
31 Image sharpness adjustment (SHARPNESS)
32 Copier color reproduction setting
(COLOR REAPPEAR)
39 FAX mode sharpness adjustment
(Executable only when the FAX is installed.)
48 01 Mains can/sub scan direction magnification ratio
(COPY MAG.)
05 RSPF mode sub scan direction magnification ratio in
copying (RSPF MAG.)
49 01 Download mode (DOWNLOAD MODE)
AR-208S/208D TEST COMMAND, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 2
Main Sub
Contents
code code
50 01 Lead edge image position (LEAD EDGE)
06 Copy lead edge position adjustment (RSPF)
(RSPF EDGE)
10 Print center offset adjustment (PRT.OFF-CENTER)
12 Document feed off-center adjustment
(ORG.OFF-CENTER)
18 Memory reverse position adjustment in duplex copy
(DPLX REVERSE)
19 Duplex copy rear edge void adjustment
(DPLX END EDGE) (AR-208D only)
51 02 Resist amount adjustment (RESIST ADJ.)
53 08 RSPF scan position automatic adjustment
(SPF AUTO)
61 03 HSYNC output check (LSU CHK)
63 01 Shading check (SHADING CHK)
02 Black level automatic correction (BLACK LEVEL)
12 Light quantity stable wait time setting
(LT.STABLE TIME)
13 Light quantity stable width setting (LT.STABLE RNG.)
64 01 Self print (1by2 mode) (SELF PRT.)
66 01 FAX soft SW setting
(Executable only when the FAX is installed.)
02 FAX soft SW initializing (excluding the adjustment
values) (Executable only when the FAX is installed.)
03 FAX PWB memory check
(Executable only when the FAX is installed.)
04 Signal send mode (Max. value)
(Executable only when the FAX is installed.)
05 Signal send mode (Soft SW set value)
(Executable only when the FAX is installed.)
07 Image memory content print
(Executable only when the FAX is installed.)
10 Image memory content clear
(Executable only when the FAX is installed.)
11 300bps signal send (Max. value)
(Executable only when the FAX is installed.)
12 300bps signal send (Soft SW set value)
(Executable only when the FAX is installed.)
13 Dial test (Executable only when the FAX is installed.)
17 DTMF signal send (Max. value)
(Executable only when the FAX is installed.)
18 DTMF signal send (Soft SW set value)
(Executable only when the FAX is installed.)
21 FAX information print
(Executable only when the FAX is installed.)
24 FAST SRAM clear
(Executable only when the FAX is installed.)
30 TEL/LIU status change check
(Executable only when the FAX is installed.)
33 Signal detection check
(Executable only when the FAX is installed.)
34 Communication time measurement
(Executable only when the FAX is installed.)
37 Speaker sound volume setting
(Executable only when the FAX is installed.)
38 Time setting/check
(Executable only when the FAX is installed.)
4. Descriptions of various test commands
Main Sub
Contents Details of function/operation
code code
1 01 Mirror scan (SCAN CHK) [Function]
When [ENTER/START] key is pressed, the home position is checked and the mirror base per-
forms full scan at the speed of the set magnification ratio.
During operation, the set magnification ratio is displayed.
The mirror home position sensor status is displayed with the COPY mode lamp. (When the
mirror is in the home position, the lamp lights up.)
During operation, the copy lamp lights up.
When [C] key is pressed, if the operation is on the way, it is terminated and the machine goes to
the sub code entry standby mode.
[Operation]
1) Initial display 2) [] 3) [ENTER/START]
01-01 SCAN CHK 01-01 SCAN CHK 01-01 SCAN CHK
- 100% + - 99% + EXECUTING... - 78% +
2) [ZOOM] 2) []
01-01 SCAN CHK 01-01 SCAN CHK
- 78% + - 101% +
02 Mirror home position sensor [Function]
(MHPS) status display Monitors the mirror home position sensor, and makes the "COPY mode lamp" turn on during
(MHP-SENSOR) the sensor ON status.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
01-02 MHP-SENSOR
EXECUTING...
06 Mirror scan aging (SCAN [Function]
AGING) When [ENTER/START] key is pressed, the mirror base performs full scan at the speed of the
set magnification ratio.
During operation, the set magnification ratio is displayed.
After 3sec, the mirror base performs full scan again.
When [ENTER/START] key is pressed once, the ready lamp remains OFF.
The mirror home position sensor status is displayed on the "COPY mode lamp." (The lamp is
ON when the mirror is in the home position.)
During aging, the copy lamp is ON.
[Operation]
The operation is similar to test command 1-01.
2 01 Reversing Single Pass [Function]
Feeder (RSPF) aging When [ENTER/START] key is pressed, the set magnification ratio is acquired and duplex docu-
(SPF AGING) ment transport is performed in the case of RSPF.
However, the operating conditions don't matter and the operation is not stopped even in case of
a jam. Also the magnification ratio is displayed on the LCD.
[Operation]
The operation is similar to test command 1-01.
02 RSPF sensor status display [Function]
(SPF SENSOR) The ON/OFF status of the RSPF sensors can be checked with the LCD.
When a sensor is ON, the sensor name is displayed on the LCD.
Sensor Display item
Document set sensor SPID
RSPF document transport sensor SPPD
RSPF paper feed cover open/close sensor SDSW
RSPF paper exit sensor SPOD

03 RSPF motor operation check
(SPF MOTOR CHK)
[Operation]
1) Initial display 2) When the sensor is ON:
02-02 SPF SENSOR 02-02 SPF SENSOR
SPID SPPD SDSW SPOD
[Function]
When [ENTER/START] key is pressed, the motor rotates for 10sec at the speed corresponding
to the set magnification ratio.
[Operation]
The operation is similar to test command 1-01.

AR-208S/208D TEST COMMAND, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 3

Main Sub
Contents Details of function/operation
code code
2 08 RSPF paper feed solenoid [Function]
operation check The RSPF paper feed solenoid (SPUS) repeats ON for 500ms and OFF for 500ms 20 times by
(SPF SPUS CHK) the use of the solenoid drive control Bios.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
02-08 SPF SPUS CHK
EXECUTING...
09 RSPF reverse solenoid [Function]
operation check The RSPF reverse solenoid (SPFS) repeats ON for 500ms and OFF for 500ms 20 times by the
(RSPF SPFS CHK) use of the solenoid drive control Bios.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
02-09 RSPF SPFS CHK
EXECUTING...
3 03 Shifter operation check [Function]
(SHIFTER CHK) The shifter is moved back and forth in four reciprocations.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
03-03 SHIFTER CHK
EXECUTING...
5 01 Operation panel display [Function]
check (LCD/LED CHK) <LED check mode (All ON/Individual ON)>
When [ENTER/START] key is pressed, all the LCD's on the operation panel are turned ON (all
pixels ON).
After 5sec of ON, the machine goes into the sub code entry standby mode.
When [MODE SWITCH] key is pressed under the all ON state, the mode is shifted to the indi-
vidual ON mode, where the LED's are turned on one by one from the left upper end to the left
lower side then from the right upper side to the right lower side. (All the pixels of LCD are lighted
simultaneously.) After lighting all the LCD's sequentially, all the LCD's are lighted simulta-
neously. After 5sec from lighting all the LCD's simultaneously, the machine goes into the sub
code entry standby mode. (Cycle of individual ON mode: ON 300ms, OFF 20ms)
When [C] key is pressed in the LED check mode, the machine goes into the sub code entry
standby mode.
When [START] key is pressed, the machine goes into the key input check mode.
<Key input check mode>
When the machine goes into the key input check mode, the LCD displays 0.
When any key is pressed after pressing a key on the operation panel, "+1" is added to the
value.
Once a key is pressed, it is not recounted.
When [START] key is pressed, counting is made and the machine goes into the LED ON check
mode (LED all ON status) after 3sec.
When [C] key is pressed for the first time, it is counted. When it is pressed for the second time,
the key check mode is retained as well as when another key is pressed.
When [CA] key is pressed for the first time, it is counted. When it is pressed for the second time,
the key check mode is retained as well as when another key is pressed.
(Note in the key input check mode)
Be sure to press [START] key at the last. (If it is pressed on the way, the machine goes into
the LED ON check mode.) (LED all ON status)
Multi key input is ignored.
[Operation]
<LED check mode (All ON/Individual ON)>
1) Initial display


2) When [MODE SWITCH] key is pressed, the machine goes into the individual ON mode.

<Key input check mode>

1) Initial display 2) [ENTER/START]
05-01 LCD/LED CHK. 05-01 LCD/LED CHK.
0 **

AR-208S/208D TEST COMMAND, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 4

Main Sub
Contents Details of function/operation
code code
5 02 Fusing lamp, cooling fan [Function]
operation check (HT LAMP When [ENTER/START] key is pressed, the fusing lamp repeats ON for 500ms and OFF for
CHK) 500ms 5 times. During this period, the cooling fan motor rotates.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
05-02 HT LAMP CHK
EXECUTING...

03 Copy lamp ON check [Function]

(C-LAMP CHK) When [ENTER/START] key is pressed, the copy lamp turns ON for 5sec.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
05-03 C-LAMP CHK
EXECUTING...

6 01 Paper feed solenoid [Function]

(CPFS1, CPFS2, MPFS) When [ENTER/START] key is pressed, the selected paper feed solenoid repeats ON for 500ms
operation check (PSOL and OF for 500ms 20times.
CHK) When [//10KEY] is pressed, the paper feed solenoid setting is switched.

Code number Setting Remark

0 CPFS1
1 CPFS2 Operation is possible only when No. 2 cassette is installed.
2 MPFS

[Operation]
1) Initial display 2) [/10KEY]
06-01 PSOL CHK 06-01 PSOL CHK
0:CPFS1 2:MPFS
2) [/10KEY] 3) [ENTER/START]
06-01 PSOL CHK 06-01 PSOL CHK
1:CPFS2 EXECUTING...
4) Returns to the initial display.
02 Resist roller solenoid (RRS) [Function]
operation check (RES.R When [ENTER/START] key is pressed, the resist solenoid repeats ON for 500ms and OFF for
SOL CHK) 500ms 20 times.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
06-02 RES.R SOL CHK
EXECUTING...

7 01 Check of warm-up display [Function]

and aging with JAM (W-UP/
AGING)
Copying is repeated to make the set quantity of copies.
When the test command is executed, warm-up is started and warm-up time is added for every
second from 0 and displayed.
When warm-up is completed, addition is stopped. When [CA] key is pressed, the ready lamp
lights up.
After that, enter the copy quantity with [10KEY] and press [ENTER/START] key to repeat copy-
ing of the set quantity (interval 0sec).
To cancel the test command, turn off the power or execute a test command which causes hard-
ware reset.
[Operation]
1) Initial display 2) After 10sec
07-01 W-UP/AGING 07-01 W-UP/AGING
0 10

AR-208S/208D TEST COMMAND, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 5

Main Sub
Contents Details of function/operation
code code
7 06 Interval aging (INTERVAL [Function]
AGING) Copying is repeated to make the set quantity of copies.
When the test command is executed, warm-up is performed and the ready lamp is lighted.
Enter the copy quantity with the [10KEY] and press [ENTER/START] key, and copying is exe-
cuted to make the set quantity of copies, and the ready state is kept for 3sec, and copying is
executed again to make the set quantity of copies. These operations are repeated.
To cancel the test command, turn off the power or execute a test command which executes
hardware reset.
[Operation]
1) Initial display (Basic display of copy)
READY TO COPY
100% A4 0
08 Shift to copy with warm-up [Function]
display (W-UP C-MODE) Enter the test command code, and warm-up is started and warm-up time is counted for every
second from 0 and displayed.
When [CA] key is pressed during counting up, "0" is displayed on the display and counting is
stopped. However, warm-up is continued.
After completion of warm-up, counting is terminated. (The aging function is removed from test
command 7-01.)
[Operation]
1) Initial display 2) After 10sec
07-08 W-UP C-MODE 07-08 W-UP C-MODE
0 10
8 01 Developing bias output [Function]
(DVLP BIAS SET.) When [ENTER/START] key is pressed, the developing bias signal is turned ON for 30sec.
When, however, an actual output value is measured, use test command 25-01.
After completion of this process, the machine goes into the sub code entry standby mode.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
08-01 DVLP BIAS SET.
EXECUTING...
02 Main charger output (Grid [Function]
HIGH) (MHV(H) SET.) When [ENTER/START] key is pressed, the main charger is outputted for 30sec in the grid volt-
age HIGH move.
After completion of this process, the machine goes into the sub code entry standby mode.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
08-02 MHV(H) SET.
EXECUTING...
03 Main charger output (Grid [Function]
LOW) (MHV(L) SET.) When [ENTER/START] key is pressed, the main charger is outputted for 30sec in the grid volt-
age LOW move.
After completion of this process, the machine goes into the sub code entry standby mode.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
08-03 MHV(L) SET.
EXECUTING...
06 Transfer charger output [Function]
(THV SET.) When [ENTER/START] key is pressed, the transfer charger is outputted for 30sec.
After completion of this process, the machine goes into the sub code entry standby mode.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
08-03 THV SET.
EXECUTING...

AR-208S/208D TEST COMMAND, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 6

Main Sub
Contents Details of function/operation
code code
9 01 Duplex motor normal [Function]
rotation check (DPLX ROT.) Use the duplex motor Bios to drive the duplex motor in the normal direction (paper exit direc-
(AR-208D only) tion) for 30sec.
After completion of this process, the machine goes into the sub code entry standby mode.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
09-01 DPLX ROT.
EXECUTING...
02 Duplex motor reverse [Function]
rotation check (DPLX Use the duplex motor Bios to drive the duplex motor in the reverse direction for 30sec.
ROT.REV.) (AR-208D only) After completion of this process, the machine goes into the sub code entry standby mode.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
09-02 DPLX ROT.REV.
EXECUTING...
04 Duplex motor rotating speed [Function]
adjustment (DPLX ROT. When this Test Command is executed, the currently set value is displayed.
SPEED) (AR-208D only) Enter the adjustment value with [10KEY] and press [ENTER/START] key. The entered value is
stored and the machine goes into the sub code entry standby mode. The greater the set value
is, the higher the speed is. The smaller the set value is, the lower the speed is.
(Setting range: 1 - 13, Default: 8)
[Operation]
1) Initial display 2) [10KEY] 3) [ENTER/START]
09-04 DPLX ROT.SPEED 09-04 DPLX ROT.SPEED 09-04 DPLX ROT.SPEED
8( 1-13) 7( 1-13) 7( 1-13)
10 Toner motor operation [Function]
(TONER MOTOR) When [ENTER/START] key is pressed, the toner motor is rotated for 30sec.
After completion of this process, the machine goes into the main code entry standby mode.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
10-00 TONER MOTOR
EXECUTING...

14 Cancel of trouble other than [Function]

U2 (TRBL CANC.) Used to cancel troubles other than U2.
Cancel troubles such as H trouble which writes data into EEPROM, and perform hardware
reset.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
14-00 TRBL CANC.
CLEARED

16 U2 trouble cancel (U2 TRBL [Function]

CANC.) Used to cancel U2 trouble.
When [ENTER/START] key is pressed, check sum of the total counter in the EEPROM is rewrit-
ten and hardware reset is made.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
16-00 U2 TRBL CANC.
CLEARED
20 01 Maintenance counter clear [Function]
(M-CNT CLR.) When [ENTER/START] key is pressed, the maintenance count value is cleared and "000,000" is
displayed.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
20-01 M-CNT CLR.
CLEARED 000,000

AR-208S/208D TEST COMMAND, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 7

Main Sub
Contents Details of function/operation
code code
21 01 Maintenance cycle setting [Function]
(M-CYCLE) The code of the currently set maintenance cycle value is displayed (initial display) and the set
data are saved.
Code Setting Remark
0 3,000 sheets
1 6,000 sheets
2 9,000 sheets
3 13,000 sheets
4 25,000 sheets Default
5 Free (999,999 sheets)

[Operation]
1) The current set value is 2) [/10KEY] 3) [ENTER/START]
displayed.
21-01 M-CYCLE 21-01 M-CYCLE
21-01 M-CYCLE 5:FREE ( 0-5 ) 5:FREE ( 0-5 )
4:25,000 ( 0-5 )
2) [/10KEY]
21-01 M-CYCLE
3:13,000 ( 0-5 )
22 01 Maintenance counter display [Function]
(M-CNT) The maintenance counter is displayed.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
22-01 M-CNT
***,***
02 Maintenance preset display [Function]
(M-CNT PRESET) The quantity (25,000 sheets, etc.) corresponding to the code set with TC21-01 is displayed.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
22-02 M-CNT PRESET
***,***
04 JAM total counter display [Function]
(JAM TTL CNT) The JAM total counter is displayed.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
22-04 JAM TTL CNT
***,***
05 Total counter display (TTL [Function]
CNT) The total counter value is displayed.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
22-05 TTL CNT
***,***
06 Developer counter display [Function]
(DVLP CNT) The developer counter data is acquired and displayed on the LCD.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
22-06 DVLP CNT
***,***
08 RSPF counter display [Function]
(SPF CNT) The RSPF counter is displayed.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
22-08 SPF CNT
***,***

AR-208S/208D TEST COMMAND, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 8

Main Sub
Contents Details of function/operation
code code
22 11 FAX-related counter display [Function]
(Executable only when the The FAX-related counter is displayed.
FAX is installed.)
[Operation]
1) Initial display
SELECT COUNTER
1:PAGE 2:TIME
[CLEAR] key: FAX control is terminated.
2) Select 1 2) Select 2
SEND PAGE:xxx,xxx TX TIME:xxxx:xx.xx
RECV PAGE:xxx,xxx RX TIME:xxxx:xx.xx
("xxx,xxx" is the current value.) ("xxxx: xxx. xx" is the current value.)
[CLEAR] key: Returns to "1) Initial display". [CLEAR] key: Returns to "1) Initial display".
12 Drum counter display [Function]
(DRUM CNT) The drum counter is displayed.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
22-12 DRUM CNT
***,***
13 CRUM type display (CRUM [Function]
TYPE) When the test command is executed, the CRUM type currently set (written) in the CRUM chip is
displayed.

Code number CRUM type Display item

00 Not set 0
01 BTA-A BTA-A
02 BTA-B BTA-B
03 BTA-C BTA-C
99 Conversion CONVERSION

[Operation]
1) The CRUM type is displayed.
22-13 CRUM TYPE
01:BTA-A
14 ROM version display (ROM [Function]
VER.) The P-ROM version is displayed.
Press [//10KEY] to switch the display version.

Code number Version Display item

0 Main unit Program MAIN PROG.
1 F-IMC Program F-IMC PROG.
2 LCD DATA LCD DATA

[Operation]
1) Initial display 2) [/10KEY]
22-14 ROM VER. 22-14 ROM VER.
MAIN PROG. 00.00 F-IMC PROG. 00.00
2) [/10KEY]
22-14 ROM VER.
LCD DATA 00.00
16 Duplex counter display [Function]
(DPLX CNT) (AR-208D only) The duplex counter is displayed.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
22-16 DPLX CNT
***,***

AR-208S/208D TEST COMMAND, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 9

Main Sub
Contents Details of function/operation
code code
22 17 Copy counter display [Function]
(COPIES CNT) The copy counter is displayed.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
22-17 COPIES CNT
***,***

18 Printer counter display [Function]

(PRT.CNT) The printer counter is displayed.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
22-18 PRT.CNT
***,***
19 Scanner mode counter [Function]
display (S-MODE CNT) The scanner mode counter is displayed.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
22-19 S-MODE CNT
***,***
21 Scanner counter display [Function]
(SCAN CNT) The scanner counter is displayed.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
22-21 SCAN CNT
***,***
22 RSPF JAM counter display [Function]
(S JAM CNT) The RSPF JAM counter is displayed.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
22-22 S JAM CNT
***,***
24 01 JAM total counter clear [Function]
(JAM TTL CLR.) When [ENTER/START] key is pressed, the JAM total counter is cleared to 0 and "000,000" is
displayed on the LCD.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
24-01 JAM TTL CLR.
CLEARED 000,000

04 RSPF counter clear [Function]

(SPF CLR.) When [ENTER/START] key is pressed, the RSPF counter value is cleared to 0 and "000,000" is
displayed on the LCD.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
24-04 SPF CLR.
CLEARED 000,000

05 Duplex counter clear [Function]

(DPLX CLR.) When [ENTER/START] key is pressed, the duplex counter value is cleared to 0, and "000,000"
(AR-208D only) is displayed on the LCD.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
24-05 DPLX CLR.
CLEARED 000,000

AR-208S/208D TEST COMMAND, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 10

Main Sub
Contents Details of function/operation
code code
24 06 Developer counter clear [Function]
(DVLP CLR.) When [ENTER/START] key is pressed, the developer counter value is cleared to 0, and
"000,000" is displayed on the LCD.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
24-06 DVLP CLR.
CLEARED 000,000

07 Drum counter clear (DRUM [Function]

CLR.) When [ENTER/START] key is pressed, the drum counter value is cleared to 0, and "000,000" is
displayed on the LCD.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
24-07 DRUM CLR.
CLEARED 000,000

08 Copy counter clear (COPIES [Function]

CLR.) When [ENTER/START] key is pressed, the copy counter value is cleared to 0, and "000,000" is
displayed on the LCD.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
24-08 COPIES CLR.
CLEARED 000,000
09 Printer counter clear [Function]
(PRT.CLR.) When [ENTER/START] key is pressed, the printer counter value is cleared to 0, and "000,000"
is displayed on the LCD.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
24-09 PRT.CLR.
CLEARED 000,000
10 FAX counter clear (FAX [Function]
CLR.) (Executable only When [ENTER/START] key is pressed, the FAX count value is set to 0 and "000,000" is dis-
when the FAX is installed.) played on the LCD.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
24-10 FAX CLR.
CLEARED 000,000
13 Scanner counter clear [Function]
(SCAN CLR.) When [ENTER/START] key is pressed, the scanner counter value is cleared to 0, and "000,000"
is displayed on the LCD.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
24-13 SCAN CLR.
CLEARED 000,000
14 RSPF JAM total counter [Function]
clear (S JAM TTL CLR.) When [ENTER/START] key is pressed, the RSPF JAM total counter value is cleared to 0, and
"000,000" is displayed on the LCD.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
24-14 S JAM TTL CLR.
CLEARED 000,000
15 Scanner mode counter clear [Function]
(S-MODE CLR.) When [ENTER/START] key is pressed, the scanner mode counter value is cleared to 0, and
"000,000" is displayed on the LCD.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
24-15 S-MODE CLR.
CLEARED 000,000

AR-208S/208D TEST COMMAND, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 11

Main Sub
Contents Details of function/operation
code code
25 01 Main motor operation check [Function]
(MAIN MOTOR CHK) When [ENTER/START] key is pressed, the main motor (and the duplex motor in the case of a
duplex model) is operated for 30sec.
To reduce toner consumption, if the developing unit is installed, the developing bias, the main
charger, and the grid are also outputted.
In this case, laser discharge is required when stopping the motor, the polygon motor is also
operated at the same time. Check for installation of the developing unit. If it is not installed, the
high voltage above is not outputted and only the motor is rotated.
To check the developing bias, install the developing unit.
After completion of 30sec operation, the machine goes into the sub code entry standby mode.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
25-01 MAIN MOTOR CHK
EXECUTING...

10 Polygon motor operation [Function]

check (LSU CHK) When [ENTER/START] key is pressed, the Bios is called to rotate the polygon motor for 30sec.
After completion of 30sec operation, the operation is turned off with the Bios and the machine
goes into the sub code entry standby mode.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
25-10 LSU CHK
EXECUTING...

26 02 (R)SPF setting (SPF/RSPF) [Function]

When this test command is executed, the current set (R)SPF is displayed. Enter the code num-
ber corresponding to the desired (R)SPF and press [ENTER/START] key to save the setting.

Code number SPF Display item

0 SPF NO SPF OFF
1 SPF YES* SPF ON
2 RSPF YES RSPF ON
* Cannot be executed.

[Operation]
The operation is similar to test command 21-01.
03 Second cassette setting [Function]
(2ND TRAY) When this test command is executed, the current set second cassette is displayed. Enter the
code number corresponding to the desired second cassette and press [ENTER/START] key to
save the setting.
Code number Second cassette Display item
0 Second cassette NO OFF
1 Second cassette YES ON

[Operation]
The operation is similar to test command 21-01.
04 Main unit duplex setting [Function]
(DPLX) When this test command is executed, the current set duplex is displayed. Enter the code num-
ber corresponding to the desired duplex and press [ENTER/START] key to save the setting.
Code number Duplex Display item
0 Duplex NO OFF
1 Duplex YES* ON
* AR-208S: cannot be executed.

[Operation]
The operation is similar to test command 21-01.

AR-208S/208D TEST COMMAND, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 12

Main Sub
Contents Details of function/operation
code code
26 06 Destination setting [Function]
(DESTINATION) When this test command is executed, the current set destination is displayed. Enter the code
number corresponding to the desired destination and press [ENTER/START] key to save the
setting.
Code number Destination Display item
0 Inch series INCH
1 EX Japan AB series AB
2 Japan AB series
3 China (EX Japan AB series + China paper support) CHINA
Code numbers 2 and 3 cannot be selected for the AR-208S and the AR-208D.

[Operation]
The operation is similar to test command 21-01.
07 Machine conditions check [Function]
(CPM) When this test command is executed, the current machine setting is displayed.
CPM Copy quantity Remark
20 CPM 20

[Operation]
1) The machine setting is displayed.
26-07 CPM
20 CPM
20 Rear edge void setting (END [Function]
EDGE) When this test command is executed, the current set rear edge void is displayed. Enter the
code number corresponding to the desired rear edge void and press [ENTER/START] key to
save the setting.
Code number Setting Display item Remark
0 Rear edge void NO OFF
1 Rear edge void YES ON Default

30 CE mark support control
ON/OFF (CE MARK)
[Operation]
The operation is similar to test command 21-01.
[Function]
When this test command is executed, the current set CE mark support control is displayed.
Enter the code number corresponding to the desired CE mark support control and press
[ENTER/START] key to save the setting.

Code number Setting Display item Remark

0 CE mark support control OFF OFF Default (100V series)
1 CE mark support control ON ON

37 Cancel of stop at developer
life over (DVLP LIFE END)
[Operation]
The operation is similar to test command 21-01.
[Function]
When this test command is executed, the current setting is displayed. Enter the code number
corresponding to the desired setting and press [ENTER/START] key to save the setting.

Code number Setting Display item Remark

0 Stop at developer life over STOP
1 Cancel of stop at developer life over NONSTOP

[Operation]
The operation is similar to test command 21-01.
39 Memory capacity check [Function]
(MEM.CHK) When the test command is executed, the currently installed SDRAM of the main unit is
displayed.

Code number Setting Remark

8 8 MBYTE
16 16 MBYTE

[Operation]
1) Memory capacity display
26-39 MEM.CHK
8 MBYTE

AR-208S/208D TEST COMMAND, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 13

Main Sub
Contents Details of function/operation
code code
26 40 Polygon motor OFF time [Function]
setting (Time required from When this test command is executed, the current setting is displayed. Enter the code number
completion of printing to corresponding to the desired setting and press [ENTER/START] key to save the setting.
turning OFF the motor) (LSU
MOTOR OFF) Code number Setting Display item Remark
0 0sec 0 SEC.
1 30sec 30 SEC. Default
2 60sec 60 SEC.
3 90sec 90 SEC.

42 Transfer ON timing control
setting (TC ON TIMING)
[Operation]
The operation is similar to test command 21-01.
[Function]
When this test command is executed, the currently set value of the transfer ON timing is dis-
played (initial display), and the set value is saved.

Mode Display item Default Setting range

Front surface paper lead edge F-REAR 11 0 21
Front surface paper rear edge F-END 50 1 99
Back surface paper lead edge B-REAR 11 0 21
Back surface paper rear edge B-END 50 1 99

<Front/back surface of paper lead edge <Front/back surface of paper rear edge
adjustment table> adjustment table>
Code Setting Remark Code Setting Remark
0 0 msec 1 98 msec
1 20 msec
49 2 msec
10 2 msec 50 0 msec Default
11 0 msec Default 51 +2 msec
12 +2 msec
99 +98 msec
21 +20 msec The default "50" of the transfer OFF timing
The default value, "11," of the transfer ON indicates "210msec passed from PPD1
timing indicates "236msec passed from PS OFF."
release." The transfer OFF timing can be adjusted to
When set to "0," it is same as setting to the 210msec 2ms.
default, "11."
The transfer ON timing can be adjusted to
236msc 2ms.

[Operation]
1) Initial display 3) [10KEY] Value entry
<Front surface lead edge setting>
26-42 TC ON TIMING
26-42 TC ON TIMING F-END 51( 1-99 )
F-REAR 11( 0-21 )
4) [ENTER/START] Settles the entered
2) [/] Mode selection value. The display is shifted to the sub
code input standby menu.
26-42 TC ON TIMING
F-END 50( 1-99 )

AR-208S/208D TEST COMMAND, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 14

Main Sub
Contents Details of function/operation
code code
26 43 Side void amount setting [Function]
(SIDE VOID) When this test command is executed, the currently set code of the side void quantity is dis-
played (initial display), and the set data are saved. (Setting range: 0 10, Default: 4 (= One side
2.0mm))

Code Setting Remark

0 0 mm
1 0.5 mm
2 1.0 mm
3 1.5 mm
4 2.0 mm Default
5 2.5 mm
6 3.0 mm
7 3.5 mm
8 4.0 mm
9 4.5 mm
10 5.5 mm
When the adjustment value is increased by 1, the side void is changed as follows:
Side void adjustment: The side void is increased by 0.5mm. (The side void of Set value x
0.5mm is made.)
[Operation]
1) Initial display 2) [10KEY] 3) [ENTER/START]
26-43 SIDE VOID 26-43 SIDE VOID 26-43 SIDE VOID
4( 0-10) 5( 0-10) 5( 0-10)
54 life correction setting [Function]
(GAMMA CTRL) Used to set the life correction.
When this test command is executed, the current set code number is displayed.
Enter the desired code number and press [ENTER/START] key to save the setting.
(Setting range: 0 1, default: 1)

Code number Setting Display item Remark

0 OFF OFF
1 ON ON Default

62 Energy-save mode copy
lamp setting (C-LAMP E-S)
[Operation]
The operation is similar to test command 21-01.
[Function]
Used to set half-ON /OFF of the copy lamp in the pre-heat mode.
When this test command is executed, the current set code number is displayed. Enter the
desired code number and press [ENTER/START] key to save the setting.

Code number Setting Display item Remark

0 Copy lamp OFF OFF
1 Copy lamp half-ON ON Default

[Operation]
The operation is similar to test command 21-01.
30 01 Paper sensor status display [Function]
(P-SENSOR) The paper sensor status is displayed on the LCD.

Sensor Display item Remark

Paper exit sensor POD
No. 1 tray paper width sensor PD1
No. 2 tray paper width sensor PD2
Paper entry sensor PPD1
Duplex sensor PPD2
No. 2 tray paper feed sensor PPD3
Since the manual paper feed sensor is a single bypass sensor, its status is not displayed.
The width sensor is available only in the FAX models.

[Operation]
1) Initial display 2) When sensor ON
30-01 P-SENSOR 30-01 POD PD1 PD2
PPD1 PPD2 PPD3

AR-208S/208D TEST COMMAND, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 15

Main Sub
Contents Details of function/operation
code code
41 06 OC cover float detection [Function]
level adjustment (OC FLOAT When this test command is executed, the current set value is displayed. When [ENTER/START]
LEVEL) key is pressed, the mirror base unit moves to the SPF scan position to acquire the OC cover
float detection level.
When the mirror base unit returns to the home position, the acquired value is displayed.
If the detection level is not acquired, ERR display is made. (Default: 0)
Note that, this test command must be executed with the OC cover closed.
If the value is 0, float detection is not performed in normal jobs.

[Operation]
1) Initial display <Canceling - when C/CA key is pressed->
41-06 OC FLOAT LEVEL After canceling, the machine goes into the sub code entry
0 standby mode.

2) [ENTER/START] THE JOB IS BEING

CANCELED.
41-06 OC FLOAT LEVEL
EXECUTING... 3) When the level is acquired:
41-06 OC FLOAT LEVEL
**** OK
3) When the level is not acquired:
41-06 OC FLOAT LEVEL
**** ERR
07 OC cover float detection [Function]
margin setting (OC FLOAT For the number of pixels between black markers on the SPF scanning position saved in 41-06:
MGN) (OC cover float detection level adjustment), if the number of pixels between the markers when
processing float detection is less than the number of pixels set with this simulation, it is judged
as the float error.
When the set value of this test command is "0," no float error occurs.
When this test command is executed, the current set value is displayed.
Enter the adjustment value with 10-key, and press [START] key. The setting is saved and the
display is shifted to the sub code input standby menu.
Setting range: 0 99 (Copes with margin 0 99 pixels.)
Default: 30 (30 pixels)
[Operation]
The operation is similar to test command 9-04.
43 01 Fusing temperature setting [Function]
(Normal copy) (FU TEMP) When this test command is executed, the current set code number is displayed. Press [//
10KEY] key to change the setting and press [ENTER/START] key to save the setting into the
EERPOM. The machine goes into the sub code entry standby mode.
Code Set temperature (C) Remark
0 170
1 175
2 180
3 185
4 190 Default
5 195
6 200
7 205
8 210

Mode Display item

Main cassette paper feed & 2nd cassette paper feed TRAY1
Manual paper feed MFT

The cassette feed and the manual feed are controlled similarly.

[Operation]
1) Initial display <Main cassette paper feed 3) [10KEY] Value entry
& 2nd cassette paper feed setting>
43-01 FU TEMP
43-01 FU TEMP MFT 7( 0-8 )
TRAY1 6( 0-8 )
4) [ENTER/START] Settles the entered
2) [/] Mode selection value. The display is shifted to the sub
code input standby menu.
43-01 FU TEMP
MFT 6( 0-8 )

AR-208S/208D TEST COMMAND, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 16

Main Sub
Contents Details of function/operation
code code
43 04 Fusing temperature setting [Function]
in multi copy For 20th sheet or later in multi copy, the fusing temperature is automatically changed from the
(FU TEMP MULTI) temperature set with test command 43-1 to the temperature set with this test command.
When this test command is executed, the current set code number is displayed. Enter the code
number and press [ENTER/START] key to change the setting.

Code Set temperature (C) Remark

0 165
1 170
2 175
3 180
4 185
5 190
6 195
7 200

Mode Display item Default

Main cassette paper feed & 2nd cassette paper feed TRAY1 3
Manual paper feed MFT 3
Main cassette paper feed & 2nd cassette paper feed (small-size) TRAY1 SH 3
Manual paper feed (small-size) MFT SH 3
The cassette feed and the manual feed are controlled similarly.

[Operation]
The operation is similar to test command 43-01.
05 Fusing temperature setting [Function]
in duplex copy (FU TEMP In the case of duplex copy, the shift temperature set with this test command is applied to the
DPLX) (AR-208D only) fusing temperature.
When this test command is executed, the current set code number is displayed.
Enter the desired code number and press [ENTER/START] key to save the setting.

Code Shift temperature (C) Remark

0 0 Default
1 -8
2 -6
3 -4
4 -2
5 0
6 +2
7 +4
8 +6
9 +8

[Operation]
The operation is similar to test command 21-01.
14 Fusing start temperature [Function]
setting (FU TEMP START) When this test command is started, the currently set code number is displayed.
Press [//10KEY] to switch the setting, and press [ENTER/START] key to save it to the
EEPROM. The machine goes to the sub code entry standby mode.

Code Set temperature (C) Remark

0 160
1 165
2 170
3 175
4 180
5 185
6 190
7 195 Default
8 200
9 205
10 210

[Operation]
The operation is similar to test command 43-01.

AR-208S/208D TEST COMMAND, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 17

Main Sub
Contents Details of function/operation
code code
46 01 Copy density adjustment [Function]
(300dpi) (EXP.LEVEL 300) Copy density is set for each mode.
When this test command is executed, the current se value is displayed in 2 digits (Default: 50).
Change the set value and press [START] key to make a copy under the set value.
When the set value is increased, the copy becomes darker. When the set value is decreased,
the copy becomes lighter.
In this case, only Exp.3 copy is made. When, however, the setting is made to make darker copy,
Exp.1 and Exp.5 copies also become darker. When made to lighter copy, Exp1. and Exp.5 cop-
ies become lighter, too.
Press [/] key to switch the mode. The set value of the selected mode is displayed on the
LCD. (Adjustment value: 1 99)
The setting procedure of the magnification ratio is the same as that to copy operation.

Mode Display item Default LED

AE mode (300dpi) AE 50 COPY mode lamp
TEXT mode (300dpi) TEXT 50 PRINT mode lamp
PHOTO mode PHOTO 50 SCAN mode lamp
TS mode (TEXT)(300dpi) TSTXT 50 PRINT mode lamp
SCAN mode lamp
TS mode (AE)(300dpi) TSAE 50 COPY mode lamp
SCAN mode lamp

[Operation]
1) Initial display 4) [START] Fixing and printing value (No
change on the LCD)
46-01 EXP.LEVEL 300
AE 100% 50( 1-99) Print is started in the set mode.

2) [] Mode selection 46-01 EXP.LEVEL 300

AE 100% 62( 1-99)
46-01 EXP.LEVEL 300
TSAE 100% 50( 1-99) 4) To fix the set value without printing, press
[Enter] key.
2) [] Mode selection
46-01 EXP.LEVEL 300
46-01 EXP.LEVEL 300 AE 100% 62( 1-99)
TEXT 100% 50( 1-99)
To cancel manual feed paper empty MSG,
3) [10KEY] Value entry press any key.
46-01 EXP.LEVEL 300 When performing the AE mode exposure
AE 100% 62( 1-99) adjustment, place the test chart on the docu-
ment table so that the center area of 10cm is
not covered.
02 Copy density adjustment [Function]
(600dpi) (EXP.LEVEL 600) Copy density is set for each mode.
When this test command is executed, the current se value is displayed in 2 digits (Default: 50).
Change the set value and press [START] key to make a copy under the set value.
When the set value is increased, the copy becomes darker. When the set value is decreased,
the copy becomes lighter.
In this case, only Exp.3 copy is made. When, however, the setting is made to make darker copy,
Exp.1 and Exp.5 copies also become darker. When made to lighter copy, Exp1. and Exp.5 cop-
ies become lighter, too.
Press [/] key to switch the mode. The set value of the selected mode is displayed on the
LCD. (Adjustment value: 1 99)

Mode Display item Default LED

AE mode (600dpi) AE 50 COPY mode lamp
TEXT mode (600dpi) TEXT 50 PRINT mode lamp
PHOTO mode PHOTO 50 SCAN mode lamp
TS mode (TEXT) (600dpi) TSTXT 50 PRINT mode lamp
SCAN mode lamp
TS mode (AE) (600dpi) TSAE 50 COPY mode lamp
SCAN mode lamp

[Operation]
The operation is similar to test command 46-01.

AR-208S/208D TEST COMMAND, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 18

Main Sub
Contents Details of function/operation
code code
46 12 Density adjustment in the [Function]
FAX mode (Collective When [START] key is pressed, scan is executed with the entered exposure adjustment value
adjustment) (Executable and the data stored on the FAX side is rewritten into the entered value.
only when the FAX is All data of the exposure adjustment values are rewritten into the same value.
installed.)
For the density adjustment table data, refer to TC46-13 (density adjustment (normal text) in the
FAX mode).
[Operation]
1) Initial display 3) Scan is started (self print), and the LED
of [START] key is turned off.
ADJUST EXP. AUTO
XX ADJUST EXP. AUTO
("XX" is the exposure adjustment value of SCAN YY
normal text stored on the FAX side.) 4) Print is started (self print).
2) Enter a 2-digit value as the exposure
ADJUST EXP. AUTO
adjustment value.
PRINT YY
ADJUST EXP. AUTO After completion of printing, returns to 2)
YY display.
("YY" is the entered exposure adjustment
value.)
13 FAX mode density [Function]
adjustment (normal text) Scan is started with the exposure adjustment value entered with [START] key, and the stored
(Executable only when the data of the selected mode on the FAX side is rewritten into the input value.
FAX is installed.) Density adjustment value data table
Mode Photo Exposure adjustment value
STD (Normal text) off
Fine (Fine text) on
off
Sfine (Super fine) on
off
When initializing each data: 50
[Operation]
1) Initial display 3) Scan is started (self print), and the LED
of [START] key is turned off.
ADJUST EXP. STD
XX ADJUST EXP. STD
("XX" is the corresponding exposure adjust- SCAN YY
ment value of normal text mode stored on the 4) Print is started (self print).
FAX side.)
ADJUST EXP. STD
2) Enter a 2-digit value as the exposure
PRINT YY
adjustment value with [10KEY].
After completion of printing, returns to 2)
ADJUST EXP. STD display.
YY
("YY" is the entered exposure adjustment
value.)
14 FAX mode density [Function]
adjustment (Fine text) When [START] key is pressed, scan is started with the entered exposure adjustment value and
(Executable only when the the data of the selected mode on the FAX side is changed to the entered value.
FAX is installed.) For the density adjustment value table data, refer to TC46-13 (FAX mode density adjustment
(normal text).)
[Operation]
1) Initial display 3) Scan start (self print)
ADJUST EXP. FINE ADJUST EXP. FINE
XX SCAN YY
("XX" is the corresponding exposure adjust- 4) Print start (self print)
ment value of the fine text mode stored on
ADJUST EXP. AUTO
the FAX side.)
PRINT YY
2) Enter a 2-digit value as the exposure
adjustment value with [10KEY]. After completion of printing, returns to 2)
display.
ADJUST EXP. FINE
YY
("YY" is the entered exposure adjustment
value.)

AR-208S/208D TEST COMMAND, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 19

Main Sub
Contents Details of function/operation
code code
46 15 FAX mode density [Function]
adjustment (Super fine) When [START] key is pressed, scan is started with the entered exposure adjustment value and
(Executable only when the the data of the selected mode on the FAX side is changed to the entered value.
FAX is installed.) For the density adjustment value table data, refer to TC46-13 (FAX mode density adjustment
(normal text).)
[Operation]
1) Initial display 3) Scan start (self print)
ADJUST EXP. S-FINE ADJUST EXP. S-FINE
XX SCAN YY
("XX" is the corresponding exposure adjust- 4) Print start (self print)
ment value of the super fine mode stored on
the FAX side.) ADJUST EXP. S-FINE
PRINT YY
2) Enter a 2-digit value as the exposure
adjustment value with [10KEY]. After completion of printing, returns to 2)
display.
ADJUST EXP. S-FINE
YY
("YY" is the entered exposure adjustment
value.)
18 Image contrast adjustment [Function]
(300dpi) (GAMMA 300) Contrast is set for each mode.
When this test command is executed, the current se value is displayed in 2 digits (Default: 50).
Change the set value and press [START] key to make a copy under the set value.
When the set value is increased, the contrast becomes higher. When the set value is
decreased, the contrast becomes lower.
In this case, only Exp.3 copy is made. When, however, the setting is made to make higher con-
trast, Exp.1 and Exp.5 copies also become in higher contrast. When made to a lower contrast,
Exp1. and Exp.5 copies become lower contrast, too.
Press [/] key to switch the mode. The set value of the selected mode is displayed on the
LCD. (Adjustment value: 1 99)

Mode Display item Default LED

AE mode (300dpi) AE 50 COPY mode lamp
TEXT mode (300dpi) TEXT 50 PRINT mode lamp
PHOTO mode PHOTO 50 SCAN mode lamp
TS mode (TEXT) (300dpi) TSTXT 50 PRINT mode lamp
SCAN mode lamp
TS mode (AE) (300dpi) TSAE 50 COPY mode lamp
SCAN mode lamp
No density display on LCD.

[Operation]
The operation is similar to test command 46-01.

AR-208S/208D TEST COMMAND, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 20

Main Sub
Contents Details of function/operation
code code
46 19 Exposure mode setting (AE [Function]
MODE) < table setting>
When this test command is executed, the code number of the current set gamma table is dis-
played. (Default: 2)
Enter the code number corresponding to the desired gamma table, and press [/] key to
change the mode and write into the EEPROM.
<AE operation mode>
When setting the table, press [] key to change to the AE operation mode, and the current set
code number of the AE operation mode is displayed. (Default: 0)
Enter the code number corresponding to the desired AE operation mode and press [/] key
to change the mode and write into the EEPROM.
<PHOTO image process setting>
When [] key is pressed in AE operation mode setting, the mode is changed to the PHOTO
image process setting and the code number of the current set PHOTO image process setting is
displayed. (Default: 1)
Enter the code number corresponding to the desired PHOTO image process setting and press
[/] key to change the mode and write into the EEPROM.

Mode Display item Code number Setting content Remark

1 Image quality priority mode
GAMMA
2 Toner consumption priority mode Default
0 Lead edge stop Default
AE AE
1 Real time process
1 Error diffusion process Default
PHOTO PHOTO
2 Dither process

[Operation]
1) Initial display 2) [] Mode selection 3) [10KEY] Value input
< table setting>
46-19 AE MODE 46-19 AE MODE
46-19 AE MODE AE 0( 0-1) AE 1( 0-1)
GAMMA 2( 1-2)
2) [] Mode selection 4) [ENTER/START] Save
the set value. The
46-19 AE MODE
machine goes to the sub
PHOTO 1( 1-2)
code entry standby mode.
20 RSPF exposure correction [Function]
(EXP.LEVEL SPF) Used to adjust the exposure correction amount in the RSPF mode. The adjustment is made by
adjusting Vref voltage variation for the OC mode.
When this test command is executed, the current set value is displayed in 2 digits (Default: 50).
Change the set value and press [START] key to save the setting and make a copy.
When the set value is increased, copy becomes darker. When the set value is decreased, copy
becomes lighter. (Adjustment range: 1 99)

Mode Display item Default Remark

RSPF SPF 50

[Operation]
The operation is similar to test command 46-01.

AR-208S/208D TEST COMMAND, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 21

Main Sub
Contents Details of function/operation
code code
46 29 Image contrast adjustment [Function]
(600dpi) (GAMMA 600) Contrast is set for each mode.
When this test command is executed, the current se value is displayed in 2 digits (Default: 50).
Change the set value and press [START] key to make a copy under the set value.
When the set value is increased, the contrast becomes higher. When the set value is
decreased, the contrast becomes lower.
In this case, only Exp.3 copy is made. When, however, the setting is made to make higher con-
trast, Exp.1 and Exp.5 copies also become in higher contrast. When made to a lower contrast,
Exp1. and Exp.5 copies become lower contrast, too.
Press [/] key to switch the mode. The set value of the selected mode is displayed on the
LCD. (Adjustment value: 1 99)

Mode Display item Default LED

AE mode (600dpi) AE 50 COPY mode lamp
TEXT mode (600dpi) TEXT 50 PRINT mode lamp
PHOTO mode PHOTO 50 SCAN mode lamp
TS mode (TEXT)(600dpi) TSTXT 50 PRINT mode lamp
SCAN mode lamp
TS mode (AE)(600dpi) TSAE 50 COPY mode lamp
SCAN mode lamp
No density display on LCD.

[Operation]
The operation is similar to test command 46-01.
30 AE limit adjustment (AE [Function]
LIMIT) Used to set the limit value in AE and AE (toner save).
Change the setting and press [ENTER/START] key to write the setting into the EEPROM. The
machine goes into the sub code entry standby mode.
By pressing [/] key, setting is changed. (Setting range: 0 31, Default: 0)

Mode Display item Remark

Limit value for AE AE
Limit value for AE (toner save) TEXT
<Remark>
When test command 26-06 (Destination setting) or test command 46-19 Auto Exposure mode
is changed, the setting of this test command is also changed to the default in connection.
[Operation]
The operation is similar to test command 46-19.
31 Image sharpness [Function]
adjustment (SHARPNESS) Used to adjust sharpening/blurring of image in each mode.

Image quality Setting No Remark

Blurring 0
Standard 1 Default
Sharpening 2

When this test command is executed, warm-up and shading are performed and the current set
value is displayed. (Default: 1)
Change the set value and press [START] key to make a copy under the set conditions.
To change the mode, press [/] key. The code number of the selected mode is dip0slayed on
the LCD.

Mode Display item Default setting LED

AE mode AE 1 COPY mode lamp
TEXT mode TEXT 1 PRINT mode lamp
PHOTO mode PHOTO 1 SCAN mode lamp
TS mode (TEXT) TSTXT 1 PRINT mode lamp
SCAN mode lamp
TS mode (AE) TSAE 1 COPY mode lamp
SCAN mode lamp

[Operation]
The operation is similar to test command 46-01.

AR-208S/208D TEST COMMAND, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 22

Main Sub
Contents Details of function/operation
code code
46 32 Copier color reproduction [Function]
setting (COLOR Used to set color reproduction in each mode. Colors easy to be copied and colors difficult to be
REAPPEAR) copied can be switched.
Set value Colors easy to be copied Colors difficult to be copied
0 Purple, Blue, Red Yellow, Green, Water blue
1 Water blue, Green, Blue Purple, Red, Yellow
2 Yellow, Red, Green Blue, Water blue, Purple
This setting has virtually no effect on black-and-white documents.
When this test command is executed, warm-up and shading are performed and the current set
value is displayed. (Default: 0)
Press [START] key to make a copy under the set conditions . At that time, color components are
changed for used in copying.
To change the mode, press [/] key. The code number of the selected mode is dip0slayed on
the LCD.

Specification component Setting No Remark

Green 0 Default
Red 1
Blue 2

Mode Display item Default setting LED

AE mode (including TS) AE 0 COPY mode lamp
TEXT mode (including TS) TEXT 0 PRINT mode lamp
PHOTO mode PHOTO 0 SCAN mode lamp

[Operation]
The operation is similar to test command 46-01.
39 FAX mode sharpness [Function]
adjustment (Executable only When [START] key is pressed, scan is started with the entered sharpness adjustment value,
when the FAX is installed.) and the data of the selected mode stored on the FAX side is changed to the entered value.
Sharpness adjustment value data table
Mode Sharpness adjustment value
1: STD
2: FINE
3: S-FINE
4: FINE/PHOTO
5: S-FINE/PHOTO
When initializing each data: 1
[Operation]
1) Initial display 4) Enter a one-digit value (0-2) as the sharp-
ness adjustment value with [10KEY].
SHARPNESS SETTING
PRESS , SHARPNESS SETTING
2) [/] or after 2sec ZZZZ(0-2) Y

Every time when [] key is pressed, the ("Y" is the entered sharpness adjustment
second line is changed in the sequence value.)
of No. 1 2 3 4 5 1. [CLEAR] key: Returns to 2) display.
When [] key is pressed, the sequence 5) Scan start (self print)
is reversed.
SHARPNESS SETTING
SHARPNESS SET (1-5) SCAN Y
1:STD
6) Print start (self print)
3) Select the arrow key 1-5, and the LED of
[START] key is lighted. SHARPNESS SETTING
PRINT Y
SHARPNESS SETTING
ZZZZ(0-2) X After completion of printing, returns to 4)
display.
("ZZZZ" is the mode selected among STD,
FINE, S-FINE, FINE/PHOTO, and S-FINE/
PHOTO.)
("X" is the corresponding sharpness adjust-
ment value of the selected mode stored on
the FAX side.)
[CLEAR] key: Returns to 2) display.

AR-208S/208D TEST COMMAND, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 23

Main Sub
Contents Details of function/operation
code code
48 01 Main scan/sub scan [Function]
direction magnification ratio Used to adjust the magnification ratio in the main scan (front/rear) direction and sub scan direc-
(COPY MAG.) tion.
Enter the adjustment value with [10KEY]. Press [START] key to save the set value and make a
copy. (When the adjustment value is increased by 1, the magnification ratio is increased by
0.1%.)
The adjustment mode can be changed by pressing [/] key. (Adjustment range: 1 99,
Default: 50)
Mode Display item Default value LED
Main scan direction magnification ratio F-R 50 PRINT mode lamp
OC mode sub scan direction SCAN 50 SCAN mode lamp
magnification ratio

05 RSPF mode sub scan
direction magnification ratio
in copying (RSPF MAG.)
[Operation]
The operation is similar to test command 46-01.
[Function]
Used to display the current RSPF mode sub scan direction magnification ratio on the LCD.
When [START] key is pressed, the entered data is acquired and saved into the EEPROM, and a
copy is made. (When the set value is increased by 1, the magnification ratio is increased by
0.1%.)
The adjustment mode can be changed by pressing [/] key. (Adjustment range: 1 99,
Default: 50)
When adjusting the RSPF, the mode is set to "Duplex Single," single copies of two sheets are
performed.
For printing, regardless of the density mode and the density level,
Density mode = MANUAL
Density level = 3

Initial value of Display

Mode Default LED
duplex setting item
Sub scan magnification ratio adjustment S-S SIDE1 50 COPY
on the front surface of RSPF document mode lamp
Sub scan magnification ratio adjustment D-S SIDE2 50 PRINT
on the back surface of RSPF document mode lamp
When there is no document in RSPF, copy is inhibited.

[Operation]
The operation is similar to test command 46-01.

AR-208S/208D TEST COMMAND, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 24

Main Sub
Contents Details of function/operation
code code
49 01 Download mode [Function]
(DOWNLOAD MODE) When this test command is executed, "DLOWNLOAD MODE" is displayed on the LCD and the
machine goes into the program writing mode from PC to Flash ROM.
Use the writing tool on the PC and write the program.
During writing, the display shows as follows:
After completion of download, turn OFF/ON the power to reset.
Status Display item
Download data receiving RECEIVING
Loader function transfer LOADER COPYING
Date delete start FLASH ERASE
Data write (Boot section) BOOT WRITING
Data write (Program section) PROGRAM WRITING
Data write (EEPROM) E2PROM WRITING
Data write (LCD) LCD DATE WRITING
During SUM CHECK FLASH ROM SUM CHECK
During BOOT SUM CHECK BOOT SUM CHECK
During EEPROM SUM CHECK EEPROM SUM CHECK
Download complete DOWNLOAD COMPLETE!

In case of an error in download, the following message is displayed on the LCD.

Error status Display item
PC data receiving E-01 PC TRANS
Loader function transfer E-02 LOADER COPY
FLASH ROM delete E-03 FLASH ERASE
Boot section FLASH ROM write E-04 BOOT WRITE
Program section FLASH ROM write E-05 PROGRAM WRITE
Loader section SUM CHECK E-06 LOADER SUM
Boot section SUM CHECK E-07 BOOT SUM
Program section SUM CHECK E-08 PROGRAM SUM
E2PROM SUM CHECK E-09 E2PROM SUM
E2PROM write E-10 E2PROM WRITE
E2PROM read Verify E-11 E2PROM READ
E2PROM collating Verify E-12 E2PROM COLLATE
Boot section lens check E-13 BOOT LENGTH
Program section lens check E-14 PROGRAM LENGTH
E2PROM lens check E-15 E2PROM LENGTH
Total data size check E-16 DATE SIZE
IMC communication error E-17 IMC TRANS
IMC FRASH ROM write E-18 IMC FLASH WRITE
LCD section lens check E-19 LCD DATE LENGTH
LCD section FLASH ROM write E-20 LCD DATE WRITE
LCD section SUM CHECK E-21 LCD DATE SUM

To enter the download mode, there is a method to use key operations as well as to use a test
command. With the power OFF, press and hold [CA] + [], turn on the power.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
DOWNLOAD MODE

AR-208S/208D TEST COMMAND, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 25

Main Sub
Contents Details of function/operation
code code
50 01 Lead edge image position [Function]
(LEAD EDGE) Used to adjust the copy image position and the lead edge void amount on copy paper. The
adjustment is made by adjusting the image scan start position at 100% and the print start posi-
tion (resist roller ON timing). When this test command is executed, the current set value is dis-
played in 2 digits. (Center value: 50)
When [/] key is pressed, the setting mode and the display are changed.
Enter the adjustment value and press [START] key to save the set value and make a copy.
When the adjustment is made by the main cassette paper feed, the adjustment values of all the
paper feed ports become the same. (When the set value is increased by 1, shift is made by
0.1mm.)
Mode Display item Default LED
Print start position (Main cassette TRAY1 50 COPY mode lamp
paper feed) Main cassette lamp
(*) Print start position (2nd cassette TRAY2 50 COPY mode lamp
paper feed) 2nd cassette lamp
Print start position (Manual paper MFT 50 COPY mode lamp
feed) Manual paper feed lamp
Image lead edge void amount DEN-A 50 PRINT mode lamp
Main cassette lamp
Image scan start position RRC-A 50 SCAN mode lamp
Main cassette lamp
Image rear edge void amount DEN-B 50 COPY mode lamp
(Cassette paper feed) PRINT mode lamp
SCAN mode lamp
Main cassette lamp
Image rear edge void amount RRC-B 50 COPY mode lamp
(Manual paper feed) PRINT mode lamp
Manual paper feed lamp
(*): Support for the installation models. For non-installation models, skip.
When printing with the manual paper feed tray, use paper of the letter size.
When paper is discharged, the shifter is operated.

[Adjustment procedure]
1) Set the print start position (A: AE mode lamp/COPY mode lamp ON), the lead edge void
amount (B: TEXT mode lamp/PRINT mode lamp ON), the scan start position (C: PHOTO
mode lamp/SCAN mode lamp) to zero, and make a copy of the scale at 100%.
2) Measure the image loss (Rmm) of the scale.
Set C = 10 x R (mm). (Example: Set to 40.)
When the value of C is increased by 10, the image loss is decreased by 1mm. (Default: 50)
3) Measure the distance (Hmm) from the paper lead edge to the image print start position.
Set A = 10 x H (mm). (Example: Set to 50.)
When the value of A is increased by 10, the image lead edge is moved to the paper lead
edge by 1mm. (Default: 50).
4) Set the lead edge void amount to B = 50 (2.5mm). (Default: 50)
When the value of B is increased by 10, the void is extended by about 0.1mm. (For 25 or
less, however, the void amount is regarded as 0.)
The RSFP adjustment is made by adjusting the RSPF image scan start position after OC
adjustment.
(Example)
Distance from the paper lead edge
to the image lead edge, H = 5mm

Image loss, R = 4mm

5mm

10mm

[Operation]
The operation is similar to test command 46-01.

AR-208S/208D TEST COMMAND, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 26

Main Sub
Contents Details of function/operation
code code
50 06 Copy lead edge position [Function]
adjustment (RSPF) Used to adjust the RSPF copy lead edge.
(RSPF EDGE) When the adjustment value of the document scan position adjustment is increased by 1, the
scan start timing is advanced by 0.1mm.
The print result is shifted to the opposite direction of the scan start position.
The adjustment mode can be changed by pressing [/] key. (Adjustment range: 1 99,
Default: 50)
When scanning a back surface of document, the mode must be changed to operate the RSPF
by pressing [2-SIDED COPY] key.
Initial value of Display
Mode Default LED
duplex setting item
Front surface document scan S-S SIDE1 50 COPY mode lamp
position adjustment
Back surface document scan D-S SIDE2 50 PRINT mode lamp
position adjustment
Rear edge void adjustment S-S END 50 SCAN mode lamp
(RSPF)

When there is no document in the RSPF, copy is inhibited.

When paper is discharged, the shifter is operated.

[Operation]
The operation is similar to test command 46-01.
10 Print center offset [Function]
adjustment (PRT.OFF- Used to adjust the center offset position of copy images on copy paper and that in scanning
CENTER) document.
When this test command is executed, the current set value is displayed.
Enter the adjustment value and press [START] key to save the setting and make a copy. (When
the set value is changed by 1, the center is shifted by 0.1mm.)
When the adjustment value is increased, the center is shifted to right. When decreased, the
center is shifted to left.
The modes can be selected by pressing [/] key.
When the set value is changed largely, the area outside the shading area may be scanned to
cause black streaks on the edges. When the RSPF is used, select the mode for use of the
RSPF by [2-SIDED COPY] key.
Mode Display item Default LED
Print center offset TRAY1 50 COPY mode lamp
(Main cassette paper feed) Main cassette lamp
(*) Print center offset TRAY2 50 COPY mode lamp
(2nd cassette paper feed) 2nd cassette lamp
Print center offset (Manual paper feed) MFT 50 COPY mode lamp
Manual paper feed lamp
(**) 2nd print center offset SIDE2 50 PRINT mode lamp
(Main cassette paper feed) Main cassette lamp

(*): Support for the installation models. For non-installation models, skip.
(**) : For Simplex models, skip.
When printing with the manual paper feed tray, use paper of the letter size.
In the 2nd print center offset adjustment, print is made forcibly as 1to2/Short Edge from OC
regardless of duplex setting.
When paper is discharged, the shifter is operated.

[Operation]
The operation is similar to test command 46-01.
12 Document feed off-center [Function]
adjustment (ORG.OFF- Used to adjust document scan off-center adjustment.
CENTER) The adjustment modes can be selected by pressing [/] key. (Adjustment range: 1 99,
Default: 50)
When the adjustment value is increased, the print result is shifted to left.
Initial value of
Mode Display item Default LED
duplex setting
Platen document scan S-S OC 50 COPY mode lamp
SPF document front scan S-S SPF 50 PRINT mode lamp
RSPF document back scan D-S RSPF 50 SCAN mode lamp

When paper is discharged, the shifter is operated.

[Operation]
The operation is similar to test command 46-01.

AR-208S/208D TEST COMMAND, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 27

Main Sub
Contents Details of function/operation
code code
50 18 Memory reverse position [Function]
adjustment in duplex copy When this test command is executed, the current set correction value is displayed.
(DPLX REVERSE) Enter the correction value and press [START] key to save the entered correction value. (Correc-
tion value range; 1 99, Default: 50)
For S-D mode front surface print and print of even paged in D-S mode, reverse memory copy
operation is performed from the rear edge of documents.
When, therefore, the print position adjustment of output images is required, adjust as follows:
In the reverse memory coping, when the document scan is made in the arrow direction, the out-
put image is printed from the rear edge of scan image,
When, therefore, the print lead edge is shifted, set the reference chart so that the reference
position is on the rear edge, and use this test command to adjust the set value so that the print
lead edge is matched.
Since printing is made from the image data most lately stored in memory to the lead edge data
from the print start position, the image lead edge adjustment is made by changing the end data
position stored in memory by the set value of this test command.
Since it is performed by changing the scan end position, the image position adjustment is made
by changing the scan end position and the end data stored in memory.
The adjustment modes can be selected by pressing [/] key.

Initial value of
Mode Display item Default LED
duplex setting
OC memory reverse output S-D OC 50 COPY mode lamp
position (AR-208D only)
RSPF memory reverse D-S SPF 50 PRINT mode lamp
output position

Document transport direction Document transport direction

Scan lead edge Print lead edge
Lead edge void (1)
Print start position

Scan end position

(Default: Scan cut by void (1)) Rear edge void
Print rear edge
Scan direction Scan rear edge

The initial value of duplex setting is "1to2/Long Edge" for the duplex model, or "2to1" for the
simplex model.
When paper is discharged, the shifter is operated.

[Operation]
The operation is similar to test command 46-01.
19 Duplex copy rear edge void [Function]
adjustment (DPLX END Used to adjust the rear edge void amount in duplex copy.
EDGE) (AR-208D only) When this test command is executed, the current set value is displayed in 2 digits. (Center
value: 50.) The adjustment modes can be selected by pressing [/] key. (Adjustment range; 1
99)
Enter the adjustment value and press [START] key to save the set value and make a copy. (The
paper information is cleared for every copy.)
When the set value is increased by 1, the void amount is increased by about 0.1mm.

Mode Display item Default LED

Paper rear edge void amount DEN-B 50 PRINT mode lamp
Print start position (Duplex back surface) RRC-D 50 SCAN mode lamp
The initial value for duplex setting is "1to2/Short Edge" for the OC setting, or "2to2" for the
RSPF setting.
When paper is discharged, the shifter is operated.

[Operation]
The operation is similar to test command 46-01.

AR-208S/208D TEST COMMAND, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 28

Main Sub
Contents Details of function/operation
code code
51 02 Resist amount adjustment [Function]
(RESIST ADJ.) Used to adjust the contact pressure of the main unit resist roller and the RSPF resist roller onto
paper. When this test command is executed, the current set value is displayed.
The adjustment modes can be selected by pressing [/] key.
Enter the adjustment value with [10KEY] and press [START] key to save the set value and make
a copy.

Mode Display item Default LED

Main cassette paper fed TRAY1 50 COPY mode lamp
Main cassette lamp
(*) 2nd cassette paper feed TRAY2 50 COPY mode lamp
2nd cassette lamp
Manual paper feed MFT 50 COPY mode lamp
Manual paper feed lamp
RSPF document paper feed SIDE1 50 COPY mode lamp
(Front surface) PRINT mode lamp
SCAN mode lamp
Main cassette lamp
RSPF document paper feed SIDE2 50 COPY mode lamp
(Back surface) PRINT mode lamp
Main cassette lamp
(*) Duplex back surface DUP-2 50 PRINT mode lamp
SCAN mode lamp
Main cassette lamp
(*): Support for the installation models. For non-installation models, skip.
[Operation]
The operation is similar to test command 46-01.
53 08 RSPF scan position [Function]
automatic adjustment Place a A4 paper (white chart) so that it covers the RSPF scan glass and the OC glass
(SPF AUTO) together, and close the RSPF.
When this test command is executed, the current adjustment value is displayed as the initial dis-
play.
Default is 1. Adjustment range is 1 99. Adjustment unit 1 = about 0.127mm
If the values are kept as the default values, RSPF scan is not performed properly. The front
area of the proper scan position may be scanned.
In case of AUTO, press [START] key, and the mirror unit scans from the home position to the
RSPF scan position with the adjustment value displayed. The RSPF glass cover edge position
is calculated from the difference between the RSPF glass cover edge and the OC side docu-
ment glass CCD output level. If the adjustment is normal, the adjusted value is displayed. If
abnormal, the error LED lights up with the current set value displayed.
During the error LED is lighted, when [START] key is pressed again, execution is performed
again.

Mode Display item Default LED

RSPF scan position auto adjustment AUTO 1 COPY mode lamp
RSPF scan position manual adjustment MANU 1 PRINT mode lamp

[Operation]
The operation is similar to test command 46-01. (In MANUAL)
OK/ERR display in AUTO
<When OK> <When ERR>
53-08 SPF AUTO 53-08 SPF AUTO
AUTO 100% ** OK AUTO 100% ** ERR
61 03 HSYNC output check (LSU [Function]
CHK) When [ENTER/START] key is pressed, HSYNC is performed and the polygon motor is rotated
for 30sec.
At that time, the COPY mode lamp is lighted for 100msec every time when HSYNC is detected.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
61-03 LSU CHK
EXECUTING...

AR-208S/208D TEST COMMAND, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 29

Main Sub
Contents Details of function/operation
code code
63 01 Shading check (SHADING [Function]
CHK) Used to display the detection level of white plate for shading.
When [ENTER/START] key is pressed, the mirror base unit moves to the white plate for shading
and the copy lamp is lighted.
When the light quantity is stabilized, revision is made for every second, and the level of one
pixel at the center of CCD which is not corrected is detected and the value is displayed in deci-
mal values on the LCD. (3 digits)
[Operation]
1) Initial display
63-01 SHADING CHK
EXECUTING... 000

02 Black level automatic [Function]

correction (BLACK LEVEL) Used to acquire the black level target value used for the black level adjustment of white balance.
When this test command is executed, the current correction value is displayed in 3 digits of
12bit hexadecimal number.
Place the gray gradation chart (UKOG-0162FCZZ) used as the correction document so that the
density 10 (black side) comes on the left side and that the chart is upside down at the center of
the plate left center.

10

Chart back surface

When [ENTER/START] key is pressed, the mirror base unit scans the chart and calculates the
correction value.
After completion of correction, the corrected value is displayed on the LCD.
Default: 0
If the value is set to the default, operation is made with 0x60.

[Operation]
1) Initial display <During canceling - When C/CA is pressed->
63-02 BLACK LEVEL After canceling, the machine goes into the sub
000 code entry standby mode.

2) [ENTER/START] Correction start THE JOB IS BEING

CANCELED.
63-02 BLACK LEVEL
EXECUTING... 3) After execution
63-02 BLACK LEVEL
*** OK
3) In case of an error
63-02 BLACK LEVEL
*** ERR
12 Light quantity stable wait [Function]
time setting (LT.STABLE Used to set the wait time before entering the light quantity level stable evaluation process in the
TIME) light quantity stable process of white balance. (Note: The light quantity stable level in the previ-
ous light quantity stable state is used as the target. When the light quantity level reaches the
target during the wait time, the set time of this test command is ignored and the operation
enters the stable evaluation process.)
When this test command is executed, the currently set value is displayed.
Enter the adjustment value with [10KEY] and press [START] key. The entered value is stored
and the machine goes into the sub code entry standby mode.
Setting range: 0 99 (Complying with the light quantity stable wait time of 0 99sec.)
Default: 15 (15sec)
[Operation]
The operation is similar to test command 9-04.

AR-208S/208D TEST COMMAND, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 30

Main Sub
Contents Details of function/operation
code code
63 13 Light quantity stable width [Function]
setting (LT.STABLE RNG.) When the difference between the maximum and the minimum values of the light quantity level
sampled for 3.2sec in the cycle of 100msec in the white balance light quantity stable process is
within the range set with this test command, it is judged as the light quantity is stable. (Note:
The magnification ratio of the AFE gain setting is automatically reflected on the stable width.)
When this test command is executed, the currently set value is displayed.
Enter the adjustment value with [10KEY] and press [START] key. The entered value is stored
and the machine goes into the sub code entry standby mode.
Setting range: 1 99 (Light quantity stable width: Complying with 1 99 in 4095 gradations.)
Default: 16
[Operation]
The operation is similar to test command 9-04.
64 01 Self print (1by2 mode) [Function]
(SELF PRT.) The status of the optical section is ignored and printing of one page is made. Also when the
print command is received from the host, printing is made.
When this test command is executed, warm-up is performed and the ready lamp is lighted.
(Since, however, the scanner is disabled, initializing is not made.)
Enter the code number and press [ENTER/START] key to start paper feed from the selected
cassette and print in the selected pattern.

Code number Pattern Display item

0 1by2 1 BY 2
1 Grid pattern CHECK
2 White paper WHITE
3 Black background BLACK
For 4 99, flip.

[Operation]
The operation is similar to test command 21-01.
66 01 FAX soft SW setting [Function]
(Executable only when the Use to check the FAX soft SW setting.
FAX is installed.) Every time when the key is pressed, the bit on the first line is switched 0 and 1.
[Operation]
1) Initial display 3) Select 1
ENTER FAX SOFT SW. # No.### xxxxxxxx
(3 DIGITS) SW.___ USE # KEY 12345678
[CLEAR] key: FAX control is terminated. 4) Change with 1-8 of [10KEY] and the
press [ENTER] key.
2) Enter a 3-digit value of soft SW No. (To
enter the fourth digit, shift to the left.), No.### xxxxxxxx
and the press [ENTER] key. STORED? 1:YES 2:NO
No.### xxxxxxxx "xxxxxxxx" is the set content.
CHANGE? 1:YES 2:NO Select 2: Returns to the soft SW No. entry
"xxxxxxxx" is the set content. display.
Select 2: Returns to the soft SW No. entry 5) Select 1
display. STORED

After 2sec, returns to "1) Initial display".

02 FAX soft SW initializing [Function]
(excluding the adjustment Use to initializing FAX soft SW.
values) (Executable only [Operation]
when the FAX is installed.)
1) Initial display
INITIALIZED

After 2sec, FAX control is terminated.

AR-208S/208D TEST COMMAND, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 31

Main Sub
Contents Details of function/operation
code code
66 03 FAX PWB memory check [Function]
(Executable only when the Use to check the FAX PWB memory.
FAX is installed.)
[Operation]
1) Initial display
SELECT CHECK MEMORY
PRESS ,

2) [/] or after 2sec

Every time when [] key is pressed, the second line is changed in the sequence of No. 1
2 3 1.
When [] key is pressed, the sequence is reversed.
SELECT MEMORY (1-3) SELECT MEMORY (1-3) SELECT MEMORY (1-3)
1:DRAM 2:SRAM 3:FLASH
[CLEAR] key: FAX control is terminated.

3) [ENTER] key
CHECKING MEMORY

4) After completion of check

When the result is OK In case of address bus In case of data bus check
check error error
MEMORY CHECK RESULT MEMORY CHECK RESULT MEMORY CHECK RESULT
OK XXXXXXXX A-BUS NG XXXXXXXX D-BUS NG
In case of sum check error In case of data check error In case of erase check error
MEMORY CHECK RESULT MEMORY CHECK RESULT MEMORY CHECK RESULT
XXXXXXXX SUM NG XXXXXXXX DATA NG XXXXXXXX ERASE NG
[CLEAR] key: Returns to "1) Initial display".
04 Signal send mode (Max. [Function]
value) (Executable only Use to set the signal send mode (Max. value).
when the FAX is installed.) Facsimile test command design specifications.
1 NO SIGNAL 13 7200bps(V34) 25 2400bps(V27ter)
2 33600bps(V34) 14 4800bps(V34) 26 300bps(FLAG)
3 31200bps(V34) 15 2400bps(V34) 27 2100Hz(CED)
4 28800bps(V34) 16 14400bps(V33) 28 1100Hz(CNG)
5 26400bps(V34) 17 12000bps(V33) 29 300bps(V21)
6 24000bps(V34) 18 14400bps(V17) 30 2100Hz(ANSam)
7 21600bps(V34) 19 12000bps(V17) 31 DUMMY RING
8 19200bps(V34) 20 9600bps(V17) 32 NO VOICE ANSWER
9 16800bps(V34) 21 7200bps(V17) 33 NO RING BACK TONE
10 14400bps(V34) 22 9600bps(V29) 34 LINE OFF HOOK
11 12000bps(V34) 23 7200bps(V29) 35 LINE ON HOOK
12 9600bps(V34) 24 4800bps(V27ter)

[Operation]
1) Initial display
SELECT OUTPUT SIGNAL
(2 DIGITS) No.___

2) 2-digit (1-35) with [10KEY] / [/] / 2sec after

Pressing [] key or [] key reverses the sequence.
No. (1-35) ..... No. (1-35)
1:NO SIGNAL 35:LINE ON HOOK
[CLEAR] key: FAX control is terminated.

3) [ENTER] key
Send after setting
OUTPUTING SIGNAL MAX
PRESS CLEAR TO STOP
[CLEAR] key: Returns to "1) Initial display".

AR-208S/208D TEST COMMAND, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 32

Main Sub
Contents Details of function/operation
code code
66 05 Signal send mode (Soft SW [Function]
set value) (Executable only Use to set the signal send mode (Soft SW set value).
when the FAX is installed.) Facsimile test command design specifications.
1 NO SIGNAL 13 7200bps(V34) 25 2400bps(V27ter)
2 33600bps(V34) 14 4800bps(V34) 26 300bps(FLAG)
3 31200bps(V34) 15 2400bps(V34) 27 2100Hz(CED)
4 28800bps(V34) 16 14400bps(V33) 28 1100Hz(CNG)
5 26400bps(V34) 17 12000bps(V33) 29 300bps(V21)
6 24000bps(V34) 18 14400bps(V17) 30 2100Hz(ANSam)
7 21600bps(V34) 19 12000bps(V17) 31 DUMMY RING
8 19200bps(V34) 20 9600bps(V17) 32 NO VOICE ANSWER
9 16800bps(V34) 21 7200bps(V17) 33 NO RING BACK TONE
10 14400bps(V34) 22 9600bps(V29) 34 LINE OFF HOOK
11 12000bps(V34) 23 7200bps(V29) 35 LINE ON HOOK
12 9600bps(V34) 24 4800bps(V27ter)

07 Image memory content print
(Executable only when the
FAX is installed.)
[Operation]
1) Initial display
SELECT OUTPUT SIGNAL
(2 DIGITS) No.___
2) 2-digit (1-35) with [10KEY] / [/] / 2sec after
Pressing [] key or [] key reverses the sequence.
No. (1-35) ..... No. (1-35)
1:NO SIGNAL 35:LINE ON HOOK
[CLEAR] key: FAX control is terminated.
3) [ENTER] key
Send after setting
OUTPUTING SIGNAL SSW
PRESS CLEAR TO STOP
[CLEAR] key: Returns to "1) Initial display".
[Function]
Use to print the image memory content.
[Operation]
When print is allowed When there is no print data When print is inhibited
PRINT STORED NO DATA CAN NOT PRINT

10 Image memory content clear
(Executable only when the
FAX is installed.)
After completion of printing, After 2 sec, FAX control is After 2 sec, FAX control is
FAX control is terminated. terminated. terminated.
[Function]
Use to clear the image memory content.
[Operation]
When there are some print data When there are no print data
CLEAR IMAGE MEMORY CLEAR IMAGE MEMORY

After completion of memory clear, the buzzer After completion of memory clear
sounds. CLEARED
CLEARED
PLEASE POWER OFF
After 2sec, FAX control is terminated.
Remains unchanged until the power is turned
off.

AR-208S/208D TEST COMMAND, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 33

Main Sub
Contents Details of function/operation
code code
66 11 300bps signal send (Max. [Function]
value) (Executable only Use to set the 300bps signal send (Max. value).
when the FAX is installed.) 1: NO SIGNAL
2: 11111
3: 11110
4: 00000
5: 010101
6: 00001
[Operation]
1) Initial display
SELECT SIGNAL
PRESS ,
2) [/] or after 2sec
Every time when [] key is pressed, the second line is changed in the sequence of No. 1
2 3 4 5 6 1.
When [] key is pressed, the sequence is reversed.
SELECT SIGNAL (1-6) ..... SELECT SIGNAL (1-6)
1:NO SIGNAL 6:00001
[CLEAR] key: FAX control is terminated.
3) [ENTER] key
OUTPUTING SIGNAL MAX
PRESS CLEAR TO STOP
[CLEAR] key: Returns to "1) Initial display".
12 300bps signal send (Soft [Function]
SW set value) (Executable Use to set the 300bps signal send (Soft SW set value).
only when the FAX is 1: NO SIGNAL
installed.)
2: 11111
3: 11110
4: 00000
5: 010101
6: 00001
[Operation]
1) Initial display
SELECT SIGNAL
PRESS ,
2) [/] or after 2sec
Every time when [] key is pressed, the second line is changed in the sequence of No. 1
2 3 4 5 6 1.
When [] key is pressed, the sequence is reversed.
SELECT SIGNAL (1-6) ..... SELECT SIGNAL (1-6)
1:NO SIGNAL 6:00001
[CLEAR] key: FAX control is terminated.
3) [ENTER] key
OUTPUTING SIGNAL SSW
PRESS CLEAR TO STOP
[CLEAR] key: Returns to "1) Initial display".

AR-208S/208D TEST COMMAND, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 34

Main Sub
Contents Details of function/operation
code code
66 13 Dial test (Executable only [Function]
when the FAX is installed.) Use to the dial test.
[Operation]
Dial test (PULSE) Dial test (DTMF)
1) Initial display 1) Initial display
SELECT SIGNAL SELECT SIGNAL
1:PULSE 2:DTMF 1:PULSE 2:DTMF
[CLEAR] key: FAX control is termi- [CLEAR] key: FAX control is terminated.
nated. 2) Select 2
2) Select 1 SELECT HIGH LEVEL
INPUT MAKE TIME 1:DEFAULT 2:SOFT SW.
(0-15) __ Select 2
3) Enter the make time in 2 digits. INPUT VALUE

INPUT DIAL # (0-15) __
XXXX
3) Select 1
XXXX: Default
SELECT LOW LEVEL
After deleting with [CLEAR] key, 1:DEFAULT 2:SOFT SW.
input can be made.
Select 2
4) [ENTER] key
INPUT VALUE
SEND yyPPS xxms
(0-15) __
1:YES 2:NO
4) Select 1
"yy" is the selected pulse 10 or 20.
INPUT DIAL #
"xx" is the input value.
XXXX
Select 2: Returns to 2) display.
XXXX: Default
5) Select 1
After deleting with [CLEAR] key, input can be
Switched to 10/20PPS set with
made.
pulse selection inside.
4) [ENTER] key
6) After setting
H:xx L:yy
SENDING yyPPS xxms
1:YES 2:NO
"xx" indicates HI, and "yy" indicates Low Soft SW.
7) After completion of sending
Select 2: Returns to 4) display.
TERMINATE ?
5) Select 1
1:YES 2:NO
HI/LO is selected with the signal level inside.
Select 2: Returns to 4) display.
6) After setting the signal send level
8) Select 1
SENDING DTMF
TERMINATED

7) After completion of sending

After 2sec, returns to "1) Initial display".
TERMINATE ?
1:YES 2:NO
Select 2: Returns to 4) display.
8) Select 1
TERMINATED

After 2sec, returns to "1) Initial display".

17 DTMF signal send (Max.
value) (Executable only
when the FAX is installed.)
[Function]
Use to set the DTMF signal send (Max. value).
[Operation]
1) Initial display 3) Communication is started after setting the
INPUT DIAL # signal send level.
SENDING SIGNAL MAX
[CLEAR] key: FAX control is terminated. PRESS CLEAR TO STOP
2) [10KEY] input [CLEAR] key: Returns to "1) Initial display".

The content selected with signal send

level selection is set inside.

AR-208S/208D TEST COMMAND, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 35

Main Sub
Contents
code code
66 18 DTMF signal send (Soft SW
set value) (Executable only
when the FAX is installed.)
21 FAX information print
(Executable only when the
FAX is installed.)
24 FAST SRAM clear
(Executable only when the
FAX is installed.)
30 TEL/LIU status change
check (Executable only
when the FAX is installed.)
AR-208S/208D TEST COMMAND, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 36
Details of function/operation
[Function]
Use to set the DTMF signal send (Soft SW set value).
[Operation]
1) Initial display 3) Communication is started after setting the
INPUT DIAL # signal send level.
SENDING SIGNAL SSW
[CLEAR] key: FAX control is terminated. PRESS CLEAR TO STOP
2) [10KEY] input [CLEAR] key: Returns to "1) Initial display".
The content selected with signal send
level selection is set inside.
[Function]
Use to print the FAX information.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
SELECT REPORT (1-3)
PRESS ,
2) [/] or after 2sec
Every time when [] key is pressed, the second line is changed in the sequence of 1 2
3 1.
When [] key is pressed, the sequence is reversed.
SELECT REPORT (1-3) SELECT REPORT (1-3) SELECT REPORT (1-3)
1:USER SW. LIST 2:SOFT SW. LIST 3:PROTOCOL
[CLEAR] key: FAX control is terminated.
3) [ENTER] key
When print is allowed When print is inhibited
PRINT STORED CAN NOT PRINT
After completion of printing, After 2sec, FAX control is
FAX control is terminated. terminated.
[Function]
Use to clear the FAST SRAM.
[Operation]
1) Initial display 2) After completion of clearing
CLEAR FAST SRAM CLEARED
After 2sec, FAX control is terminated.
[Function]
Use to check the TEL/LIU status change.
[Operation]
1) Initial display
HS2 :xxx HS1 :xxx
RHS :xxx EXHS:xxx
The display is switched every 2sec.
CHECKING
PRESS CLEAR TO STOP
[CLEAR] key: FAX control is terminated.
Main Sub
Contents Details of function/operation
code code
66 33 Signal detection check [Function]
(Executable only when the Use to check the signal detection.
FAX is installed.)
[Operation]
1) Initial display
CHECKING NONE
PRESS CLEAR TO STOP
When a signal is detected, the display is changed from NONE to the following.
CI/CNG/CED/BT/DT/Flag/SDT/DTMF
[CLEAR] key: FAX control is terminated.
34 Communication time [Function]
measurement (Executable Use to measurement the communication time.
only when the FAX is
[Operation]
installed.)
1) Initial display
COMM. TIME
xx:xx:xx:xxx msec
"xx:xx:xx:xxx" indicates o'clock, minute, second, millisecond.
[CLEAR] key: FAX control is terminated.
37 Speaker sound volume [Function]
setting (Executable only Use to set the speaker sound volume.
when the FAX is installed.) 1: NO SOUND
2: LOW
3: MID
4: HIGH
[Operation]
1) Initial display
SELECT SPEEKER VOL.
PRESS ,
2) [/] or after 2sec
Every time when [] key is pressed, the second line is changed in the sequence of 1 2
3 4 1.
When [] key is pressed, the sequence is reversed.
SELECT (1-4) SELECT (1-4) .....
1:NO SOUND 2:LOW
[CLEAR] key: FAX control is terminated.
3) [ENTER] key
STORED
xxx
xxx: Set content
After 2sec, FAX control is terminated.

AR-208S/208D TEST COMMAND, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 37

Main Sub
Contents Details of function/operation
code code
66 38 Time setting/check [Function]
(Executable only when the Use to check the time setting.
FAX is installed.)
[Operation]
1) Initial display
SELECT TO SET
1:DATE 2:TIME
[CLEAR] key: FAX control is terminated.

2) Select 1 2) Select 2
xxxx.xx.xx(xxx) xx:xx
CHANGE? 1:YES 2:NO CHANGE? 1:YES 2:NO
"xxxx.xx.xx(xxx)" is the current value. (No "xx:xx" is the current value.
revision of display)
3) Select 1 3) Select 1
INPUT YEAR INPUT HOUR
(4 DIGITS)____.__.__ (0-24) __:__
Select 2: Returns to "1) Initial display". Select 2: Returns to "1) Initial display".
4) Enter the year in 4 digits. 4) Enter o'clock in 2 digits.
INPUT MONTH INPUT MINUTE
(1-12) 1998.__.__ (00-59) 01:__
5) Enter the month in 2 digits. 5) Enter minute in 2 digits.
INPUT DAY xx:xx
(1-31) 1998.01.__ STORED? 1:YES 2:NO
6) Enter the day in 2 digits. "xx:xx" is the current value.
xxxx.xx.xx(xxx) Select 2: Returns to "1) Initial display".
STORED? 1:YES 2:NO 6) Select 1
"xxxx.xx.xx(xxx) is the entered value. STORED
Select 2: Returns to "1) Initial display".
7) Select 1 After 2sec, returns to "1) Initial display".
STORED

After 2sec, returns to "1) Initial display".

AR-208S/208D TEST COMMAND, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 38

5. Trouble codes
A. Trouble codes list Main Sub
Details of trouble
Main Sub code code
Details of trouble
code code E7 10 Content Shading trouble (Black correction)
E7 01 Duplex model memory setup error, memory not- Detail The CCD black scan level is abnormal when
detected error the shading.
02 LSU trouble Cause Improper connection of the CCD unit flat
10 Shading trouble (Black correction) cable
11 Shading trouble (White correction) CCD unit abnormality
16 Abnormal laser output MCU PWB abnormality
F2 02 Toner supply abnormality Check Check connection of the CCD unit flat cable.
and Check the CCD unit.
04 Improper cartridge (Destination error, life cycle error)
remedy
F5 02 Copy lamp lighting abnormality
11 Content Shading trouble (White correction)
H2 00 Thermistor open
Detail The CCD white scan level is abnormal when
H3 00 Heat roller high temperature detection
the shading.
H4 00 Heat roller low temperature detection Cause Improper connection of the CCD unit flat
L1 00 Feeding is not completed within the specified time cable
after starting feeding. (The scan head locking switch Dirt on the mirror, the lens, and the reference
is locked) white plate
L3 00 Scanner return trouble Copy lamp lighting abnormality
L4 01 Main motor lock detection CCD unit abnormality
32 Exhaust fan motor lock detection trouble MCU PWB abnormality
L6 10 Polygon motor lock detection (When occurred in the RSPF scan position.)
U2 04 EEPROM read/write error (Serial communication Improper installation of the mirror unit
error) Check Clean the mirror, lens, and the reference
11 Counter check sum error (EEPROM) and white plate.
40 CRUM chip communication error remedy Check the light quantity and lighting status of
the copy lamp (TC 5-03).
B. Details of trouble codes Check the MCU PWB.
Main Sub 16 Content Abnormal laser output
Details of trouble
code code Detail When the laser output is stopped, HSYNC is
E7 01 Content Duplex model memory setup error, memory detected.
not-detected error Cause Laser abnormality
Detail The memory is not set properly or the MCU PWB abnormality.
memory capacity is not set to the duplex Check Check the laser emitting diode operation.
setup (6M). and Replace the MCU PWB.
Check Set TC 26-39 code number to 2. remedy
and F2 02 Content Toner supply abnormality
remedy Detail The maximum toner supply time is greatly
02 Content LSU trouble exceeded.
Detail The BD signal from the LSU cannot be Cause CRUM chip trouble
detected in a certain cycle. (Always OFF or Improper developing unit
always ON)
Check Replace the CRUM chip.
Cause LSU connector or LSU harness defect or and Replace the developing unit.
disconnection remedy
Polygon motor rotation abnormality 04 Content Improper cartridge (Destination error, life
Laser beams are not generated. cycle error)
MCU PWB abnormality. Detail The destination of the main unit differs from
Check Check connection of the LSU connector. that of the CRUM.
and Execute TC 61-03 to check the LSU When the life cycle information is other than
remedy operations. Not Used (FFh).
Check that the polygon motor rotates Cause CRUM chip trouble
normally. Improper developing unit
Check that the laser emitting diode Check Replace the CRUM chip.
generates laser beams. and Replace the developing unit.
Replace the LSU unit. remedy
Replace the MCU PWB.

AR-208S/208D TEST COMMAND, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 39

Main Sub
Details of trouble
code code
F5 02 Content Copy lamp lighting abnormality
Detail The copy lamp does not turn on.
Cause Copy lamp abnormality
Copy lamp harness abnormality
CCD PWB harness abnormality.
Check Use TC 5-03 to check the copy lamp
and operations.
remedy When the copy lamp lights up.
Check the harness and the connector
between the CCD unit and the MCU PWB.
When the copy lamp does not light up.
Check the harness and the connector
between the copy lamp unit and the MCU
PWB.
Replace the copy lamp unit.
Replace the MCU PWB.
H2 00 Content Thermistor open
Detail The thermistor is open.
The fusing unit is not installed.
Cause Thermistor abnormality
Control PWB abnormality
Fusing section connector disconnection
The fusing unit is not installed.
Check Check the harness and the connector
and between the thermistor and the PWB.
remedy Use TC 14 to clear the self diagnostic
display.
H3 00 Content Heat roller high temperature detection
Detail The fusing temperature exceeds 240C.
Cause Thermistor abnormality
Control PWB abnormality
Fusing section connector disconnection.
Check Use TC 5-02 to check the heater lamp
and blinking operation.
remedy When the lamp blinks normally.
Check the thermistor and its harness.
Check the thermistor input circuit on the
control PWB.
When the lamp keeps ON.
Check the power PWB and the lamp control
circuit on the MCU PWB.
Use TC 14 to clear the self diagnostic
display.
AR-208S/208D TEST COMMAND, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 40
Main Sub
Details of trouble
code code
H4 00 Content Heat roller low temperature detection
Detail 1) When the target temperature (165C) is
not reached in 55 sec after starting
warming-up.
2) When the temperature below 100C is
detected for 300ms under the ready print
state.
"Starting warming-up" means not only that
in power supply but also reset that in reset
from shut-off and in side door close. (The
timing of generating H4 is not limited to
that in power supply.)
Cause Thermistor abnormality
Heater lamp abnormality
Thermostat abnormality
Control PWB abnormality
Check Use TC 5-02 to check the heater lamp
and blinking operation.
remedy When the lamp blinks normally.
Check the thermistor and its harness.
Check the thermistor input circuit on the
control PWB.
When the lamp does not light up.
Check for disconnection of the heater lamp
and the thermostat. Check the interlock
switch.
Check the power PWB and the lamp control
circuit on the MCU PWB.
Use TC 14 to clear the self diagnostic
display.
L1 00 Content Feeding is not completed within the specified
time after starting feeding. (The scan head
locking switch is locked)
Detail Though the mirror base is shifted by about
30mm, the MHPS is not turned OFF.
Cause The scan head is locked by the lock switch.
Mirror unit abnormality
The scanner wire is disconnected.
The origin detection sensor abnormality
Mirror motor harness abnormality
Check Check to confirm that the scan head lock
and switch is released.
remedy Use TC 1-01 to check the mirror
reciprocating operations.
When the mirror does not feed.
Check for disconnection of the scanner wire.
Check the harness and the connector
between the mirror motor and the MCU
PWB.
Replace the mirror unit.
Replace the MCU PWB.
When the mirror does feed.
Use TC 1-02 to check the mirror home
position sensor.
Main Sub
Details of trouble
code code
L3 00 Content Scanner return trouble
Detail When the mirror base is returned for the
specified time (6 sec) in mirror initializing
after turning on the power, the mirror home
position sensor (MHPS) does not turn ON.
Or when the mirror base is returned for the
specified time (about 6 sec) after start of
copy return, the mirror home position sensor
(MHPS) does not turn ON.
Cause Mirror unit abnormality
Scanner wire disconnection
Origin detection sensor abnormality
Mirror motor harness abnormality
Check Use TC 1-01 to check the mirror
and reciprocating operations.
remedy When the mirror does not return.
Check for disconnection of the scanner wire.
Check the harness and the connector
between the mirror motor and the MCU
PWB.
Replace the mirror unit.
Replace the MCU PWB.
When the mirror does feed.
Use TC 1-02 to check the mirror home
position sensor.
L4 01 Content Main motor lock detection
Detail When the main motor encoder pulse is not
detected for 1000 msec.
Cause Main motor unit abnormality
Improper connection or disconnection the
main motor and the harness.
MCU PWB abnormality
Check Use TC 25-01 to check the main motor
and operations.
remedy Check connection of the main motor
harness/connector.
Replace the main motor.
Replace the MCU PWB.
32 Content Exhaust fan motor lock detection trouble
Detail The error detection is started after 2 sec
from starting rotation of the exhaust fan
motor.
1) The continuous rotation state of 250ms is
not detected for 1 sec after starting
detection.
2) When the lock sensor (in the exhaust fan)
detects the HIGH level (unstable) after
detection the lock state (stable state).
Cause Exhaust fan motor connector connection
trouble
Exhaust fan motor trouble
MCU PWB trouble
Check Exhaust fan motor connector connection
and check
remedy Exhaust fan motor replacement
Replace the MCU PWB.
AR-208S/208D TEST COMMAND, TROUBLE CODES 10 - 41
Main Sub
Details of trouble
code code
L6 10 Content Polygon motor lock detection
Detail The lock signal (specified rpm signal) does
not return within a certain time (about 20
sec) from starting the polygon motor
rotation.
Cause Polygon motor unit abnormality
Improper connection or disconnection of the
polygon motor and the harness.
MCU PWB abnormality
Check Use TC 61-01 to check the polygon motor
and operations.
remedy Check connection of the polygon motor
harness/connector.
Replace the polygon motor.
Replace the MCU PWB.
U2 04 Content EEPROM read/write error (Serial
communication error)
Detail EEPROM access process error
Cause EEPROM abnormality
Check Check that the EEPROM is properly set.
and Cancel by turning OFF/ON the power.
remedy Replace the MCU PWB.
11 Content Counter check sum error (EEPROM)
Detail Check sum error of the counter area in the
EEPROM
Cause EEPROM abnormality
Check Check that the EEPROM is properly set.
and Use TC 16 to cancel the trouble.
remedy Replace the MCU PWB.
40 Content CRUM chip communication error
Detail An error occurs in MCU-CRUM chip
communication.
Cause CRUM chip trouble
Defective contact of developing unit
MCU PWB trouble
Check Replace the CRUM chip.
and Check installation of the developing unit.
remedy Cancel by turning OFF/ON the power.
Replace the MCU PWB.
[11] MAINTENANCE
1. Maintenance table
: Check (Clean, adjust, or replace when required.) : Clean : Replace : Adjust : Lubricate
Section Parts 25K 50K 75K 100K 125K Remark
Developing Developer
DV blade
DV side seal (F/R)
DV doctor White streaks are made on the
image.
Process peripheral Drum

2. Maintenance display system

Toner Life 8K
Remaining quantity NEAR EMPTY EMPTY
About 12.5%
LED ON Flash
Machine Operation allowed Stop
Developer Life 25K
LED ON at 25K of the developer count.
Machine Selection is available between Not Stop and Stop by Service Simulation (SIM 26-37) Setup.
(If Stop is selected, the LED will flash and stop at 25K.)
Default: Not Stop
Clear: SIM 24-06
Maintenance LED Selection is available among 25K, 13K, 9K, 6K, 3K, and free (no lighting) with SIM 21-1.
Default: 25K
Clear: SIM 20-1
Machine Not stop.
Note: When developer is replaced, be sure to execute simulation No. 24-06 to reset the counter.

3. Remaining toner indication

TONER FULL
Display for users
Remaining toner indication

100%

75% Lo

50%

25% LOW LEVEL

100-76% 75-51% 50-26% 25-13% 12.5% or less

The remaining toner indication is based on the number of revolutions of the toner motor.
The toner END indication appears when the END is detected by the toner sensor.
The remaining toner indication is a rough indication of the remaining toner quantity.

AR-208S/208D MAINTENANCE 11 - 1
[12] USER PROGRAM
The user settings consist of the following items.

1. User programs
A. Copy mode
Setting codes
Program
Program name (factory default setting Explanation
number
appears in bold)
1 AUTO CLEAR 1: 10 SEC. Auto clear time automatically returns the copy settings to the initial settings
2: 30 SEC. if no keys are pressed for a preset period of time following the end of a copy
3: 60 SEC. job.
4: 90 SEC. This program is used to select the period of time. Auto clear time can also
5: 120 SEC. be disabled.
6: OFF
2 PREHEAT MODE 1: 30 SEC. This function automatically switches the machine to a low power
2: 1 MIN. consumption state if the set duration of time elapses without the machine
3: 5 MIN. being used when the power is on. The power save indicator lights up,
4: 30 MIN. however, the keys on the operation panel can be used. Normal operation
5: 60 MIN. automatically resumes when a key on the operation panel is pressed, an
6: 120 MIN. original is placed, a print job is received.
7: 240 MIN.
3 AUTO SHUT-OFF 1: ON Use this setting to enable or disable auto power shut-off mode.
2: OFF
4 AUTO SHUT-OFF 1: 5 MIN. This function automatically switches the machine to a state that consumes
TIME 2: 30 MIN. even less power than preheat mode if the set duration of time elapses
3: 60 MIN. without the machine being used when the power is on. All lights except the
4: 120 MIN. power save indicator go off. To resume normal operation, press the
5: 240 MIN. [START] key. Normal operation also resumes automatically when a print job
is received or scanning is begun from a computer. While in auto power
shut-off mode, no keys (except the [START] key) can be used.
7 LAYOUT IN 2IN1 1: PATTERN 1 Use this setting to select the layout pattern when two original pages are
2: PATTERN 2 copied onto a single sheet of paper.
8 OFFSET 1: ON When enabled, this function offsets the position of each set of copies in the
FUNCTION 2: OFF output tray in copy mode, and each print job in printer mode.
9 ROTATE ORIG. 1: ON When two-sided copying is performed, this function rotates the image on
IMAGE 2: OFF the back of the original. This is convenient when binding the copies at the
(AR-208D only) top (tablet binding).
10 AE/TEXT 1: 300dpi This setting is used to change the copy resolution in AUTO and TEXT
RESOLUTION 2: 600dpi mode from 600 x 300 dpi to 600 x 600 dpi (high-quality mode). Scanning is
slower when high-quality mode is used.
11 2-SIDED COPY 1: HI-SPEED If the memory fills up when two-sided copying is performed, "NORMAL"
MODE 2: NORMAL can be selected to make copying possible. However, "NORMAL" results in
(AR-208D only) a slower copying speed. Normally "HI-SPEED" is selected to enable fast
two-sided copying.
12 MARGIN WIDTH 1: 1/4" Use this setting to set the margin width.
2: 1/2"
3: 3/4"
4: 1"
13 MEM. FOR 1: 30% Use this to change the proportion of machine memory used for printer
PRINTER 2: 40% mode.
3: 50%
4: 60%
5: 70%
14 AUTO KEY REPEAT 1: ON Use this setting to select whether or not holding down a key causes
2: OFF repeated input of the key. For keys that normally cause a set value to
decrease or increase when held down (for example, the [<] key (v) or [>]
key (^)), this program can be used to have the set value not change when
the key is held down.
15 KEY PRESS TIME 1: NORMAL Use this setting to select how long a key must be pressed for the input to be
2: 0.5 SEC. accepted. By selecting a longer time, you can prevent settings from being
3: 1.0 SEC. changed by the accidental pressing of a key.
4: 1.5 SEC.
5: 2.0 SEC.
16 KEY TOUCH 1: LOW This sets the volume of beep signals.
SOUND 2: HIGH
3: OFF

AR-208S/208D USER PROGRAM 12 - 1

 Setting codes
Program
Program name (factory default setting Explanation
number
appears in bold)
17 SOUND AT 1: ON Use this to sound a beep when a base setting is selected.
DEFAULT 2: OFF
18 TONER SAVE 1: ON This mode reduces toner usage by about 10% when copying. Toner save
MODE 2: OFF mode is effective when the exposure mode is AUTO or TEXT.
19 AE LEVEL ADJUST 1: SPF/RSPF This is used to adjust the exposure level.
(Adjustment to 5 levels The automatic exposure level can be adjusted separately for the document
is possible.) glass and the RSPF.
2: DOCUMENT GLASS For the procedure for adjusting the exposure and guidelines for numeric
(Adjustment to 5 levels values. The factory default setting for the exposure level is center.
is possible.)
20 LANGUAGE 1: AMERICAN ENGLISH This is used to set the language used in the display.
2: ENGLISH
3: FRENCH
4: SPANISH
:
:
21 RESET FACTORY 1: Yes This is used to return all settings to the factory default settings.
2: No
22 SORT AUTO 1: ON Use this setting to enable or disable sort auto select mode.
SELECT 2: OFF
24 CHECK RSPF 1: ON You can set the operation that takes place if the [START] key is pressed
OPEN 2: OFF when the RSPF is not completely closed. (Valid only when the multi-bypass
paper feed is used.)
25 VALID COPY 1: 8.5x11 Set the allowed paper sizes for copying from the bypass tray. When
WIDTH 2: 5.5x8.5 "5.5x8.5" is selected, a copy of a letter size original will only be printed up
to invoice size.
28 LSU SETTING 1: ON Select whether copying is only allowed when the polygon motor is rotating,
2: OFF or also when the polygon motor is stopped.
29 PAPER TYPE 1: PLAIN PAPER Set the temperature of the fusing unit when the bypass tray is used.
2: HEAVY PAPER Normally "PLAIN PAPER" should be selected.
30 DISPLAY 1: LIGHTER Set the contrast of the display.
CONTRAST 2: LIGHT
3: NORMAL
4: DARK
5: DARKER

B. Print mode
Setting codes
Program
Program name (factory default setting Explanation
number
appears in bold)
1 FORCED OUTPUT 1: ON When this function is enabled, printing in printer mode will automatically
2: OFF continue using a different size of paper if the specified size of paper runs out
in all trays. This feature does not function in copy mode.
2 USB 2.0 MODE 1: FULL-SPEED This sets the USB 2.0 data transfer speed. To obtain the fastest speed when
SWITCH *1 2: HI-SPEED using the USB 2.0 connector, first verify that your computer meets the
system requirements (operating system and driver), and then use this
program to change the USB 2.0 mode to "Hi-Speed". Note that the setting
should not be changed while running a TWAIN driver.
3 AUTO TRAY 1: ON If the paper runs out during printing and there is paper of the same size in
SWITCH*2 2: OFF another tray, this function automatically switches to that tray (excluding the
bypass tray). The function can be disabled.
*1: The scanning speed increases when the USB 2.0 mode is set to "HI-SPEED", however, the printing speed does not increase considerably.
*2: When the 250-sheet paper feed unit is installed.

AR-208S/208D USER PROGRAM 12 - 2

2. Selecting a setting for a user program Audible signals (key entry beep, invalid key beep, base
setting beep)
1) Press the [MENU] key and then press the [ENTER] key. The machine sounds three different types of beep signals: a key
In printer mode, the user programs are accessed by simply entry beep that sounds when a valid key is pressed, an invalid
pressing the [MENU] key. key beep that sounds when an invalid key is pressed, and a base
setting beep that sounds when a setting is the same as the base
MAIN MENU
1:USER PROGRAM
setting (base settings are explained below). The base setting
beep is initially disabled. If you wish to enable the base setting
beep, see "SOUND AT DEFAULT". If you wish to change the vol-
ume of the beep signals or disable them, see "KEY TOUCH
SOUND".
The beep patterns of each type of beep signal are as follows:
Key entry beep: One beep Invalid key beep: Two beeps
2) Press the [<] key [v] or [>] key [^] to select the item that you Base setting beep: Three beeps
wish to configure in the USER PROGRAM items, and then Base settings
press the [ENTER] key.
The base settings are preset standard selections for each copy
See "1. User programs" for the program name and program setting. The base settings are as follows:
code.
Copy ratio: 100% Paper feed location:
You can also select a program by directly entering the pro- Light and Dark level: Center Tray 1 (Upper paper tray)
gram number with the numeric keys. AUTO/TEXT/PHOTO: AUTO
USER PROGRAM
2:PREHEAT MODE

3) Press the [<] key [v] or [>] key [^] to change the setting of the
selected item.
See "1. User programs" for the program code.

PREHEAT MODE
1:1 MIN

NOTE:
If you mistakenly select the wrong item, press the [CLEAR] key
[C] and repeat the procedure from step 2).
To cancel a setting for a user program, press the [MENU] key.
4) Press the [ENTER] key.
Your selection appears briefly and then the previous screen
appears.
NOTE:
When "AE LEVEL ADJUST" is selected in the user programs and
the [ENTER] key is pressed, the automatic exposure adjustment
screen appears. Adjust the exposure and press the [ENTER] key.

AR-208S/208D USER PROGRAM 12 - 3

 Carriage Unit

12V 12V Reg A5V 3.3V

RSPF/SPF Motor
AFE(HT86V26)
CCFL x 2
R
1. Block diagram

CCD C A M
G AD 8bits (MSB/LSB) HOME
(ILX558K) D G P
B 16bits POSITION
S C X SENSOR
Lamp Inverter FAX Model Only AR-FX13
A. Overall block diagram

5V for CCFL

CCD Driver Speaker

FAX Main PCBA

Mechanical Load

MCU-PWB MPFS,RRS,CPFS1
0 - 24V

(RSPF UNIT) SPUS,SRVC

FAX I/F
DC-DC Driver
3.3V 8Mb
NIC PCBA PWM 256Mbx2 or 16Mb
SDRAM
RJ45 (AL Model only) 1284 I/F 8Mbyte
[13] ELECTRICAL SECTION

(N/W SDRAM Flash ROM

MHPS D[7..0] AR-NB2A
connector) Ether Chip
RD 12MHz (AR Option)
RTL8019AS
CS
INT
Image BUS(PI-Bus) P-Bus
8 Sensor/SW
CPU Printer CLK 8 Image BUS(PO-Bus) ISP1583 Network Box Ethernet (Electorical detector/SW/Sensor)
FPGA 100Base-T
uPD703100 /ESPRD OA982
USB2.0
High-speed

CPU INTERRUPT
KRONOS ASIC System Reset SPPD
FlashROM SRAM 18.3856MHz 3.3V 18.3856MHz
(296pin)
1Mbit 256kbit UART CPU I/O
Reset IC NW PWB Interlock SW
Cassette detector X 2
SSCG Drum Initial detector
Scanner CLK (12MHz x4 48MHz) A[191] CPU PPD1
H8S/2321 POD
D[150] (19.6608MHz) MFD
OP-CLK PPD2
SRAM 1Mbit OP-LATCH OPE PWB
Flash ROM 16Mbit OP-DATA SPID
LED Driver LED SRJD
PSL SCOD
PSL LED
Duplex Model Only CPUCLK SELIN1,2,3
KEYIN 8bit
HC151
Duplex Motor
KEY Matrix
KEYSCAN1 - 3 FAX Model Only
Driver HC238
IO ASIC SSCG I2C Bus (3 to 8 decode) 8bit FAX OPE PWB AR-FX13
D[158] 8Kbyte
PSW
Shifter Motor START KEY Buzzer
KEY Matrix
Driver EEPROM

AR-208S/208D ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 - 1

CPU CLK (19.6608MHz) LCD
LCD E LED

/MMLD

MMCLK
(2 x 20)

/MMD
Fan Motor 24V 12V Driver Driver LCD RS
LCD R/W (TBD)

PMD
Driver

PMCLK
LCD DB7-4

PMRDY
EEPROM
(AR Model Only)
(CRUM)
2nd Cassette Main Motor Toner Motor Mirror Motor
LSU
POWER SUPPLY HVU
LASER
Mechanical load /POFF,HL,PR
CPFS2 FW TC, GRID, MC, BIAS
3.3V,5VEN,5V,12V,24V
Sensor/SW Polygon
PPD3, Motor
PD2, CED2

AC Code
2. Signal name list
Signal name Name Function/Operation Section
(ADCLK) AFE AFE control signal Scanner unit section
(AFE_DB0) AFE Image scan data Scanner unit section
(AFE_DB1) AFE Image scan data Scanner unit section
(AFE_DB2) AFE Image scan data Scanner unit section
(AFE_DB3) AFE Image scan data Scanner unit section
(AFE_DB4) AFE Image scan data Scanner unit section
(AFE_DB5) AFE Image scan data Scanner unit section
(AFE_DB6) AFE Image scan data Scanner unit section
(AFE_DB7) AFE Image scan data Scanner unit section
(AFE_SCK) AFE AFE control signal Scanner unit section
(AFE_SDI) AFE AFE serial data Scanner unit section
(AFE_SEN) AFE AFE control signal Scanner unit section
(BSAMP) AFE AFE control signal Scanner unit section
(VSAMP) AFE AFE control signal Scanner unit section
/BIAS HV bias signal HV bias drive Process section
/CPFS1 1st CS pickup solenoid Paper transport section
/CPFS2 2nd CS pickup solenoid 2nd cassette section
/DMT_0 DUP motor DUP motor phase control Duplex drive section
/DMT_1 DUP motor DUP motor phase control Duplex drive section
/DMT_2 DUP motor DUP motor phase control Duplex drive section
/DMT_3 DUP motor DUP motor phase control Duplex drive section
/FAX_RST FAX PWB reset signal FAX optional section
/GRIDL HV grid signal Main charger grid control Process section
/LDEN Laser Laser circuit control signal LSU
/MC HV MC signal Main charger control Process section
/MDM_IRQ FAX PWB interrupt FAX optional section
/MMCLK Main motor Clock signal to the polygon motor Main drive section
/MMD Main motor Polygon motor drive signal Main drive section
/MPFS Multi bypass solenoid Paper transport section
/PMD Polygon motor Polygon motor drive signal LSU
/POFF Low voltage power Output power control Power section
/PR Heater lamp Power relay control Power section
/RD Control signal MCU bus control signal FAX optional section
/RRS 1st transport solenoid Paper transport section
/RSV_SOL Reverse solenoid RSPF section
/SFTMT0 Shifter motor Shifter motor phase control Shifter motor section
/SFTMT1 Shifter motor Shifter motor phase control Shifter motor section
/SFTMT2 Shifter motor Shifter motor phase control Shifter motor section
/SFTMT3 Shifter motor Shifter motor phase control Shifter motor section
/SPUS Paper feed solenoid RSPF section
/SRVC Reverse clutch RSPF section
/SYNC Laser Horizontal sync signal from the LSU LSU
/TC HV TC signal Transfer charger grid control Process section
/VFMCNT Fan speed signal Fan rotation speed control Optical section
/VIDEO Laser Laser drive signal LSU
BZR Buzzer signal Buzzer Operation section
CCD-CP CCD CCD control signal Scanner unit section
CCD-RS CCD CCD control signal Scanner unit section
CCD-TG CCD CCD control signal Scanner unit section
CCD_PHI1 CCD CCD control signal Scanner unit section
CCD_PHI2 CCD CCD control signal Scanner unit section
CED1 Machine cassette detection Paper transport section
CED2 2nd CS cassette detection 2nd cassette section
DVSEL Developing tank detection Developing section
FANLK Fusing fan Fan lock detection signal Optical section
FW Low voltage power Zero cross detection Power section
HLOUT Heater lamp Heater lamp control Power section
KEYIN Key scan input Key detection control Operation section
KEYSC1 Key scan output Key scan output Operation section
KEYSC2 Key scan output Key scan output Operation section
KEYSC3 Key scan output Key scan output Operation section
LCDCON LCD control signal Signal for LCD Operation section
LCDDB4 LCD data signal Signal for LCD Operation section

AR-208S/208D ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 - 2

 Signal name Name Function/Operation Section
LCDDB5 LCD data signal Signal for LCD Operation section
LCDDB6 LCD data signal Signal for LCD Operation section
LCDDB7 LCD data signal Signal for LCD Operation section
LCDE LCD control signal Signal for LCD Operation section
LCDRS LCD control signal Signal for LCD Operation section
LEDPOD POD sensor power Paper exit section
LEDPPD1 PPD sensor power Paper transport section
LEDPPD2 PPD2 sensor power Fusing section
LEDSCOD SCOD sensor power RSPF section
LEDSPID SPID sensor power RSPF section
LEDSPPD SPPD sensor power RSPF section
LEDSRJD SRJD sensor power RSPF section
MCU_D0 Data signal MCU bus control signal FAX optional section
MCU_D1 Data signal MCU bus control signal FAX optional section
MCU_D2 Data signal MCU bus control signal FAX optional section
MCU_D3 Data signal MCU bus control signal FAX optional section
MCU_D4 Data signal MCU bus control signal FAX optional section
MCU_D5 Data signal MCU bus control signal FAX optional section
MCU_D6 Data signal MCU bus control signal FAX optional section
MCU_D7 Data signal MCU bus control signal FAX optional section
MCU_INT MCU interrupt MCU bus control signal FAX optional section
MCU_NCS Control signal MCU bus control signal FAX optional section
MHPS MHPS sensor Carriage HP detection Optical section
MMLD Main motor Polygon motor ON/OFF detection signal Main drive section
MODEM_IN FAX connection detection signal FAX optional section
OP-DATA LED driver control Operation section
OP-LATCH LED driver control Operation section
OP_CLK LED driver control Operation section
OUTA+ Scanner motor Scanner motor phase control Optical drive section
OUTA- Scanner motor Scanner motor phase control Optical drive section
OUTB+ Scanner motor Scanner motor phase control Optical drive section
OUTB- Scanner motor Scanner motor phase control Optical drive section
PB_ADDR0 Address signal Peripheral bus control signal FAX optional section
PB_ADDR1 Address signal Peripheral bus control signal FAX optional section
PB_ADDR2 Address signal Peripheral bus control signal FAX optional section
PB_ADDR3 Address signal Peripheral bus control signal FAX optional section
PB_ADDR4 Address signal Peripheral bus control signal FAX optional section
PB_ADDR5 Address signal Peripheral bus control signal FAX optional section
PB_ADDR6 Address signal Peripheral bus control signal FAX optional section
PB_ADDR7 Address signal Peripheral bus control signal FAX optional section
PB_DATA0 Data signal Peripheral bus control signal FAX optional section
PB_DATA1 Data signal Peripheral bus control signal FAX optional section
PB_DATA2 Data signal Peripheral bus control signal FAX optional section
PB_DATA3 Data signal Peripheral bus control signal FAX optional section
PB_DATA4 Data signal Peripheral bus control signal FAX optional section
PB_DATA5 Data signal Peripheral bus control signal FAX optional section
PB_DATA6 Data signal Peripheral bus control signal FAX optional section
PB_DATA7 Data signal Peripheral bus control signal FAX optional section
PB_NAE0 Control signal Peripheral bus control signal FAX optional section
PB_NCS1 Control signal Peripheral bus control signal FAX optional section
PB_NOE Control signal Peripheral bus control signal FAX optional section
PB_NWE Control signal Peripheral bus control signal FAX optional section
PD1 PD SW sensor 1st CS paper width sensor Paper transport section
PD2 PD2 SW sensor 2nd CS paper width detection 2nd cassette section
PMCLK_A Polygon motor Clock signal to the polygon motor LSU
PMRDY Polygon motor Polygon motor ON/OFF detection signal LSU
POD POD sensor Paper transport detection Paper exit section
PPD1 PPD sensor Paper transport detection Paper transport section
PPD2 PPD2 sensor Paper transport detection Fusing section
PPD3 PPD3 sensor 2nd CS paper transport detection 2nd cassette section
PSL Power save LED Operation section
PSW Start button control Operation section
RTH_IN Thermistor Fusing section thermistor temperature detection Fusing section
SCOD SCOD sensor RSPF cover open sensor RSPF section

AR-208S/208D ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 - 3

 Signal name Name Function/Operation Section
SELIN1 Select signal HC151 select signal Operation section
SELIN2 Select signal HC151 select signal Operation section
SELIN3 Select signal HC151 select signal Operation section
SHOLD Laser Laser APC signal LSU
SPID SPID sensor RSPF UN paper entry sensor RSPF section
SPMT_0 RSPF motor RSPF motor phase control RSPF section
SPMT_1 RSPF motor RSPF motor phase control RSPF section
SPMT_2 RSPF motor RSPF motor phase control RSPF section
SPMT_3 RSPF motor RSPF motor phase control RSPF section
SPPD SPPD sensor RSPF transport detection RSPF section
SRJD SRJD sensor RSPF paper exit sensor RSPF section
TCS Toner sensor Toner quantity detection Developing section
TMA_O Toner motor Toner motor phase control Toner motor drive section
TMB_O Toner motor Toner motor phase control Toner motor drive section
USB +D USB signal USB section
USB -D USB signal USB section
VCL Copy lamp Copy lamp control Scanner unit section
VFMOUT Fusing fan Fan drive signal Optical section

AR-208S/208D ELECTRICAL SECTION 13 - 4

 A B C D E

MCU PWB (CPU section) 1/16

VCC3 VCC3

C1
15PF

R1 R2 C2 BR1 BR2 BR3

IC1 /STBY 1 8 D15 1 8 /CS0# 1 8
NM NM 0.1U TP1 NMI 2 7 D14 2 7 /CS1# 2 7
TP2 7 1 R3 0J R4 NM XTAL /WDTOVF 3 6 D13 3 6 /CS2# 3 6
VDD XIN/CLKIN D12 /CS3#
4 6 FRSEL XOUT 8 4 5 4 5 4 5 4
TP3 4 5 C3 C4
TP4 S0 SSCLK X1 10KJX4 10KJX4 10KJX4
3 S1 VSS 2
AT-49 100P 100P
1. MCU PWB

19.6608MHz BR4 BR5

CY25811SC /PRINTST R5 10KJ D11 1 8 ARB_INT 1 8
R6 R7 TP5 R20 330J R8 NM EXTAL /ES_PAGE R9 10KJ D10 2 7 (FW) 2 7
D9 3 6 CPU_SYNC 3 6
NM 0J P60 R11 10KJ D8 4 5 4 5
C6
C5 15PF 10KJX4 10KJX4
TP6 R12 12P
22J BR6 BR7
1 8 D7 1 8 CCD_TG R67 10KJ
/ES_SRDY 2 7 D6 2 7
ES_CMD 3 6 D5 3 6
R384 33J ES_STS 4 5 D4 4 5
CPUCLK# (3)
/RESET1 (5)
10KJX4 NM_10KJX4

/PRINTST BR9

NM
(2) /PRINTST BR10

C70
TP724 R13 33J /RD# DMT0 /CS5# R392 10KJ D3 1 8 CPUCLK 4 5
(2,3,4,5) /RD DMT0 (7)
R14 33J /HWR# DMT1 D2 2 7 /RD# 3 6
(3,4) /HWR DMT1 (7)
R15 100J /LWR# DMT2 D1 3 6 /HWR# 2 7
(2) /LWR DMT2 (7)
DMT3 D0 4 5 /LWR# 1 8
DMT3 (7)
/RES_OA982 TP729 R16 33J
(9) /RES_OA982 MMCLK (6)
/RES_IOASIC TP734 R17 33J NM_10KJX4 10KJX4
(3) /RES_IOASIC RESETOUT1 (5)
/RES_GASIC TP735 R18 33J /RES_NIC
(2) /RES_GASIC /RES_NIC (15)
BR11
[14] CIRCUIT DIAGRAM

BZR (11)
DMT0 1 8 POFF R19 10KJ
CRUMSCL (16)

XTAL
EXTAL
ES_STS R78 1KJ DMT1 2 7
(9) ES_STS CRUMSDA (16)
ES_CMD /CS5# R364 33J DMT2 3 6 SDA R21 2KJ

33P
33P
33P
(9) ES_CMD /CS5 (13)

/STBY

CPUCLK
NMI
/WDTOVF
/ES_SRDY P60 R22 33J RSV_IN0 TP7 DMT3 4 5 SCL R23 2KJ
(9) /ES_SRDY
RY/BY
(4) RY/BY CPU3.3 10KJX4

BR12 BR13

C7
C8
C9
SPFMT0 1 8 /SCANSP 1 8

NM
SPFMT1 /TRANSST

C369
2 7 2 7

NM
C10
SPFMT2 3 6 /SCANST 3 6

TP8
TP9
SPFMT3 4 5 RY/BY 4 5

TP10
TP11
TP12
TP13
TP14
TP15
TP16
TP17
TP19
TP20
TP21
TP22
TP23
TP24
TP25
TP26
TP27
TP28
TP29
TP30
TP31
TP32
TP33
TP34
TP35
TP36
TP37
3 3
10KJX4 10KJX4

IC2

102
101
100
99
98
97
96
95
94
93
92
91
90
89
88
87
86
85
84
83
82
81
80
79
78
77
76
75
74
73
72
71
70
69
68
67
66
65

Vss
Vss
Vss
Vss
Vss
Vss

NMI
RES

VCC
VCC
XTAL
STBY

PF7/0
EXTAL

PF6/AS
PF5/RD
103 64 TP38 /RES_FAX

PF3/LWR
WDTOVF

P50/TxD2
PF4/HWR
/RES_FAX (13)

P51/RxD2
AVcc P35/SCK1

P52/SCK2
PF1/BACK
PF0/BREQ
104 63 SCL RxD R24 10KJ

P63/TEND1
P62/DREQ1

P53/ADTRG
Vref P34/SCK0 SCL (4)
TP40 105 62 TP41 RxD TxD R53 10KJ
(6) RTH P40/AN0 P33/RxD1 RxD (12)
TP42 106 61 TP43 SDA

P61/TEND0/CS5
P60/DREQ0/CS4
(6) (TCS_AN) P41/AN1 P32/RxD0 SDA (4)

P20/PO0/TIOCA3
P24/PO4/TIOCA4
P25/PO5/TIOCB4
P26/PO6/TIOCA5
P27/PO7/TIOCB5

P21/PO1/YICOB3
P22/PO2/TIOCC3
P23/PO3/TIOCD3
TP44 107 60 TXD CRUMSDA R52 10KJ
P42/AN2 P31/TxD1 TxD (12)
TP46 108 59 TP47 POFF
(2,5) VIDEO# P43/AN3 P30/TxD0 POFF (6)
R51 33J PROTECT TP48 109 58 /RES_OA982 R95 10KJ
TP49 P44/AN4 VCC TP50 D15 /RES_GASIC R132 10KJ

PF2/LCAS/ WAIT/BREQO
(8) (PSFANLK) 110 P45/AN5 PD7/D15 57 1 8 BR16
/ES_PAGE TP51 111 56 TP52 2 7 33JX4 D14 /RES_IOASIC R131 10KJ
(9) /ES_PAGE P46/AN6/DA0 PD6/D14
TP53 112 55 TP54 3 6 D13 /RES_USB20 R94 10KJ
(6) LCDCONT P47/AN7/DA1 PD5/D13
113 54 TP55 4 5 D12
AVss PD4/D12 /RES_NIC R66 10KJ
114 Vss Vss 53
C11 NM TP56 115 52 TP57 1 8 BR17 D11 /RES_FAX R26 10KJ
P17/PO15/TIOCB2/TCLKD PD3/D11 TP59 D10
116 P16/PO14/TIOCA2 PD2/D10 51 2 7 33JX4
117
HD6412321VF25(H8S/2321) 50 TP61 3 6 D9
/SCANSP TP62 P15/PO13/TIOCB1/TCLKC PD1/D9 TP63 D8
(2) /SCANSP 118 P14/PO12/TIOCA1 PD0/D8 49 4 5
/SCANST R25 33J TP64 119 48 TP65 1 8 BR18 D7
(2) /SCANST P13/PO11/TIOCD0/TCLKB PE7/D7
/TRANSST TP66 120 47 TP67 2 7 33JX4 D6
(2) /TRANSST P12/PO10/TIOCC0/TCLKA PE6/D6
TP68 121 46 TP69 3 6 D5
(6) PMCLK P11/PO9/TIOCB0/DACK1 PE5/D5
SPFMT3 TP70 122 45 TP71 4 5 D4
(5) SPFMT3 P10/PO8/TIOCA0/DACK0 PE4/D4
SPFMT2 123 44
(5) SPFMT2/MIRCNT MD0 Vss
SPFMT1 124 43 TP72 1 8 BR19 D3
(5) SPFMT1 MD1 PE3/D3
SPFMT0 125 42 TP73 2 7 33JX4 D2
(5) SPFMT0 MD2 PE2/D2
/RES_USB20 TP74 126 41 TP75 3 6 D1
(10) /RES_USB20 PG0/CAS PE1/D1
TP76 127 40 TP77 4 5 D0
TP78 PG1/CS3 PE0/D0
128 PG2/CS2 VCC 39
BR20
5 4 /CS3#
(3) /CSIOASIC
6 3 /CS2#

PG3/CS1
PG4/CS0
Vss
NC
VCC
PC0/A0
PC1/A1
PC2/A2
PC3/A3
Vss
PC4/A4
PC5/A5
PC6/A6
PC7/A7
PB0/A8
PB1/A9
PB2/A10
PB3/A11
Vss
PB4/A12
PB5/A13
PB6/A14
PB7/A15
PA0/A16
PA1/A17
PA2/A18
PA3/A19
Vss
PA4/A20/IRQ4
PA5/A21/IRQ5
PA6/A22/IRQ6
PA7/A23/IRQ7
P67/CS7/IRQ3
P66/CS6/IRQ2
Vss
Vss
P65/IRQ1
P64/IRQ0
(2) /CSGASIC D[15..0] (2,3,4,13)
7 2 /CS1#
(4) /CSSRAM
/CS0#

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
(4) /CSFROM 8 1

10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
33JX4 H8S/2321
2 TP79 2
TP80

NM

22P
TP81
TP82
TP83
TP84
TP85
TP86
TP87
TP88
TP89
TP90
TP91
TP92
TP93
TP94
TP95
TP96
TP97
TP98
TP99

C12
C13
TP100
TP101
TP102
TP103
TP105
TP106
TP107
TP108

AR-208S/208D CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 14 - 1

NM
NM

C14
C15
BR21
BR22
BR23
ARB_INT
ARB_INT (2)
(FW)

8
7 33JX4
6
5
8
7 33JX4
6
5
8
7 33JX4
6
5
(FW) (5,9)
CPU_SYNC
CPU_SYNC (2)
mt_at_home# (5)
CCD_TG
CCD_TG (2,5)
(SPPD)
(SPPD) (8)
(PSW)
(PSW) (8)

1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4

BR24
BR25

8
7 33JX4
6
5
8
7 33JX4
6
5
33J
FB1 VCC3

1
2
3
4
1
2
3
4
R50
0J <1608>

A1
A2
A3
A5
A6
A7
A9

A0
A4
A8
A10
A11
A12
A13
A14
A15
A16
A17
A18
A19
A20
L1
NM_ZJSR5101-223TA
TP109
CPU3.3 A[20..0] (2,3,4)

0.1U
0.1U
0.1U
0.1U
0.1U
0.1U
C19
10U/10V<2012>

C20
C21
C22
C23
C24
C25
1 1

A B C D E
 A B C D E

MCU PWB (ASIC section) 2/16

FB2
NM_0J <1608>
TP837 R30 33J VCC3 VCC3
(5) VSAMP
L2
TP879 R31 33J BR26 10KJX4 ZJSR5101-223TA
(1,5) CCD_TG
/PCLPRO 4 5 G3.3V
TP878 R32 33J /FAXPRO 3 6
(5) CCD_RS
/OUTACK 2 7

0.1U
0.1U
0.1U
0.1U
0.1U
0.1U
0.1U
0.1U
0.1U
0.1U
TP835 R33 33J /INREQ 1 8
(5) BSAMP PIDATA[7..0] (9)
TP874 R34 33J BR28 33JX4
(5) CCD_CP
BR27 10KJX4 1 8 PIDATA0

C27
C28
C29
C30
C31
C32
C33
C34
C35
4 (5) AFE_SDI
AFE_SDI TP834 R35 33J JTG_TCK 4 5 2 7 PIDATA1 C36 4
JTG_TMS 3 6 3 6 PIDATA2
TP875 R36 33J JTG_TDI 2 7 4 5 PIDATA3
(5) CCD_PHI2
JTG_TDO 1 8
TP873 R37 33J 1 8 PIDATA4
(5) CCD_PHI1
2 7 PIDATA5

0.1U
0.1U
0.1U
0.1U
0.1U
0.1U
0.1U
0.1U
0.1U
0.1U

TP836 R38 33J 3 6 PIDATA6

(5) AFE_SEN
R40 4 5 PIDATA7
TP876 R39 33J /OUTCS
(5) ADCLK
BR29 33JX4

C38
C39
C40
C41
C42
C43
C44
C45
C46
C47

TP877 R41 33J 10KJ

12P
12P
12P
12P
12P
12P
12P
12P
(5) AFE_SCK

(14) AFE_DB[7..0]
BR30
AFE_DB7 TP848 1 8 33JX4 /RESET0 (4,5,9,12)
AFE_DB6 TP847

C291
C292
C293
C294
C295
C296
C297
C298
2 7
VCC3

0.1U
0.1U
0.1U
0.1U
0.1U
0.1U
0.1U
0.1U
0.1U
0.1U

AFE_DB5 TP846 3 6
C58 C59 C60 C61 C62 C63 C64 C65 C66 C67 C68 AFE_DB4 TP845 4 5
BR32 C37 C399
1 8 AFE_DB7 47P 47P 47P 47P 47P NM 47P 47P NM 47P NM AFE_DB3 TP844 1 8 33JX4 10U/10V<2012> 10U/10V<2012>
/H_SYNC (9)
C48
C49
C50
C51
C52
C53
C54
C55
C56
C57

2 7 AFE_DB6 AFE_DB2 TP843 2 7

3 6 AFE_DB5 AFE_DB1 TP842 3 6

JTG_TDO
JTG_TDI
JTG_TMS
/INREQ
/ESPRD
/FAXPRO
/PCLPRO

JTG_TCK
/OUTCS
/OUTACK
4 5 AFE_DB4 AFE_DB0 TP841 4 5
BR31 10KJX4 G3.3V
0.1U

1 8 AFE_DB3
(14) CL
2 7 AFE_DB2
3 6 AFE_DB1 C400 C401
4 5 AFE_DB0 10U/10V<2012> 10U/10V<2012>
C69

TP110
TP111
TP112
TP113
TP114
TP115
TP116
TP117
TP118
TP119
TP120
TP121
TP122
TP123
TP124
TP125
TP126
TP127
TP128
TP129
TP742
TP741
TP740
TP739
TP738
TP737
TP736
TP325
TP270
TP630
TP628
TP627
TP507
TP500
TP498
TP495
TP493
TP490
TP486
TP471
TP468
TP462
TP403
TP402
TP382
TP364
TP351
TP140
TP130
TP131
TP132
TP133
TP134
TP135
TP136
TP137
TP138
TP139
BR33 10KJX4
R42 10KJ AFE_SDI
IC4

222
221
220
219
218
217
216
215
214
213
212
211
210
209
208
207
206
205
204
203
202
201
200
199
198
197
196
195
194
193
192
191
190
189
188
187
186
185
184
183
182
181
180
179
178
177
176
175
174
173
172
171
170
169
168
167
166
165
164
163
162
161
160
159
158
157
156
155
154
153
152
151
150
149

TDI
TD0
TCK
TMS
VCC3

TRSK
/INCS
/POCS

ADCLK
/INACK

/INREQ

BSAMP
VSAMP

CLPWM
/ESPRD

/OUTCS
/HSYNC

MDAT15
MDAT14
MDAT13
MDAT12
MDAT11
MDAT10
MDAT09
MDAT08
MDAT07
MDAT06
MDAT05
MDAT04
MDAT03
MDAT02
MDAT01
MDAT00

AFESCK
CCD_CP
CCD_RS
CCD_TG

VCC(AC)
AFE_SDI
VCC(AC)
PIDATA0
PIDATA1
PIDATA2
VCC(AC)
PIDATA3
PIDATA4
PIDATA5
PIDATA6
PIDATA7

GND(AC)
GND(AC)
GND(AC)

/FAXPRD
/PCLPRD

AFE_DB0
AFE_DB1
AFE_DB2
AFE_DB3
AFE_DB4
AFE_DB5
AFE_DB6
AFE_DB7
/OUTACK

AFE_SEN
/OUTREQ

CCD_PH1
CCD_PH2
BR34 10KJX4

VCC(CORE)
VCC(CORE)
VCC(CORE)
VCC(CORE)

GND(CORE)
GND(CORE)
GND(CORE)
GND(CORE)
1 8 MM_BI0 223 148 TP141 R44 33J
GND(CORE) /POREQ /POREQ (9)
2 7 MM_BI1 TP142 224 147
(6) MM_Y3 MM_Y3 VCC(AC)
3 6 MM_BI2 TP143 225 146 TP144 1 8
(6) MM_Y2 MM_Y2 /PIWT /PIWR (9)
3 4 5 MM_AI0 TP145 226 145 TP146 2 7 3
(6) MM_Y1 MM_Y1 /PIACK /PIACK (9)
227 VCC(CORE) GND(AC) 144 3 6 /POACK (9) PODATA[7..0] (9)
R45 10KJ MM_AI1 TP147 228 143 TP148 4 5
(7) MM_PH_B MM_PH_B /POACK /PIREQ (9)
R46 10KJ MM_AI2 MM_BI0 TP149 229 142 TP150 BR35 33JX4
(7) MM_BI0 MM_BI0 /PIREQ
MM_BI1 TP151 230 141
(7) MM_BI1 MM_BI1 GND(CORE)
MM_BI2 TP152 231 140 TP153 PODATA0
TP154 MM_BI2 PODATA0 TP155 PODATA1 VCC3
(7) MM_PH_A 232 MM_PH_A PODATA1 139
MM_AI0 TP156 233 138 TP157 PODATA2
(7) MM_AI0 MM_AI0 PODATA2
MM_AI1 TP158 234 137 TP159 PODATA3
(4) MAD[12..0] (7) MM_AI1 MM_AI1 PODATA3
MM_AI2 TP160 235 136 TP161 PODATA4
MM_AI2 PODATA4 TP162 PODATA5 R47 R48 10J
236 GND(AC) PODATA5 135 /PR_LINE (9)
MAD3 TP817 1 8 TP163 237 134 TP164 PODATA6
MAD2 TP818 TP165 RAM_MAD3 PODATA6 TP166 PODATA7 10KJ R49 10J
2 7 238 RAM_MAD2 PODATA7 133 /SC_LINE (9)
MAD1 TP819 3 6 239 132
MAD0 TP820 TP167 GND(CORE) VCC(CORE) TP168
4 5 240 RAM_MAD1 /TRANSST 131 /TRANSST (1)
BR36 33JX4 TP169 241 130 TP170
MAD10 TP821 TP171 RAM_MAD0 /RECEPTST TP172
1 8 242 RAM_MAD10 /PRINTST 129 /PRINTST (1)
2 7 243 128 TP173
(4) BANK1 VCC(CORE) /SCANST /SCANST (1)
3 6 TP174 244 127 TP175 RCV
(4) BANK0 RAM_BANKS1 RCV
4 5 TP176 245 126 TP177 VPIN
(4) /SDCS RAM_BANKS0 VPIN
BR37 33JX4 TP178 246 125 TP179 VMIN
TP180 RAM_CS VMIN VCC3
(4) /SDRAS 1 8 247 RAM_RAS GND(CORE) 124
2 7 TP181 248 123 TP182
(4) /SDCAS RAM_CAS VPOUT
3 6 249 122 TP183
(4) /SDWDE VCC(AC) VMOUT
4 5 TP184 250 121 TP185
(4) RAMDB[15..0] (4) DQM0 RAM_WDE OEN
BR38 33JX4 TP186 251 120 TP891 MEM_INT R356 10KJ
RAM_DQM0 GND(AC) PARAD[7..0] (15)
VCC3 252 119 TP187 TP885 CLKSW R357 10KJ
RAMDB7 TP854 TP188 GND(AC) SUSPEND TP189 /POREQ R358 10KJ
1 8 253 RAM_DATA7 IE1284_PARAD0 118
BR41 10KJX4 RAMDB6 TP855 2 7 TP190 254 117 TP191 1 8 PARAD0 /PIREQ R359 10KJ
RAMDB5 TP856 TP192 RAM_DATA6 IE1284_PARAD1 PARAD1
1 8 RAMDB7 3 6 255 RAM_DATA5 VCC(AC) 116 2 7
2 7 RAMDB6 RAMDB4 TP857 4 5 TP193 256 115 TP194 3 6 PARAD2
BR39 33JX4 RAM_DATA4 ASIC IE1284_PARAD2 TP195 PARAD3 BR52 10KJX4
3 6 RAMDB5 257 GND(CORE) IE1284_PARAD3 114 4 5
4 5 RAMDB4 RAMDB3 TP858 1 8 TP196 258 113 TP197 1 8BR40 33JX4 PARAD4 PODATA0 1 8
RAMDB2 TP859 TP198 RAM_DATA3 HG73C141HFV(LF) IE1284_PARAD4 TP199 PARAD5 PODATA1
2 7 259 RAM_DATA2 IE1284_PARAD5 112 2 7 2 7
BR45 10KJX4 RAMDB1 TP860 3 6 TP200 260 111 TP201 3 6 PARAD6 PODATA2 3 6
RAMDB0 TP861 TP202 RAM_DATA1 IE1284_PARAD6 TP203 PARAD7 PODATA3
1 8 RAMDB3 4 5 261 RAM_DATA0 IE1284_PARAD7 110 4 5 4 5
2 7 RAMDB2 BR42 33JX4 262 109 TP204 /REV BR43 33JX4
RAMDB15 TP862 TP205 GND(AC) IE1284_REV R54 33J
3 6 RAMDB1 1 8 263 RAM_DATA15 VCC(CORE) 108 /REV_O (15)
4 5 RAMDB0 RAMDB14 TP863 2 7 TP206 264 107 TP207 /FAULT 1 8 BR55 10KJX4
RAM_DATA14 IE1284_FAULT /FAULT_O (15)
RAMDB13 TP864 3 6 265 106 TP208 /ACK 2 7 PODATA4 1 8
VCC(CORE) IE1284_ACK /ACK_O (15)
BR49 10KJX4 RAMDB12 TP865 4 5 TP209 266 105 TP210 BUSY 3 6 PODATA5 2 7
2 RAM_DATA13 IE1284_BUSY BUSY_O (15) 2
1 8 RAMDB15 BR44 33JX4 TP211 267 104 TP212 PE 4 5 PODATA6 3 6
RAM_DATA12 IE1284_PE PE_O (15)
2 7 RAMDB14 RAMDB11 TP866 1 8 TP213 268 103 BR47 33JX4 PODATA7 4 5
RAMDB10 TP867 TP214 RAM_DATA11 GND(CORE) TP215 SLCT R55 33J
3 6 RAMDB13 2 7 269 RAM_DATA10 IE1284_SLCT 102 SLCT_O (15)
4 5 RAMDB12 RAMDB9 TP868 3 6 TP216 270 101 TP217
RAMDB8 TP869 TP218 RAM_DATA9 IE1284_INIT TP219 /INIT VCC3
4 5 271 RAM_DATA8 IE1284_SLCTIN 100 1 8 /INIT_I (15)
BR53 10KJX4 BR48 33JX4 272 99 /SLCTIN 2 7
VCC(CORE) VCC(CORE) /SLCTIN_I (15)

AR-208S/208D CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 14 - 2

1 8 RAMDB11 1 8 TP220 273 98 TP221 /AUTOFD 3 6
(4) DQM1 RAM_DQM1 IE1284_AUTOFD /AUTOFD_I (15)
2 7 RAMDB10 2 7 TP222 274 97 TP223 /STB 4 5 BR57 10KJX4
(4) SDCKE RAM_CKE IE1284_STB /STB_I (15)
3 6 RAMDB9 3 6 275 96 TP224 BR46 33JX4 RCV 1 8
TP225 GND(AC) TSP_MODE TP226 VPIN
4 5 RAMDB8 4 5 276 RAM_CLK_OUT TSO0 95 2 7
BR51 82JX4 277 94 TP227 VCC3 VCC3 VCC3 VMIN 3 6
GND(CORE) /SCANSP /SCANSP (1)
MAD12 TP822 1 8 TP228 278 93 4 5
MAD11 TP823 TP229 RAM_MAD12 VCC(AC) TP230
2 7 279 RAM_MAD11 OPE_CLK 92 OP_CLK (5)
MAD9 TP824 3 6 TP231 280 91 BR58 10KJX4
MAD8 TP825 RAM_MAD9 GND(AC) TP232 PARAD0
4 5 281 VCC(CORE) OPE_LATCH 90 OP_LATCH (5) 1 8
C351 BR54 33JX4 TP233 282 89 TP234 R56 R57 R58 PARAD1 2 7
RAM_MAD8 OPE_DATA OP_DATA (5)
MAD7 TP826 1 8 TP235 283 88 TP236 10KJ NM NM PARAD2 3 6
NM MAD6 TP827 RAM_MAD7 TM TP237 TM (5) PARAD3
2 7 284 VCC(AC) /TM 87 TM_ (5) 4 5
MAD5 TP828 3 6 TP238 285 86
MAD4 TP829 TP239 RAM_MAD6 VCC(CORE) TP240 BR59 10KJX4
4 5 286 RAM_MAD5 OUTP14B 85 /IMC_READY (9)
BR56 33JX4 TP241 287 84 TP242 PFCLK TP743 PARAD4 1 8
RAM_CLK_OUT RAM_MAD4 OUTP13B TP243 KEYSC3 (5) PARAD5
(4) SDCLK 288 GND(AC) OUTP12B 83 KEYSC2 (5) 2 7
R59 289 82 TP244 PARAD6 3 6
33J CPUDATA15 OUTP11B TP245 KEYSC1 (5) PARAD7
290 CPUDATA14 OUTP10B 81 SPFON (5) 4 5
291 80 TP246 R60 R61 R62
C74 CPUDATA13 OUTP09B TP247 MIRON (5) NM 10KJ 10KJ BR60 10KJX4
292 CPUDATA12 OUTP08B 79 MPFS (6)
NM 293 78 /INIT 1 8
CPUDATA11 GND(CORE) TP248 /SLCTIN
294 CPUDATA10 OUTP07B 77 HL (6) 2 7
295 76 TP249 /AUTOFD 3 6
CPUDATA9 OUTP06B TP250 PR (6) /STB
296 CPUDATA8 OUTP05B 75 CPFS2 (6) 4 5

CPU_DATA7
CPU_DATA6
CPU_DATA5
CPU_DATA4
VCC(AC)
CPU_DATA3
CPU_DATA2
CPU_DATA1
CPU_DATA0
GND(AC)
MIRCNT
/CPUSYNC
MEM_INT
ARB_INT
VCC(CORE)
CPU_AD8
CPU_AD7
CPU_AD6
CPU_AD5
GND(CORE)
RAM_CLK_IN
CPU_AD4
CPU_AD3
CPU_AD2
CPU_AD1
CPU_AD0
/CPUCS
SFCLK48
GND(CORE)
/CPUWR
/CPURD
/RESET
VCC(CORE)
PFCLK
CLKSW
GND(CORE)
PFCLKOUT
PFCLKIN
GND(PLL)
VCC(PLL)
GND(PLL)
VCC(PLL)
TM2_15M
/SYNC
GND(AC)
/VIDEO
/LEND
VCC(AC)
OUTP00A
OUTP01A
OUTP02A
OUTP03A
OUTP04A
OUTP05A
OUTP06A
OUTP15A
VCC(CORE)
OUTP07A
OUTP08A
GND(CORE)
OUTP09A
OUTP10A
OUTP11A
OUTP12A
OUTP13A
VCC(CORE)
OUTP14A
OUTP00B
GND(AC)
OUTP01B
OUTP02B
OUTP03B
OUTP04B
VCC(AC)

VCC3

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50
51
52
53
54
55
56
57
58
59
60
61
62
63
64
65
66
67
68
69
70
71
72
73
74

TP719 R70 0J FB3

PFCLKOUT 0J <1608> X2 R63 NM_33J
TP251 8 5 SFCLK48A SFCLK48 TP892
X5 C76 VCC OUTPUT
1 AT-49(18.3856MHz) 0.1U C77 1
C75
22000P

TP720 R68 0J VCC3 TP252 NM_12P

PFCLKIN 1 4 R65 33J
C107 C108 R314 N.C. GND SFCLK48B
CPFS1 (6)

D7
D6
D5
D4
D3
D2
D1
D0
VCC3 0J NM_SG8002DC(48MHz)

D15
D14
D13
D12
D11
D10
D9
D8
10P 12P MRPS3 (6)
RAM_CLK_OUT

MRPS2 (6)
MEM_INT
A9
A8
A7
A6
A5
A4
A3
A2
A1
SFCLK48
PFCLK
CLKSW
PFCLKOUT
PFCLKIN
SYNC#

MRPS1 (6) IC9 C402 12P

LDEN (6) R75 R92 TP254 SFCLK48A TP253
(5) MIRCNT (1,5) VIDEO# RRS (6) 7 VDD XIN/CLKIN 1
TP727 NM NM 6 8
(1) CPU_SYNC (6) /LEND TP882 PTPULSE (6) S1 TP257 S0 FRSEL XOUT SFCLK48B TP258
(1) ARB_INT (1) /CSGASIC (6) MMD GASIC_READY (12) 4 S0 SSCLK 5
R69 TP872 TP256 S1 3 2
(1) /LWR (6) PMD S1 VSS
SYNC# TP746 TP255 RSV_OUT0 C375 12P
(/SYNC) (5) (1,3,4,5) /RD (6) TC C411
TP259 RSV_OUT1 R73 R79 CY25814SC X7
10J TP747 (6) GRIDL TP260 RSV_OUT2 NM 0J 0.1U AT-49(12MHz)
C80 TP881 (6) MC TP261
47P C97 (6) BIAS FWREN (5)
(3,5) (/ASIC_RST) (6) VFMCNT_12V
R133 33J
(1,3,4,13) D[15..0] (1,3,4) A[20..0] (6) VFM_24V
(1) /RES_GASIC 1000P
R134 NM (9) /FPOFF

A B C D E
 A B C D E

MCU PWB (I/O ASIC section) 3/16

4 4

IO ASIC

TP262 RSV_OUT15
TP263 RSV_OUT14
TP264 RSV_OUT13
TP265 RSV_OUT12
3 TP266 RSV_OUT11 3
TP267 RSV_OUT10
TP268 RSV_OUT9
TP269 RSV_OUT8
FB13 VCC3
(11) SELIN1 0J <1608>
(11) SELIN2 INFOLED (11)
(11) SELIN3 PSL (11)
(11) KEYIN SPUS (7) L15
RSV_OUT17 SRVC (7) NM_ZJSR5101-223TA
IOIC3.3V RSV_OUT16
IOIC3.3V

TP271
TP272
TP273
TP274
TP636
TP275
TP276
TP277
TP278
TP279
TP306
TP280
TP281
(RSV_SOL) (7)
PSFM (6)
0.1U
0.1U
0.1U
0.1U
0.1U
0.1U
0.1U
0.1U

C304
10U/10V<2012>
C568
C662
C575
C660
C574
C569
C663
C700

IC52

100
99
98
97
96
95
94
93
92
91
90
89
88
87
86
85
84
83
82
81
80
79
78
77
76

vdd

gnd

GND
GND

XCE_EXT
1 75

SELB(OD,5VFS)
SELA(OD,5VFS)

SELC(OD,5VFS)
PORTF0(PD50K)
PORTF1(PD50K)
PORTF2(PD50K)
PORTF3(PD50K)
PORTF4(PD50K)
PORTF5(PD50K)
PORTF6(PD50K)
PORTF7(PD50K)
VDD VDD

PORTG0(PD50K)
PORTG1(PD50K)
PORTG2(PD50K)
PORTG3(PD50K)
PORTG4(PD50K)
PORTG5(PD50K)
PORTG6(PD50K)
PORTG7(PD50K)
TP282 2 74 TP283

YIN(PD50K)(5VFS)
(1) CPUCLK# PHICLK PORTE0(PD50K) LCDDB4 (5)
3 gnd PORTE1(PD50K) 73 TP284 LCDDB5 (5)
TP285 4 72 TP286
(1) /CSIOASIC XCE0(PU50K) PORTE2(PD50K) LCDDB6 (5)
TP287 5 71 TP288
(1,2,4) A[20..0] CE1(PU50K) PORTE3(PD50K) LCDDB7 (5)
(1,2,4,5) /RD 6 XOE(PU50K) PORTE4(PD50K) 70 TP289 LCDE (5)
(1,4) /HWR 7 XWR(PU50K) PORTE5(PD50K) 69 TP290 LCDRS (5)
A4 8 68 TP291
A3 A4(PU50K) PORTE6(PD50K) /ES_CRDY (9)
9 A3(PU50K) PORTE7(PD50K) 67 TP292 MCNT (6)
A2 10 66
A1 A2(PU50K) gnd
11 A1(PU50K) PORTD0(PD50K) 65 TP293 SFTMT0 (7)
A0 TP294 12 64 TP295
R135 TP296 A0(PU50K) PORTD1(PD50K) TP811 SFTMT1 (7)
(2,5) (/ASIC_RST) 13 XRST(Sch) PORTD2(PD50K) 63 SFTMT2 (7)
2 33J C98
(1,2,4,13) D[15..0] 14 vdd SC65892(IO ASIC) <LQFP100> PORTD3(PD50K) 62 TP297 SFTMT3 (7)
2
(1) /RES_IOASIC R136 D15 15 61 TP298
NM 1000P D14 D7(PU50K) PORTD4(PD50K)
16 D6(PU50K) PORTD5(PD50K) 60 TP299
17 SMC(SCAN)(PD50K) PORTD6(PD50K) 59 TP300
18 SIN(SCAN)(PD50K) PORTD7(PD50K) 58 TP301
TP635 19 57
SOUT(SCAN) gnd
20 AMC(SCAN)(PD50K) PORTC0(PD50K) 56 TP832 (PMRDY) (8)
21 SCK(SCAN) PORTC1(PD50K) 55 TP302 (MMLD) (8)
D13 22 54 TP303
D5(PU50K) PORTC2(PD50K) (FANLK) (8)

AR-208S/208D CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 14 - 3

D12 23 53 TP304
D4(PU50K) PORTC3(PD50K) THOPEN (6) RSV_IN2
D11 24 52 TP305
D3(PU50K) PORTC4(PD50K)
25 VDD VDD 51

2
R706

GND
D2(PU50K)
D1(PU50K)
D0(PU50K)
PORTA7(PD50K)(5VFS)
PORTA6(PD50K)(5VFS)
PORTA5(PD50K)(5VFS)
PORTA4(PD50K)(5VFS)
PORTA3(PD50K)(5VFS)
PORTA2(PD50K)(5VFS)
PORTA1(PD50K)(5VFS)
PORTA0(PD50K)(5VFS)
vdd
PORTB7(PD50K)(5VFS)
PORTB6(PD50K)(5VFS)
PORTB5(PD50K)(5VFS)
PORTB4(PD50K)(5VFS)
PORTB3(PD50K)(5VFS)
PORTB2(PD50K)(5VFS)
PORTB1(PD50K)(5VFS)
PORTB0(PD50K)(5VFS)
PORTC7(PD50K)
PORTC6(PD50K)
PORTC5(PD50K)
GND

VCC3
NM_10KJ

26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36
37
38
39
40
41
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
49
50

VCC3

1
R707
4.7KJ
R10
4.7KJ

RSV_IN1 BL (11) /ES_CRDY

MSU_ST1 (13)
MSU_ST1
TP307
TP308
TP309
TP815
TP310
TP311
TP312
TP313
TP314
TP315
TP316
TP317
TP318
TP319
TP320
TP321
TP322
TP323
TP324

DSWS (8)
D10
D9
D8

(TCS) (8)
DVS1 (8)
(PD1) (8)
(PD2) (8)
LCDE
(SCOD) (8)
LCDRS
(SRJD) (8)
(MFD) (8)
1 (PPD1) (8)
1
(PPD2) (8)
(PPD3) (8)
(POD) (8)
NM_10KJ
NM_10KJ

(SPID) (8)
(CED1) (8)
(CED2) (8)
(DRST) (8)
R122
R263

A B C D E
 A B C D E

MCU PWB (Memory section) 4/16

FlashROM VPP Controll

4 4
VCC3
Serial EE-PROM

VCC3 VCC3 VCC3

C82 J1,J2
0.1U R74
IC5 10KJ 1
8 1 (9) VPP 2
VCC E0
7 WC E1 2 3
6 3 TP889
(1) SCL SCL E2
R76 100J 5 4
(1) SDA SDA VSS
CAT24WC08LI R77
NM

NM
R80
RAMDB[15..0] (2)

3 3
VCC3
VCC3 VCC3
(1,2,3) A[20..0]
IC6

NM
NM
10KJ
1 VCC VSS 54
VCC3 RAMDB0 2 53 RAMDB15
DQ0 DQ15
3 VCCQ VSSQ 52
RAMDB1 4 51 RAMDB14
RAMDB2 DQ1 DQ14 RAMDB13
5 DQ2 DQ13 50
6 49

R81
R82
R83
R84 RAMDB3 VSSQ VCCQ RAMDB12
7 DQ3 DQ12 48
10KJ RAMDB4 8 47 RAMDB11
IC7 DQ4 DQ11
9 VCCQ VSSQ 46
RAMDB5 10 45 RAMDB10
IC8 A16 TP326 TP327 A17 RAMDB6 DQ5 DQ10 RAMDB9
1 A15 A16 48 11 DQ6 DQ9 44
A0 1 6 D8 A15 TP328 2 47 TP329 12 43
A1 A0 I/O0 D9 A14 TP330 A14 BYTE RAMDB7 VSSQ VCCQ RAMDB8
2 A1 I/O1 7 3 A13 GND 46 13 DQ7 DQ8 42
A2 3 10 D10 A13 TP331 4 45 TP332 D15 14 41
A3 A2 I/O2 D11 A12 TP333 A12 DQ15 TP334 D7 TP850 VCC VSS
4 A3 I/O3 11 5 A11 DQ7 44 (2) DQM0 15 LDQM NC 40
A4 13 22 D12 A11 TP335 6 43 TP336 D14 TP849 16 39 TP851
A4 I/O4 A10 DQ14 (2) /SDWDE WE UDQM DQM1 (2)
A5 14 23 D13 A10 TP337 7 42 TP338 D6 TP813 17 38 TP816
A5 I/O5 A9 DQ6 (2) /SDCAS CAS CLK SDCLK (2)
A6 15 26 D14 A9 TP339 8 41 TP340 D13 TP840 18 37 TP812
A6 I/O6 A8 DQ13 (2) /SDRAS RAS CLKE SDCKE (2)
A7 16 27 D15 A20 TP341 9 40 TP342 D5 TP838 19 36 TP852 R85 0J MAD12
A7 I/O7 A19 DQ5 (2) /SDCS CS NC
A8 17 TP888 10 39 TP343 D12 TP853 20 35 MAD11
A8 NC DQ12 (2) BANK0 BA0 A11
A9 18 TP344 11 38 TP345 D4 TP839 21 34 MAD9
A9 (1,3) /HWR WE DQ4 (2) BANK1 BA1 A9
A10 19 R86 NM TP346 12 37 MAD10 22 33 MAD8
A11 A10 VCC3 VCC3 (2,5,9,12) /RESET0 TP347 RP VCC TP348 D11 MAD0 A10 A8 MAD7
20 A11 (9) VPP
13 VPP DQ11 36 23 A0 A7 32
A12 21 TP349 14 35 TP350 D3 MAD1 24 31 MAD6
A13 A12 WP DQ3 TP352 D10 MAD2 A1 A6 MAD5
29 A13 (1) RY/BY 15 RY/BY DQ10 34 25 A2 A5 30
A14 30 A19 TP353 16 33 TP354 D2 MAD3 26 29 MAD4
A15 A14 A18 TP355 A18 DQ2 TP356 D9 A3 A4
31 A15 VDD 8 17 A17 DQ9 32 27 VCC VSS 28
A16 32 24 A8 TP357 18 31 TP358 D1
A16 VDD A7 TP359 A7 DQ1 TP360 D8 C83
19 A6 DQ8 30
C84 C85 A6 TP361 20 29 TP362 D0 NM
A5 DQ0 SDRAM (16bit x 4bank)

AR-208S/208D CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 14 - 4

TP726 5 A5 TP363 21 28
(1) /CSSRAM CS1 A4 OE /RD (1,2,3,5)
28 0.1U 0.1U A4 TP365 22 27
2 (1,2,3,5) /RD OE A3 GND 2
12 9 A3 TP366 23 26 TP367
(1,3) /HWR WE GND A2 CE /CSFROM (1)
25 A2 TP368 24 25 TP369 A1
GND A1 A0

NM
NM
NM
NM
IS63LV1024L-12J-TR A17 S29AL016D70TFI020

22000P
A1
NM
NM

VCC3

C88
0.1U

C352
C353
R88
C86
C87
C89 C90 C91 C92 C93 C94 C95
0.1U 0.1U 0.1U 0.1U 0.1U 0.1U 0.1U
C354
C355

(1,2,3,13) D[15..0] MAD[12..0] (2)

1 1

A B C D E
 A B C D E

MCU PWB (Driver section 1) 5/16

3.3V VCC3 3.3V
IC13 5V VCC3
VCC 20 5V 3.3V
2 18 TP370 R96 33J
(2) OP_CLK 1A1 1Y1 (OP_CLK) (11)
4 16 TP371 R97 33J
(2) OP_DATA 1A2 1Y2 (OP_DATA) (11)
6 14 TP372 R98 33J R89
(2) OP_LATCH 1A3 1Y3 (OP_LATCH) (11)
8 12 TP373 NM
Reset Circuit 1A4 1Y4 /FAX_RST (13)
11 9 TP374 IC11
(9,10) /OP_RST 2A1 2Y1 /NIC_RST (15)
13 7 TP375 TP814 /RESET# 5
(2,4,9,12) /RESET0 2A2 2Y2 Vcc
VCC3 VCC3 /RESET# R121 100J TP378 15 5 TP379 R119 1KJ
2A3 2Y3 /RESET1 (1)
4 17 3 TP380 R101 100J TP833 R120 33J TP376 1 6 TP377 R91 33J 4
(16) /ASIC_RST 2A4 2Y4 (/ASIC_RST) (2,3) (11) /SYNC A1 Y1 (/SYNC) (2)
1 1G
19 TP381 3 4

NM
2G (14) mt_at_home A2 Y2 mt_at_home# (1)
10

0.01U
R27 GND C105 C104 C99
100KJ 74LCX244 2
0.1U NM 47P GND C96
IC3
TP383 NC7WZ17 0.1U

C310
C311
2 VDD VOUT 4 /RESET0 (2,4,9,12)
C290 C16 1 3 TP786
GND CT
1U<2012> 0.1U BU4212F C17 C18
NM 3.3V VCC3 3.3V
0.01U

IC16
VCC 20
(2) MIRCNT 2 1A1 1Y1 18
4 16 TP384
1A2 1Y2 TP385 VCC3
6 1A3 1Y3 14
ASIC Reset 8 12 TP387 BR61 3.3V 3.3V
1A4 1Y4 TP388
(1) SPFMT0 11 2A1 2Y1 9 5 4 (SPFMT0) (7)
13 7 TP389 6 3 VCC3
(1) SPFMT1 2A2 2Y2 (SPFMT1) (7)
R28 33J 15 5 TP390 7 2 R93
(1) SPFMT2/MIRCNT 2A3 2Y3 (SPFMT2) (7)
TP386 17 3 TP391 8 1 10KJ
(1) RESETOUT1 /ASIC_RST (16) (1) SPFMT3 2A4 2Y4 (SPFMT3) (7)
1 IC14
(2) MIRON 1G
19 33JX4 5
(2) SPFON 2G Vcc
10 GND
R29 C26 C110 1 6 TP393 R100 33J
(11) FW A1 Y1 (FW) (1,9)
10KJ 47P 74LCX244 0.1U
3 4 TP394
A2 Y2

C376 2 C103
GND
NM 0.1U
5V NC7WZ17
3.3V
OP Reset 5V
IC20
3 VCC 20 3
R64 33J TP718 2 18 TP396 R109 100J
(1,2) VIDEO# 1A1 1Y1 /VIDEO (11)
TP395 4 16 TP397
(2,3) (/ASIC_RST) /OP_RST (9,10) 1A2 1Y2
6 14 TP398
1A3 1Y3
(2) KEYSC1 8 1A4 1Y4 12 (KEYSC1) (11)
(2) KEYSC2 11 2A1 2Y1 9 (KEYSC2) (11)
C79 R345 13 7
(2) KEYSC3 2A2 2Y2 (KEYSC3) (11)
47P 1KJ 15 5
(2) TM 2A3 2Y3 (TM) (7)
(2) TM_ 17 2A4 2Y4 3 (TM_) (7)
1 1G
19 2G

0.1U
10

33P
GND
74VHCT244
R71 R72
10KJ 10KJ

C114

C117
5V VCC3

3.3V R223 R224

NM_0J 0J
IC26
VCC 20
2 18 TP900
1A1 1Y1 TP899
4 1A2 1Y2 16
6 14 TP898
(3) LCDDB4 1A3 1Y3 LCDDB4# (11)
8 12 TP897
(3) LCDDB5 1A4 1Y4 LCDDB5# (11)
11 9 TP896
(3) LCDDB6 2A1 2Y1 LCDDB6# (11)
13 7 TP895
(3) LCDDB7 2A2 2Y2 LCDDB7# (11)
15 5 TP894
(3) LCDE 2A3 2Y3 LCDE# (11)
17 3 TP893
(3) LCDRS 2A4 2Y4 LCDRS# (11)
1 1G
19 2G

0.1U
10 GND
74LCX244
2 2

C115

AR-208S/208D CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 14 - 5

VCC3

R110 NM_100J
C129 AFE_SDI#
IC23 NM
20 C130 AFE_SEN#
VCC TP404 R361 33J AFE_SDI# NM
(2) AFE_SDI 2 1A1 1Y1 18 AFE_SDI# (14)
4 16 TP405 R370 33J AFE_SEN# C131 AFE_SCK#
(2) AFE_SEN 1A2 1Y2 AFE_SEN# (14)
6 14 TP406 R371 33J AFE_SCK# NM
(2) AFE_SCK 1A3 1Y3 AFE_SCK# (14)
8 12 TP407
1A4 1Y4 TP408 R373 33J (PB_NOE)
(9,10) PB_NOE 11 2A1 2Y1 9 (PB_NOE) (13)
13 7 TP409 R374 33J (PB_NAE0) C306 (PB_NOE)
(9,10) PB_NAE0 2A2 2Y2 (PB_NAE0) (13)
15 5 TP410 R375 33J (PB_NWE) NM
(9,10) PB_NWE 2A3 2Y3 (PB_NWE) (13)
17 3 TP411 R376 33J (/RD) C307 (PB_NAE0)
(1,2,3,4) /RD 2A4 2Y4 (/RD) (13)
1 NM
1G C308 (PB_NWE)
19 2G
10 NM
GND C128 VCC3 C309 (/RD)
74LCX244 0.1U NM

R237
10KJ
5

IC46
(2) FWREN 1
4
2

NM_TC7SH32FU
3

R226
VCC3 NM_10KJ C255
0.1U

1 IC19 C116 VSAMP# 1

20 NM
VCC TP412 R332 33J VSAMP# C120 CCD_TG#
(2) VSAMP 2 1A1 1Y1 18 VSAMP# (14)
4 16 TP413 R333 33J CCD_TG# NM
(1,2) CCD_TG 1A2 1Y2 CCD_RS# CCD_TG# (14) CCD_RS#
6 14 TP414 R336 33J C121
(2) CCD_RS 1A3 1Y3 CCD_RS# (14)
8 12 TP415 R338 33J BSAMP# NM
(2) BSAMP 1A4 1Y4 CCD_CP# BSAMP# (14)
11 9 TP416 R344 33J C122 BSAMP#
(2) CCD_CP 2A1 2Y1 CCD_PHI1# CCD_CP# (14)
13 7 TP417 R354 33J NM
(2) CCD_PHI1 2A2 2Y2 CCD_PHI1# (14) CCD_CP#
15 5 TP418 R355 33J CCD_PHI2# C123
(2) CCD_PHI2 2A3 2Y3 CCD_PHI2# (14)
17 3 TP419 R360 33J ADCLK# NM
(2) ADCLK 2A4 2Y4 ADCLK# (14) CCD_PHI2#
1 C124
1G NM
19 2G
10 C125 CCD_PHI1#
GND C127 NM
TC74VHC244FT 0.1U C126 ADCLK#
NM

A B C D E
 A B C D E

MCU PWB (Driver section 2) 6/16

24V VCC3 VCC3

10KJ
10KJ
10KJ
10KJ
12V
24V PR#
R303 12V
IC25

R268
R269
R270
R271
BR63 1.5KJX4 R300 R301 10KJ
TP792 1 8 TP420 1 16 R363 470KJ 4.7KJ
(2) MC 1B 1C /MC (11) (D)
TP785 2 7 TP421 2 15 Q18 R299 IC17B

8
(2) BIAS 2B 2C /BIAS (11) IC17A
TP790 TP422 KRC102S 100J KIA393F
8

(2) TC 3 6 3 3B 3C 14 /TC (11)

TP789 4 5 TP423 4 13 47KJ R298 3 TP425 3 Q19 KIA393F
(2) GRIDL 4B 4C /GRIDL (11) C312 +
TP426 5 12 1.5KF TP424 1 TP427 2SK3018 5
(3) MCNT 5B 5C /MCNT (12) (G) +
R395 1.5KJ TP428 6 11 TP429 TP430 Q7 TP432 2 TP433 2 7 TP434
(3) PSFM 6B 6C (2) PTPULSE -
4 R396 1.5KJ TP435 7 10 KTA1505S TP431 6 4
7B 7C (S) -
R362 4.7KJ1/4W<3216>

4
8 E COM 9 1U<2012> R302
4

PSFMOUT (12) 10KJ 12V

KID65001AF R297 D36 C367
47KJ 1SS355 2.2U<2012>

10KJ
10KJ
PGND

1
D51 C379
0.1U
1SS355

R265
R266
PGND
VCC3 12V VCC3

VCC3 24V
5V

D52 R102 R103 R104 R105

MTZ J22B 1KF 1MF 7.5KF 1KJ
24V IC22A
8

R419 R418 BR62 1.5KJX4 R413 KIA393F

NM_10KJ NM_10KJ TP781 IC21 NM_10KJ R108 TP436
(2) CPFS1 1 8 3 +
2 7 TP437 1 16 TP438 D1 1
(2) CPFS2 1B 1C /CPFS1 (12) FTH
3 6 TP439 2 15 2
(2) MPFS 2B 2C /CPFS2 (12) -
TP784 4 5 TP440 3 14 NM_47KJ
(2) RRS 3B 3C /MPFS (12)
TP441 R112
4

4 13 /RRS (12) MA700

TP723 R379 NM_1.5KJ TP442 4B 4C TP443 TP444 Q2 R106 R107 12V
(2) VFM_24V 5 5B 5C 12
TP722 R380 NM_1.5KJ TP445 6 11 NM_KTA1505S 10KF 4.3KF
(2) VFMCNT_12V 6B 6C /VFMCNT (12)
TP446 7 10 TP447 NM_4.7KJ1/4W<3216> C111
7B 7C
8 E COM 9 VFMOUT (12)
0.1U/50V<1608>
KID65001AF
D4
PGND 24V
1SS355
CP16 VCC3 VCC3
R388 47KJ
TP448
D2 D3
1 12V 1
0603SFF150FM/32-2
3 3

E
3 Q16 R386 Q12 PGND 2 2 3
3 TP449 TP450 B 2SB1132
NM_KDS226 KDS226
2 4.7KJ1/4W<3216>
8

IC53A

C
D57 D55
R113 R114
TP451 3 TP452 300J 100J
(12) RTH_IN +
1 RTH (1)
2 TP453
RLS-73 CRH01 -
KRC102S 12V KIA358F-EL/P C113

1
4

CP17 12V
R389 47KJ C112
TP454 22000P 0.1U
C118
0603SFF150FM/32-2
0.1U/50V<1608>

E
Q17 R387 Q13
3 TP455 TP456 B 2SB1132

2 4.7KJ1/4W<3216>

C
D58 D56 VCC3 12V VCC3
TP457

KRC102S RLS-73 CRH01 R118 R124

1
VCC3 1.2KF 4.7KJ
PGND IC22B
8

KIA393F
TP458 5
INT5V +
7 THOPEN (3)
R414 6 -
NM_10KJ
Q14
4

3 D5 R123 C119
/MMCLK (12)
10KF
1SS355 22000P
(1) MMCLK 2
TP459
R90 R296 Q3

1
10KJ 10KJ KRA119S
R142
NM_10KJ IC24
2 KRC102S TP800 2

1
(2) MMD 1 1B 1C 16 /MMD (12)
TP795 2 15 TP802
(2) MRPS1 2B 2C MRPS_1 (7)
TP793 3 14 TP803 2
(2) MRPS2 3B 3C MRPS_2 (7)
TP794 TP804

AR-208S/208D CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 14 - 6

(2) MRPS3 4 4B 4C 13 MRPS_3 (7) LCD Contrast Buffer
5 12 3 TP460 VCC3 VCC3
(1) POFF 5B 5C /POFF (11)
6 11 TP461 EN5V
(2) HL 6B 6C D66 D67
TP801 7 10
5V FTH 7B 7C VCC3
8 G NC 9 1 1
3 3
IC27 KID65503F 2 2
1 16 TP805
MM_Y1 1B 1C MMref0 (7)
2 15 TP806 R117 R115 NM_KDS226 KDS226
MM_Y2 2B 2C MMref1 (7)
3 14 TP807 10KJ 100J1/4W<3216> R316
MM_Y3 3B 3C MMref2 (7)
TP798 4 13 Q4 NM
PMD 4B 4C /PMD (11)
5 12 3 TP553
PMCLK 5B 5C PMCLK_A (11) SHOLD (11) (LCDCONT) (11)
TP797 6 11 IC45A R393 R394
8

LDEN 6B 6C /LDEN (11)

TP799 7 10 TP464 2 R264 0J NM
E

/LEND 7B 7C TP469 Q15

8 G NC 9 (1) LCDCONT 3 +
HLOUT (11) 1 B
KID65503F 2 TP472 TP473 NM_2SB1197K
12KF -
R116 R308
C

10KJ KIA358F-EL/P NM
4

KRC102S R368 R307 TP476

1
7.5KF C398
NM EN5V C407 R383
NM NM 0.1U
C305

0.1U

INT24V

5V 12V VCC3
Analog Tonner Sensor Buffer
D45
D59 D60
1SS355
5V 1 1
TP466 3 3
Q20 EN5V

1
2 2
KRA119S
1 R129 NM_KDS226 NM_KDS226 1
NM
8

IC45B
Q21
8

IC53B
3 2 5 R366 0J R381
R339 R304 +
TP467 7 TP470 5 NM
(16) TCS_AN +
PR# 2 3 /PR 6 TP463 7 TP465
PR /PR (11) - (TCS_AN) (1)
TP474 TP475 6 -
KIA358F-EL/P
4

100J 100J KIA358F-EL/P

4

D61 R378 R382 C371

1SS355
KRC102S 0J 10KJ NM

1
PGND

A B C D E
 A B C D E

MCU PWB (Driver section 3) 7/16

Scanner Motor Driver

(12) OUT_A-
4 (12) OUT_A+ 4
(12) OUT_B+
24VSCMT 5V
(12) OUT_B- Duplex Motor Driver
R143
R144 IC31
(1) DMT0 3 I1 O1 2 /DMT0 (12)
0.68J 1W TP477 4
0.68J 1W TP478 R145 TP479 NC
IC32 5 NC O2 7 /DMT1 (12)
R146 1.5KJ 6
(1) DMT1 I2
1.5KJ 1 24 TP480 10 9
OUT 1A VS NC O3 /DMT2 (12)
2 OUT 2A SENSE 1 23 (1) DMT2 11 I3
3 22 TP481 TP482 12 16
SENSE 2 COMP 1 NC O4 /DMT3 (12)
TP483 4 21 TP484 13
COMP 2 OUT 1B C133 NC
5 OUT 2B I01 20 MM_AI0 (2) (1) DMT3 14 I4
C134 6 19 820P PGND TP485 15 24VDupMT
PGND 820P GND GND NC
7 GND GND 18
D8
(2) MM_BI0 8 I02 I11 17 MM_AI1 (2) 17 GND COM 1
(2) MM_BI1 9 I12 PHASE 1 16 MM_PH_A (2) 18 GND COM 8
5V 10 15
(2) MM_PH_B PHASE 2 VREF 1
11 14 TP487 TD62064AF
TP488 VREF 2 RC 1 MTZ J22B
12 RC 2 VSS 13
R147
1KJ L6219DS PGND
C135 R148 R149 C136
820P 30KJ 30KJ 820P
TP489

R150 R151 R152 C137 PGND 5V PGND

2KJ 1KJ 510J 0.1U
PGND PGND

C138
(6) MMref0
0.1U
(6) MMref1
(6) MMref2
PGND

PGND
Shifter Motor Driver
3 3
IC33
(3) SFTMT0 3 I1 O1 2 /SFTMT0 (12)
TP491 4
TP492 NC
SPF Motor Driver 5 NC O2 7 /SFTMT1 (12)
(3) SFTMT1 6 I2
TP494 10 9
NC O3 /SFTMT2 (12)
(3) SFTMT2 11 I3
24VSPFMT TP496 12 16
NC O4 /SFTMT3 (12)
TP497 13
24V NC
IC34 (3) SFTMT3 14 I4
CP1 TP499 15 24VSFTMT
0603SFF150FM/32-2 NC
(5) (SPFMT0) 8 IN A Vs 13
D9
(5) (SPFMT2) 7 IN A/ 24VSCMT 17 GND COM 1
(5) (SPFMT1) 11 IN B OUT A 1 SPMT_0 (11) 18 GND COM 8
12 2 CP2
(5) (SPFMT3) IN B/ OUT A
3 0603SFF150FM/32-2 TD62064AF
OUT A/ SPMT_2 (11)
9 4 C139 + C140 MTZ J22B

4
3
2
1
REF OUT A/ 24VSPFMT
17 47U/35V 0.1U/50V
OUT B SPMT_1 (11)
BR66 6 18 <1608> CP3 PGND
Sync OUT B 0603SFF150FM/32-2
10KJX4 OUT B/ 15 SPMT_3 (11)
5 Sense A OUT B/ 16 24VDupMT

5
6
7
8
14 Sense B GND 10

STA7100M PGND

5V CP5
0603SFF150FM/32-2
R157 R158
24VSPFSOL
1J 2W 1J 2W
CP6
R159 0603SFF150FM/32-2
1.2KJ
24VSFTMT

RSPF Solenoid Driver

2 2

AR-208S/208D CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 14 - 7

PGND
R160 R161 R162 R163
300J 620J 1.2KJ 100J C141
24VSPFSOL
0.1U D41 D42 D43
1SS355 1SS355 1SS355
(6) MRPS_1
(6) MRPS_2
(6) MRPS_3
PGND PGND PGND

/RSV_SOL (11)
TP501 R275 TP504
Q25
(3) (RSV_SOL)
NM_2SD1781K
NM_1.2KJ
R406
NM_10KJ
Tonner Motor Driver
/SRVC (11)
TP502 R403 TP505
Q24
(3) SRVC
2SD1781K
5V 24V
1.2KJ R407
10KJ

R309
/SPUS (11)
NM_0J <1608> R312 TP503 R404 TP506
0J <1608> C143 C142 + Q23
(3) SPUS
R164 10U/35V 2SD1781K
4.7KJ 0.1U/50V<1608>
1.2KJ R408
IC36
10KJ
2 Vcc Vs 6

(5) (TM) 9 IN1 Vref 8

(5) (TM_) 1 IN2 OUT1 7 TMA_O (12)

1 5 3 TMB_O (12)
1
GND OUT2

N.C 4
C145
0.1U/50V<1608> PGND
TA7291AS

C144
NM_10U/10V<2012>

PGND

A B C D E
 A B C D E

MCU PWB (Noise filter/Pull-up section) 8/16

VCC3
5V
VCC3

4 C146 C147 C148 C149 C150 C151 C152 C153 C154 D10 D11 D12 D13
4
1 1 1 1
0.1U NM 0.1U 0.1U NM NM NM NM NM 3 3 3 3
2 2 2 2 R167 R168 R169 R170 R171 R172 R173 R174
15KJ 15KJ 15KJ 4.7KJ 4.7KJ 4.7KJ 15KJ 4.7KJ
KDS226 KDS226 KDS226 KDS226
INT24V
C155 C156 C157 C158 C159 C160 C161
R175
NM NM NM NM NM 0.1U 0.1U R176 1KJ
(12) 24V1(DSWS) (11) SCOD (SCOD) (3)
R177 1KJ
(11) SPID (SPID) (3)
0.22J 2W R178 1KJ
(11) SRJD (SRJD) (3)
R179 R180 1KJ
(12) PPD3 (PPD3) (3)
D14 1KJ 2W R181 1KJ
(12) PD1 (PD1) (3)
C162 C163 C164 C165 C166 C167 C168 C169 C170 1SS355 R182 1KJ
(12) PD2 (PD2) (3)
0.1U 0.1U 0.1U 0.1U 0.1U 0.1U 0.1U 0.1U NM R183 1KJ
(12) POD (POD) (3)
R184 1KJ
(11) PMRDY (PMRDY) (3)
PGND PGND
5V

D15 D16 D17 D18 C171 C172 C173 C174 C175 C176 C177 C178
1 1 1 1
3 3 3 3 1000P 1000P 1000P 1000P 1000P 1000P 1000P 1000P
D19 2 2 2 2
1SS355 5V KDS226 KDS226 KDS226 KDS226

D20
1
TP508 3
2

R185 R186 KDS226

20KJ 20KJ

DSWS (3) VCC3

3 5V
3
VCC3 R187 C179
2.7KJ
0.1U

D21 D22 D37

1 1 1
3 3 3
2 2 2 R188 R189 R190 R191 R340 R377
R192 R193 R194 R195 R196 R197 1KJ 1KJ 15KJ 4.7KJ 4.7KJ 4.7KJ
10J 10J 10J 10J 10J 10J KDS226 KDS226 KDS226

TP509 TP510 TP511 TP512 TP513 TP514

R305 100J TP831 R198 1KJ
TP515 TP516 TP517 TP518 (16) DVSEL DVS1 (3)
C180 C181 C182 C183 C184 C185 R306 100J TP830 R199 1KJ
(16) TCS (TCS) (3)
R200 1KJ
(12) MFD (MFD) (3)
1000P 1000P 1000P 1000P 1000P 1000P R201 1KJ

1
1
1
1
(12) MMLD (MMLD) (3)
R367 1KJ
(12) FANLK (FANLK) (3)
R372 1KJ
(12) PSFANLK (PSFANLK) (1)
VCC3
R202 R203 R204 R205 C186 C187 C188 C189 C372 C380
0J 0J 0J 0J D23 D24 D54
1 1 1 1000P 1000P 1000P 1000P 1000P 1000P
3 3 3

UDZS3.9B
UDZS3.9B
2 2 2

D63
D62
KDS226 KDS226 KDS226

2 2
D25 5V VCC3

AR-208S/208D CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 14 - 8

1SS355
INT24V

24V
R206
100J 2W IC37
C191 R125 D26 D27 D28 D29
C190 + 100KJ 1 3 1 1 1
IN OUT INT5V 1
0.1U/50V<1608> 3 3 3 3
47U/35V 2 2 2 R207 R208 R209 R210 R211 R212 R213
GND 2
15KJ 15KJ 4.7KJ 4.7KJ 4.7KJ 12KJ 3.3KJ
C192 + C193 KDS226 KDS226 KDS226 KDS226
2 KIA7805
PGND
47U/35V 0.1U

R214 1KJ
(12) PPD1 (PPD1) (3)
FB4 R215 1KJ
(12) PPD2 (PPD2) (3)
0J <1608> R216 1KJ
(11) SPPD (SPPD) (1)
R217 1KJ
(11) PSW (PSW) (1)
FB5
L4 NM_0J <1608>
NM_ZJSR5101-223TA
R218 1KJ
(11) 12VIN 12V (12) CED1 (CED1) (3)
L5 R219 1KJ
(12) CED2 (CED2) (3)
ZJSR5101-223TA R220 1KJ
(11) DRST (DRST) (3)
C194 + C196 R126
(11) 3.3VIN VCC3 5V VCC3
100KJ
47U/25V 0.1U/50V<1608>
C195 + C197 R128
100KJ C198 C199 C200 C201 C202 C203
22U/16V 0.1U D30 D31 D32
1 1 1000P 1000P 1000P 1000P 1 1000P 1000P
3 3 3
2 2 2

KDS226 KDS226 KDS226

5V
1 1
C204 + C206 R127
EN5V
100KJ
22U/16V 0.1U
C205 + C207 R130
100KJ
22U/16V 0.1U

A B C D E
 A B C D E

MCU PWB (IMC2 section 1/2) IC38

9/16
_SDRAM_DATA[15:0]
SDRAM_ADDR[12:0]
TP519 119 74 SDRAM_DATA0 TP520 1 BR67 8 100JX4 _SDRAM_DATA0
TP521 PI_LINE_SYNC/GP_D6 SDRAM_DATA0 SDRAM_DATA1 TP522 _SDRAM_DATA1
120 PI_TR_TGEN SDRAM_DATA1 73 2 7
TP523 124 72 SDRAM_DATA2 TP524 3 6 _SDRAM_DATA2
PI_TGEN6 SDRAM_DATA2 IC39 _SDRAM_DATA[15:0]
TP525 125 68 SDRAM_DATA3 TP526 4 5 _SDRAM_DATA3
(2) /PIWR PI_TGEN5 SDRAM_DATA3
TP527 126 67 SDRAM_DATA4 TP528 1 BR68 8 100JX4 _SDRAM_DATA4
TP529 PI_TGEN4 SDRAM_DATA4 SDRAM_DATA5 TP530 _SDRAM_DATA5 SDRAM_ADDR1 _SDRAM_DATA0
(2) /PIACK 127 PI_TGEN3 SDRAM_DATA5 66 2 7 25 A0 IO0 29
TP531 128 65 SDRAM_DATA6 TP532 3 6 _SDRAM_DATA6 SDRAM_ADDR2 24 31 _SDRAM_DATA1
(2) PIDATA[7..0] (2) /PIREQ PI_TGEN2 SDRAM_DATA6 A1 IO1
TP533 129 63 SDRAM_DATA7 TP534 4 5 _SDRAM_DATA7 SDRAM_ADDR3 23 33 _SDRAM_DATA2
TP535 PI_TGEN1 SDRAM_DATA7 SDRAM_DATA8 TP536 _SDRAM_DATA8 SDRAM_ADDR4 A2 IO2 _SDRAM_DATA3
131 PI_TGEN0 SDRAM_DATA8 62 1 BR69 8 100JX4 22 A3 IO3 35
PIDATA7 TP537 132 61 SDRAM_DATA9 TP538 2 7 _SDRAM_DATA9 SDRAM_ADDR5 21 38 _SDRAM_DATA4
PIDATA6 TP539 PI_DATA7 SDRAM_DATA9 SDRAM_DATA10 TP540 _SDRAM_DATA10 SDRAM_ADDR6 A4 IO4 _SDRAM_DATA5
4 133 PI_DATA6 SDRAM_DATA10 60 3 6 20 A5 IO5 40 4
PIDATA5 TP541 134 58 SDRAM_DATA11 TP542 4 5 _SDRAM_DATA11 SDRAM_ADDR7 19 42 _SDRAM_DATA6
PIDATA4 TP543 PI_DATA5 SDRAM_DATA11 SDRAM_DATA12 TP544 _SDRAM_DATA12 SDRAM_ADDR8 A6 IO6 _SDRAM_DATA7 VCC3
135 PI_DATA4 SDRAM_DATA12 57 1 BR70 8 100JX4 18 A7 IO7 44
PIDATA3 TP545 137 56 SDRAM_DATA13 TP546 2 7 _SDRAM_DATA13 SDRAM_ADDR9 8 30 TP809
PIDATA2 TP547 PI_DATA3 SDRAM_DATA13 SDRAM_DATA14 TP548 _SDRAM_DATA14 SDRAM_ADDR10 A8 IO8 TP810
138 PI_DATA2 SDRAM_DATA14 55 3 6 7 A9 IO9 32 SDRAM_ADDR[12:0]
PIDATA1 TP549 141 53 SDRAM_DATA15 TP550 4 5 _SDRAM_DATA15 SDRAM_ADDR11 6 34 TP901 R346
PIDATA0 TP551 PI_DATA1 SDRAM_DATA15 SDRAM_ADDR12 A10 IO10 TP902
142 PI_DATA0 SDRAM_BANK[1:0] 5 A11 IO11 36
109 SDRAM_DQMA0 TP552 1 BR71 8 33JX4 _SDRAM_DQMA0 TP730 SDRAM_BANK0 4 39 TP909 10KJ VCC3
SDRAM_DQMA0 SDRAM_DQMB0 TP554 _SDRAM_DQMB0 TP731 SDRAM_BANK1 A12 IO12 TP910
(12) OA_RX 143 PP_HIDRIVE/USART1_RX SDRAM_DQMB0 107 2 7 3 A13 IO13 41
VCC3 145 106 SDRAM_DQMA1 TP556 3 6 _SDRAM_DQMA1 TP732 SDRAM_WE_L 2 43 TP911
(12) OA_TX RY_BY TP557 PP_DRIVE/USART1_TX SDRAM_DQMA1 SDRAM_DQMB1 TP558 _SDRAM_DQMB1 TP733 SDRAM_CAS_L A14 IO14 SDRAM_ADDR0 R221
146 PP_NINIT SDRAM_DQMB1 105 4 5 _SDRAM_DATA[15:0] 1 A15 IO15/A-1 45
R351 10KJ RY_BY TP559 147 SDRAM_RAS_L 48
TP560 PP_NFAULT SDRAM_CS0_L TP561 R222 33J _SDRAM_CS0_L _SDRAM_DQMB0 A16 NM
151 PP_NSELECTIN SDRAM_CS0_L 104 17 A17
TP562 152 102 SDRAM_CS1A_L TP563 R390 33J _SDRAM_CS1A_L _SDRAM_DQMB1 16
TP564 PP_NAUTOFD SDRAM_CS1A_L TP565 _SDRAM_DATA8 A18
153 PP_SELECT SDRAM_CS1B_L 77 9 A19 VCCW 13 VPP (4)
TP566 154 75 TP567 R225 33J ROM_CS_L TP808 10
TP568 PP_PERROR ROM_CS_L A20
155 PP_BUSY
TP569 156 111 TP570 R227 33J SDRAM_WE_L _SDRAM_DQMA1 11
TP571 PP_NACK SDRAM_WE_L TP572 R228 33J SDRAM_CAS_L _SDRAM_DQMA0 WE VCC3 C208
157 PP_DATA7 SDRAM_CAS_L 110 28 OE
TP573 159 101 TP574 R229 33J SDRAM_RAS_L VCC3 ROM_CS_L 26 37 NM
TP575 PP_DATA6 SDRAM_RAS_L TP728 CE VCC
160 PP_DATA5 SDRAM_ADDR[12:0]
TP576 161 100 TP577 BR72 1 8 33JX4 SDRAM_ADDR0 RY_BY 15 C209
TP578 PP_DATA4 SDRAM_ADDR0 TP579 SDRAM_ADDR1 RY/BY 0.1U
162 PP_DATA3 SDRAM_ADDR1 99 2 7
TP580 163 97 TP581 3 6 SDRAM_ADDR2 47
PP_DATA2 SDRAM_ADDR2 BYTE

10KJ
TP582 165 96 TP583 4 5 SDRAM_ADDR3 TP744 14 46

NM
TP584 PP_DATA1/USART1_CK SDRAM_ADDR3 TP585 BR73 33JX4 SDRAM_ADDR4 TP745 WP/ACC GND
166 PP_DATA0 SDRAM_ADDR4 95 1 8 12 RESET GND 27
TP586 167 94 TP587 2 7 SDRAM_ADDR5
PP_NSTROBE SDRAM_ADDR5 TP588 SDRAM_ADDR6
SDRAM_ADDR6 92 3 6
TP589 168 91 TP590 4 5 SDRAM_ADDR7
TP591 BASE_CLK/GP_PWM1 SDRAM_ADDR7 TP592 BR74 33JX4 SDRAM_ADDR8
CLK_EXT 169 CLK_EXT/GP_PWM2 SDRAM_ADDR8 90 1 8 8M/16M Flash ROM
TP593 TP594 SDRAM_ADDR9

R230
R231
170 MAIN_CLK/GP_PWM0 SDRAM_ADDR9 89 2 7
85 TP595 3 6 SDRAM_ADDR10
TP596 SDRAM_ADDR10 TP597 SDRAM_ADDR11 R232 NM
(13) PB_NCS1 178 REG_A9/PB_NCS1 SDRAM_ADDR11 82 4 5 (2,4,5,12) /RESET0
TP598 180 80 TP599 BR75 1 8 33JX4 SDRAM_ADDR12
(10,13) PB_DATA[7:0] REG_A8/PB_NCS2 SDRAM_ADDR12
PB_DATA7 BR76 1 33JX4 8 TP600 181 TP601 2 7

NM
REG_AD7/PB_DATA7 SDRAM_BANK[1:0]
PB_DATA6 2 7 TP602 182 84 TP603 3 6 SDRAM_BANK0
REG_AD6/PB_DATA6 SDRAM_BANK0

22000P
PB_DATA5 3 6 TP604 183 83 TP605 4 5 SDRAM_BANK1
PB_DATA4 TP606 REG_AD5/PB_DATA5 SDRAM_BANK1
4 5 185 REG_AD4/PB_DATA4
PB_DATA3 BR77 1 8 TP607 186 79 TP608 R234 33J _SDRAM_CLK
REG_AD3/PB_DATA3 SDRAM_CLK _SDRAM_CLK
PB_DATA2 2 7 TP609 187 78 SDRAM_CKE TP610 R235 33J _SDRAM_CKE
PB_DATA1 TP611 REG_AD2/PB_DATA2 SDRAM_CKE R236 4.7KJ
3 6 188 REG_AD1/PB_DATA1
PB_DATA0 TP612

R233
C210
3 4 5 189 REG_AD0/PB_DATA0
3
33JX4 TP613 190
TP614 REG_ADDR_VALID/PB_NCS0 OA3.3V
(10) PB_NCS3 194 REG_RD_L/PB_NCS3
TP615 195 7 C211
(5,10) PB_NAE0 REG_WR_L/PB_NAE0 PLLCS_VDDA
TP616 196 NM
TP617 REG_CS_L/PB_NAE1
(5,10) PB_NWE 197 REG_RDY/PB_NWE
TP618 198 C212 C213 IC40
(5,10) PB_NOE INTERRUPT_L/PB_NOE SDRAM_ADDR[12:0]
0.01U 1U<2012>
(10,13) PB_ADDR[7:0] _SDRAM_DATA[15:0]
PB_ADDR0 BR78 1 33JX4 8 TP619 199 6 SDRAM_ADDR0 TP764 23 2 _SDRAM_DATA0 TP748
PB_ADDR1 TP620 GP_C0/PB_ADDR0 PLLCS_VSSA SDRAM_ADDR1 TP765 A0 DQ0 _SDRAM_DATA1 TP749
2 7 201 GP_C1/PB_ADDR1 24 A1 DQ1 4
PB_ADDR2 3 6 TP621 202 SDRAM_ADDR2 TP766 25 5 _SDRAM_DATA2 TP750
PB_ADDR3 TP622 GP_C2/PB_ADDR2 SDRAM_ADDR3 TP767 A2 DQ2 _SDRAM_DATA3 TP751
4 5 203 GP_C3/PB_ADDR3 26 A3 DQ3 7
PB_ADDR4 BR79 1 8 TP623 204 SDRAM_ADDR4 TP768 29 8 _SDRAM_DATA4 TP752
PB_ADDR5 TP624 GP_C4/PB_ADDR4 SDRAM_ADDR5 TP769 A4 DQ4 _SDRAM_DATA5 TP753
2 7 205 GP_C5/PB_ADDR5 30 A5 DQ5 10
PB_ADDR6 3 6 TP625 207 SDRAM_ADDR6 TP770 31 11 _SDRAM_DATA6 TP754
PB_ADDR7 TP626 GP_C6/PB_ADDR6 SDRAM_ADDR7 TP771 A6 DQ6 _SDRAM_DATA7 TP755
4 5 208 GP_C7/PB_ADDR7 PLLSS_VDDA 149 32 A7 DQ7 13
33JX4 SDRAM_ADDR8 TP772 33 42 _SDRAM_DATA8 TP756
SDRAM_ADDR9 TP773 A8 DQ8 _SDRAM_DATA9 TP757
(1) ES_CMD 1 GP_B0/USART0_TX 34 A9 DQ9 44
2 C214 C215 SDRAM_ADDR10 TP774 22 45 _SDRAM_DATA10 TP758
(1) ES_STS GP_B1/USART0_RX A10 DQ10
TP629 8 0.01U 1U<2012> SDRAM_ADDR11 TP775 35 47 _SDRAM_DATA11 TP759
GP_B2/USART0_CK SDRAM_ADDR12 TP776 A11 DQ11 _SDRAM_DATA12 TP760
(1,5) (FW) 9 GP_B3/ANA_SD1 PLLSS_VSSA 148 SDRAM_BANK[1:0] 36 A12 DQ12 48
TP631 11 SDRAM_BANK0 TP777 20 50 _SDRAM_DATA13 TP761
(10) DT_ACKB GP_B4/DT_ACKB BA0 DQ13
TP632 12 SDRAM_BANK1 TP778 21 51 _SDRAM_DATA14 TP762
(10) DT_REQB GP_B5/DT_REQB BA1 DQ14
TP633 13 53 _SDRAM_DATA15 TP763
TP634 GP_B6/DT_ACKA OA3.3V TP788 _SDRAM_CS0_L DQ15
(13) MODEM_IN 14 GP_B7/DT_REQA 19 CS
3 TP787 SDRAM_WE_L 16
VDD_IO TP780 SDRAM_CAS_L WE VCC3
(1) /ES_PAGE 15 GP_D0/ADC_A0 VDD_IO 20 17 CAS
16 25 TP779 SDRAM_RAS_L 18 49
(3) /ES_CRDY GP_D1/ADC_A1 VDD_IO RAS VDDQ
19 33 43 VCC3
(1) /ES_SRDY GP_D2/ADC_A2 VDD_IO VDDQ
TP638 21 46 _SDRAM_CLK TP791 38 9
(10) WAKEUP GP_D3/ADC_CLK VDD_IO _SDRAM_CLK CLK VDDQ
TP639 22 59 TP796 _SDRAM_CKE 37 3
TP640 GP_D4/ADC_DATA VDD_IO VCC3 CKE VDDQ
(12) OA982_READY 23 GP_D5/ADC_NCS VDD_IO 71
81 OA3.3V _SDRAM_DQMA0 15 27
VDD_IO _SDRAM_DQMA1 LDQM VDD
(2) /IMC_READY 24 GP_A0 VDD_IO 93 39 UDQM VDD 14
TP642 26 103 FB6 1 C235 C236 C237 C238
(13) MDM_IRQ GP_A1 VDD_IO VDD
TP643 28 115 0J <1608> 0.1U 0.1U 0.1U 0.1U
(10) SUSPEND(USB2.0) GP_A2/DC_CHY1 VDD_IO
TP644 29 130
TP645 GP_A3/DC_CHX1 VDD_IO C397 C396 C395 C217 C239
(2) /SC_LINE 30 GP_A4/DC_PWM1 VDD_IO 144 VSSQ 52
TP646 31 158 10U/10V<2012> 10U/10V<2012> 10U/10V<2012> 10U/10V<2012> L6 NM 46
(10) INT_USBD GP_A5/DC_CHY0 VDD_IO VSSQ
TP647 32 171 NM_ZJSR5101-223TA 12
(2) /PR_LINE GP_A6/DC_CHX0 VDD_IO VSSQ
R238 /FPOFF TP648 34 184 6
2 (2) /FPOFF GP_A7/DC_PWM0 VDD_IO VSSQ 2
C216 200 C248 C249 C250
NM 10KJ VDD_IO 0.1U 0.1U 0.1U
(2) /H_SYNC 37 PO_LINE_SYNC/ANA_SCLK VSS 54
TP650 38 41
TP651 PO_PAGE_SYNC/ANA_NCS OA3.3V C218 C219 C220 C221 C222 C223 C224 C225 C226 TP912 VSS
(2) /POREQ 39 PO_REQ/ANA_SD0 40 N.C VSS 28
TP652 40 18 0.1U 0.1U 0.1U 0.1U 0.1U 0.1U 0.1U 0.1U 0.1U

AR-208S/208D CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 14 - 9

(2) /POACK PO_ACK/PDATA0/PDS0 VDD_CORE
TP653 42 36
/FPOFF R239 10KJ 33JX4 TP654 PO_DONE/PDATA2/PDS2 VDD_CORE HY57V561620FTP-H-C
43 PO_WR/PDATA1/PDS1 VDD_CORE 70
PODATA7 1 8 TP655 44 88
PODATA6 TP656 PO_DATA7/LHEAT/PAS_M VDD_CORE
2 7 45 PO_DATA6/LCTRL/CFIRE2 VDD_CORE 122
PODATA5 3 6 TP657 47 140
PODATA4 TP658 PO_DATA5/AGATE/CFIRE1 VDD_CORE
4 5 48 PO_DATA4/ACLK/MFIRE2 VDD_CORE 174
PODATA3 BR80 1 8 TP659 49 192
PODATA2 TP660 PO_DATA3/PENABLE/MFIRE1 VDD_CORE C227 C228 C229 C230 C231 C232 C233 C234
2 7 50 PO_DATA2/PLOAD
PODATA1 3 6 TP661 51 0.1U 0.1U 0.1U 0.1U 0.1U 0.1U 0.1U 0.1U IC44
PO_DATA1/PCLK SDRAM_ADDR[12:0]
PODATA0 4 5 TP662 52 PO_DATA0/PDATA3/PAS_C _SDRAM_DATA[15:0]
BR81 10 SDRAM_ADDR0 23 2 _SDRAM_DATA0
33JX4 TP663 VSS_IO SDRAM_ADDR1 A0 DQ0 _SDRAM_DATA1
175 USB_DM VSS_IO 27 24 A1 DQ1 4
TP664 176 41 SDRAM_ADDR2 25 5 _SDRAM_DATA2
(2) PODATA[7..0] USB_DP VSS_IO A2 DQ2
54 SDRAM_ADDR3 26 7 _SDRAM_DATA3

12P
12P
12P
12P
12P
12P
12P
12P
VSS_IO SDRAM_ADDR4 A3 DQ3 _SDRAM_DATA4
VSS_IO 64 29 A4 DQ4 8
76 SDRAM_ADDR5 30 10 _SDRAM_DATA5
VSS_IO C240 C241 C242 C243 C244 C245 C246 C247 SDRAM_ADDR6 A5 DQ5 _SDRAM_DATA6
VSS_IO 86 31 A6 DQ6 11
98 0.1U 0.1U 0.1U 0.1U 0.1U 0.1U 0.1U 0.1U SDRAM_ADDR7 32 13 _SDRAM_DATA7
VSS_IO SDRAM_ADDR8 A7 DQ7 _SDRAM_DATA8

C366
C362
C381
C382
C383
C384
C385
C386
VSS_IO 108 33 A8 DQ8 42
(5,10) /OP_RST R137 TP665 112 123 SDRAM_ADDR9 34 44 _SDRAM_DATA9
33J C100 TDO RESET_L VSS_IO SDRAM_ADDR10 A9 DQ9 _SDRAM_DATA10
(12) TDO 113 TDO VSS_IO 136 22 A10 DQ10 45
(1) /RES_OA982 R138 1000P (12) TCK TCK 114 150 SDRAM_ADDR11 35 47 _SDRAM_DATA11
NM TMS TCK VSS_IO SDRAM_ADDR12 A11 DQ11 _SDRAM_DATA12
(12) TRST_L (12) TMS 116 TMS VSS_IO 164 SDRAM_BANK[1:0] 36 A12 DQ12 48
(12) TDI TDI 117 179 SDRAM_BANK0 20 50 _SDRAM_DATA13
R343 NM_0J TRST_L TP666 TDI VSS_IO SDRAM_BANK1 BA0 DQ13 _SDRAM_DATA14
(2,4,5,12) /RESET0 118 TRST_L VSS_IO 193 21 BA1 DQ14 51
VCC3 206 VCC3 53 _SDRAM_DATA15
R342 4.7KJ R245 NM TP667 VSS_IO TP925 _SDRAM_CS1A_L DQ15
172 TEST_MODE0 19 CS
R246 NM TP668 177 _SDRAM_DATA0 BR82 1 8 10KJX4 SDRAM_WE_L 16
TEST_MODE1 _SDRAM_DATA1 SDRAM_CAS_L WE VCC3
2 7 17 CAS
R247 4.7KJ 17 _SDRAM_DATA2 3 6 SDRAM_RAS_L 18 49
R248 4.7KJ VSS_CORE _SDRAM_DATA3 RAS VDDQ VCC3
VSS_CORE 35 4 5 VDDQ 43
69 _SDRAM_DATA4 BR83 1 8 10KJX4 _SDRAM_CLK TP926 38 9
VSS_CORE _SDRAM_CLK CLK VDDQ
87 _SDRAM_DATA5 2 7 _SDRAM_CKE 37 3
VSS_CORE _SDRAM_DATA6 CKE VDDQ
VSS_CORE 121 3 6
VCC3 139 _SDRAM_DATA7 4 5 _SDRAM_DQMA0 15 27
VSS_CORE _SDRAM_DATA8 10KJX4 _SDRAM_DQMA1 LDQM VDD
5 XIN VSS_CORE 173 BR84 1 8 39 UDQM VDD 14
1 R240 10KJ TDO C252 X4 4 191 _SDRAM_DATA9 2 7 1 C300 C299 C302 C301 1
R241 10KJ TCK 33P AT-49(18.3856MHz) XOUT VSS_CORE _SDRAM_DATA10 VDD 0.1U 0.1U 0.1U 0.1U
3 6
R242 10KJ TMS R249 0J XIN TP669 _SDRAM_DATA11 4 5
R243 10KJ TDI XOUT OA-982 _SDRAM_DATA12 BR85 1 8 10KJX4 C265 52
R244 NM_10KJ TRST_L _SDRAM_DATA13 NM VSSQ
2 7 VSSQ 46
R369 _SDRAM_DATA14 3 6 12
C254 _SDRAM_DATA15 VSSQ
NM 4 5 VSSQ 6
33P C256 C263 C264
54 0.1U 0.1U 0.1U
C303 VSS
VSS 41
CLK_EXT _SDRAM_CS1A_L NM TP930 40 28
CLK_EXT N.C VSS
R250 C251
4.7KJ _SDRAM_CS0_L NM HY57V561620FTP-H-C

C253
_SDRAM_CKE 47P

A B C D E
 A B C D E

MCU PWB (IMC2 USB2.0 section 2/2) 10/16

ISP33
VCC3

4 0J <1608> 4
L11
C257 C258 C259 C260
0.01U 0.01U 0.01U 0.01U
C270 C271
0.1U 0.1U

ISP33
GND
FG
GND
C266 C267 C268 C269
0.1U 0.1U 0.1U 0.1U
VCC3
GND
ISP33 TP670 0J <1608>
L13
C272 C273
15P 18P

X6
C262
C261 0.1U
10U/10V<2012>
AT-49(12MHz)

R399

0.1U
TP907

VCC3 C406

C403
100KJ

0.1U
3 10U/10V<2012> 3
C404 R111 TP783
PB_ADDR[7:0] (9,13)
1U<2012> 1MF R253 PB_ADDR7 TP700
VCC3 1.2KJ PB_ADDR6 TP699

C405
PB_ADDR5 TP698
R254 PB_ADDR4 TP697
NM TP871 PB_ADDR3 TP696

TP677

(9) WAKEUP
R257
(9) SUSPEND(USB2.0)
10KJ
VCC3 VCC3
FG R267 R260 R261

64
63
62
61
60
59
58
57
56
55
54
53
52
51
50
49

NM_<1608> 10KJ 10KJ IC41

TP880 R262
R255
1.5KJ
VBUS

CN1 10KJ
DGND
XTAL1
XTAL2
DATA15
DATA14
DATA13
DATA12
DATA11

VCC1V8

UBR23-4K2200 C274
VCC(I/O)

WAKEUP
VCC(3V3)

SUSPEND

L7 5 0.01U L8 DLW21SN900SQ2 1 48 PB_ADDR2 TP695

SHIELD AGND DATA10
MODE0/DA1

4 TP704 2 47 PB_ADDR1 TP694

BLM21PG600SN1 GND TP706 RPU DATA9 PB_ADDR0 TP693
3 3 46
BUS_CONF/DA0

+D DP DATA8 PB_DATA[7:0] (9,13)

2 TP705 4 45 PB_DATA7 TP692
-D DM DATA7 PB_DATA6 TP691
+5V 1 5 AGND DATA6 44
TP709 6 43 PB_DATA5 TP690
R139 TP702 RREF DATA5 PB_DATA4 TP689
(5,9) /OP_RST 7 RESET_N DATA4 42
33J 8 41
R310 EOT VCC(I/O) PB_DATA3 TP688
USB2.0 DEV1 (1) /RES_USB20 (9) DT_REQB 9 DREQ DATA3 40
R272 NM R273 10 ISP1583BS 39 PB_DATA2 TP687
(9) DT_ACKB DACK DATA2
C101 PB_NOE 11 38 PB_DATA1 TP686
12KF 1000P NM PB_NWE DIOR DATA1 PB_DATA0 TP684
12 DIOW DATA0 37
L9
13 DGND ALE/A0 36
VCC3 R258 10KJ TP683 14 35
R259 NM TP685 INTRQ DGND TP675 R256 10KJ
15 READY/IORDY MODE1 34
BLM21PG600SN1 16 33 TP701
(9) INT_USBD INT N.C.

10KJ
10KJ
TP707
DA2
CS_N
RW_N/RD_N
DS_N/WR_N
CS0_N
CS1_N
AD0
AD1
AD2
VCC(I/O)
AD3
AD4
AD5
AD6
AD7
VCC1V8
DGND

R274
2 2
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32

0J

R251
R252
DIE

AR-208S/208D CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 14 - 10

VCC3

TP782
TP870

10KJ
10KJ
TP681
0.1U

VCC3 VCC3 TP682

IC42

R401
R400
C370

5
5 (9) PB_NCS3 1
IC183 4 TP703
2 4 TP908 2
(5,9) PB_NAE0
3 PB_NOE
(5,9) PB_NOE
3 TC7SH08FU PB_NWE
C410 C408 (5,9) PB_NWE

1
0.1U TC7SH126FU 0.1U TP708

VCC3
(9,13) PB_DATA[7:0]
PB_DATA0
5 IC43 PB_DATA1
PB_DATA2
2 4 PB_DATA3
(9) DT_ACKB
PB_DATA4
3 1 PB_DATA5
C409 PB_DATA6
0.1U TC7SH04FU PB_DATA7

1 1

A B C D E
 A B C D E

MCU PWB (Connector section 1) 11/16

To Power unit
To Operational PWB
INT5V INT24V

EN5V 5V VCC3
4 4
CN2

1 2
3 4
(6) /BIAS 5 6 /TC (6)
(6) /GRIDL 7 8 /MC (6)
9 10
0603SFF150FM/32-2

CP8
CP9

CP10
11 12 3.3VIN (8) 5V CN3
EN5V
EN5V 13 14
0603SFF150FM/32-2
0603SFF150FM/32-2

5V
5V 15 16 /POFF (6)
24V
(8) 12VIN 17 18 24V 32
(5) FW 19 20 D33 31
(6) /PR 21 22 HLOUT (6) 30
23 24 1 29
3 28
R276 2
C275 C276 B24B-PNDZS-1(LF)(SN) R347 NM_<1608> 10KJ 27
26
(SELIN1) 25
0.1U/50V<1608> (White) (SELIN2) 24
KDS226
(SELIN3) 23
R277 1KJ
(3) KEYIN 22
NM_<1608>
(5) (KEYSC3) 21
PGND PGND
(5) (KEYSC2) 20
PGND
(5) (KEYSC1) 19
C277
(1) BZR 18
1000P R353 0J
(6) (LCDCONT) 17
(LCDRS) 16
(LCDE) 15
(LCDDB4) 14
(LCDDB5) 13
(LCDDB6) 12
(LCDDB7) 11
(8) DRST 10
R350 0J
(3) PSL 9
(8) PSW 8
(5) (OP_DATA) 7
(5) (OP_CLK) 6
5
(5) (OP_LATCH) 4
3 R352 NM 3
(3) INFOLED 3
R331 NM
(3) BL 2
1

FF4-32-S15D5
NM

R385 R398 R365

NM
1000P
1000P
1000P

100J
NM

0J 0J
C365

To SPF unit To RSPF unit 5V

C364
C278
C279
C280

C363

5V
5V 5V

24VSPFSOL
24VSPFMT

R278
R140
R349
CN29 CN30

200J1/4W<3216>
1 2 1

R141
200J1/4W<3216>
2 4 3

200J1/4W<3216>
200J1/4W<3216>
(7) SPMT_0 3 (8) SPPD 6 5 SRJD (8)
(7) SPMT_2 4 8 7
(7) SPMT_1 5 10 9
(7) SPMT_3 6 (8) SPID 12 11 SCOD (8)
(8) SPID 7 (7) SPMT_3 14 13
8 (7) SPMT_1 16 15 /RSV_SOL (7)
24VSPFMT
9 (7) SPMT_2 18 17
(8) SPPD 10 (7) SPMT_0 20 19 /SPUS (7)
11 22 21 R295 100J R330 100J
12 24 23 /SRVC (7) (5) LCDDB7# (LCDDB7) (3) SELIN1 (SELIN1)
B12B-PH-K-S(LF)(SN)
B24B-PNDZS-1(LF)(SN) C358 C361

100P 100P

2 R294 100J R329 100J 2

(5) LCDDB6# (LCDDB6) (3) SELIN2 (SELIN2)

C357 C360

AR-208S/208D CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 14 - 11

100P 100P

R293 100J R328 100J

(5) LCDDB5# (LCDDB5) (3) SELIN3 (SELIN3)

C356 C359

100P 100P

R292 100J
(5) LCDDB4# (LCDDB4)

To LSU C349

100P

R291 0J
(5) LCDE# (LCDE)
5V
C347
INT5V
100P
D65

1
3 24V R290 100J
(5) LCDRS# (LCDRS)
2 CN41
1 C317
KDS226 2
1 (6) /PMD 3 1
To Polygon motor 100P
(8) PMRDY 4
CN42
(6) PMCLK_A 5
(5) /SYNC 1
R282 1KJ 2 B05B-CZHK-B(LF)(SN)(V)
3
To LD 4 PGND
(6) /LDEN 5
(5) /VIDEO 6
(6) SHOLD 7
8

B08B-CZHK-B(LF)(SN)(V)

A B C D E
 A B C D E

MCU PWB (Connector section 2) 5V

12/16
INT24V
24V R283
200J1/4W<3216>
1/4W Not mounted (For debug)
CP21
CN10 CN11
4 0J <1608>
4
CN12 1 1 CPU Serial
(8) 24V1(DSWS) 2 To Interlock switch (8) PPD2 2
1 To Main motor 3 To HL unit
2 (6) RTH_IN 4
B2P-VH-R(LF)(SN)
(6) /MMD 3 5 VCC3
(8) MMLD 4
(6) /MMCLK 5 (Red)
B5B-PH-K-S(LF)(SN) CN13
C281 C282
1

0.1U/50V<1608>
0.1U/50V<1608>
B5B-PASK-1(LF)(SN) (White)
1000P 1000P (1) RxD 2
(1) TxD 3
(White) 4

C283
C284
PGND B4B-PH-K-S(LF)(SN)

5V (White)
PGND

R284 24V
200J1/4W<3216>
CN14

24V 1
OA982 JTAG & Serial
(6) /MPFS 2 To Multi unit
3 VCC3
(8) MFD 4
CN15
CN16 5
1 CN17
(6) VFMOUT 1 (6) /CPFS1 2 To Cassette paper B5B-PH-K-R(LF)(SN) TCK
(8) FANLK 2 3 1 2
To VF Fan motor /RESET0
(6) /VFMCNT 3 solenoid (9) TRST_L 3 4
(Red) OA_TX
4 (9) TMS 5 6
B3B-PH-K-S(LF)(SN) OA_RX
(9) TDO 7 8
B4B-PH-K-S(LF)(SN) (9) TDI
TCK 9 10
(White) (9) TCK
C285 C286 /RESET0 B10B-PHDSS-B(LF)(SN)
(2,4,5,9) /RESET0 OA_TX
(White) (9) OA_TX
1000P 1000P OA_RX
(9) OA_RX
To 2nd. cassette
3 24V
3
PGND
24V

5V
CN18
1 CN19
(6) /RRS 2 To Resist roller
3 (6) /CPFS2 1 2
solenoid 3 4
24VDupMT 5 6
B3B-PH-K-E(LF)(SN) (8) PPD3 7 8
CN20 9 10
(Blue) (8) PD2 11 12
1 (8) CED2 13 14
NM

(7) /DMT0 2
(7) /DMT1 3 To Duplex motor B14B-PHDSS-B(LF)(SN) To PS Fan motor

1000P
1000P
1000P
(7) /DMT2 4
(7) /DMT3 5
NM_<1608>

(White)
B05B-XASK-1(LF)(SN)
C373
C374

CN35

C287
C288
C289 (6) PSFMOUT 3
(8) PSFANLK 2
PGND
PGND 1
CN21
NM_B03B-PASK-1(LF)(SN)
(8) CED1 1
2 C368
3 To Cassette detect (White)
1000P
B3B-PH-K-K(LF)(SN)
CN22
(Black) 24V
(7) OUT_A+ 1
(7) OUT_B+ 2 CN23 PGND
(7) OUT_A- 3 To Mirror motor
(7) OUT_B- 4 5V 3
2 2 To Mecha. COUNTER 2
(6) /MCNT 1
B4B-PH-K-R(LF)(SN) R285
200J1/4W<3216>
(Red) NM_B3B-PH-K-R

AR-208S/208D CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 14 - 12

CN24 (Red)
1
(8) PPD1 2
3 To Paper pass detect
B3B-PH-K-R(LF)(SN)

(Red)

CN25

(7) TMA_O 1
LED for Checker
(7) TMB_O 2 To Toner motor 5V

B2P-VH(LF)(SN) R286
200J1/4W<3216>
(White)
CN26
VCC3
1 VCC3 VCC3
(8) POD 2
3 To Paper out detect
NM
NM

B3B-PH-K-S(LF)(SN)
R288
R289

(White)
390J

24VSFTMT
TP710 TP711
R287

CN27 D39 D40

TP712
1
(7) /SFTMT0 2 D38
1 (7) /SFTMT1 3 To Shifter motor CN28 Q9 NM_LT1P67A Q10 NM_LT1P67A 1
(7) /SFTMT2 4 NM_KRC106S NM_KRC106S
(7) /SFTMT3 5 1
3 TP713 3 TP714
(8) PD1 2
B5B-PH-K-S(LF)(SN) 3 To Paper detect LT1P67A
(2) GASIC_READY 2 (9) OA982_READY 2

(White) B3B-PH-K-M(LF)(SN)

(Green)
1
1

A B C D E
 A B C D E

MCU PWB (Modem I/F Connector) 13/16

(9,10) PB_DATA[7:0]

BR91 33JX4
PB_DATA7 5 4 #PB_DATA7
PB_DATA6 6 3 #PB_DATA6
PB_DATA5 7 2 #PB_DATA5
4 PB_DATA4 8 1 #PB_DATA4 4
PB_DATA3 5 4 #PB_DATA3 To Modem PWB
PB_DATA2 6 3 #PB_DATA2
(9,10) PB_ADDR[7:0] PB_DATA1 #PB_DATA1
7 2
PB_DATA0 8 1 #PB_DATA0
BR93 33JX4
PB_ADDR7 5 4 BR90 33JX4 #PB_ADDR7
PB_ADDR6 6 3 #PB_ADDR6 24V EN5V
PB_ADDR5 7 2 #PB_ADDR5 VCC3
PB_ADDR4 8 1 #PB_ADDR4
PB_ADDR3 5 4 #PB_ADDR3
PB_ADDR2 6 3 #PB_ADDR2
(5) /FAX_RST R313 PB_ADDR1 7 2 #PB_ADDR1
100J PB_ADDR0 8 1 #PB_ADDR0
(1) /RES_FAX R325

0.1U
NM BR92 33JX4 PB_NCS1
(9) PB_NCS1
0603SFF150FM/32-2

(PB_NAE0)

C102
(5) (PB_NAE0)

0603SFF150FM/32-2
0603SFF150FM/32-2
(PB_NWE)

CP11
CP12

(5) (PB_NWE)
(PB_NOE)

CP13
(5) (PB_NOE)
(/FAX_RST)
CN5
(MDM_IRQ) R311 #MDM_IRQ TP903 TP904
(9) MDM_IRQ
1KJ 0J <1608> 0J <1608>
L16 39 40 L14
VCC3 37 38 #MDM_IRQ
(/FAX_RST) 35 36 (PB_NOE)
(PB_NWE) 33 34 (PB_NAE0)
D46 PB_NCS1 31 32 #PB_ADDR0
#PB_ADDR1 29 30 #PB_ADDR2
1 27 28
3 #PB_ADDR3 #PB_ADDR4
#PB_ADDR5 25 26 #PB_ADDR6 PGND
2 23 24
#PB_ADDR7 #PB_DATA0
KDS226 #PB_DATA1 21 22 #PB_DATA2
#PB_DATA3 19 20 #PB_DATA4
#PB_DATA5 17 18 #PB_DATA6
#PB_DATA7 15 16 MCU_INT
MCU_nCS 13 14 (/RD)
3 11 12
3
MCU_D0 MCU_D1
MCU_D2 9 10 MCU_D3
MCU_D4 7 8 MCU_D5
MCU_D6 5 6 MCU_D7
MODEM_IN 3 4
1 2
B40B-PNDZS-1(LF)(SN)

(1,2,3,4) D[15..0]

VCC3

BR89 33JX4
D7 5 4 MCU_D7
D6 6 3 MCU_D6
R315 D5 7 2 MCU_D5
10KJ D4 8 1 MCU_D4
D3 5 4 MCU_D3
D2 6 3 MCU_D2
D1 7 2 MCU_D1
D0 8 1 MCU_D0
MODEM_IN
(9) MODEM_IN
R391 (5) (/RD) BR88 33JX4 (/RD)
TP725 MCU_nCS
(1) /CS5 MCU_INT
100J (3) MSU_ST1 R317

C378 1KJ
VCC3
NM
D47
1
3
2
2 2

AR-208S/208D CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 14 - 13

KDS226

D7 PB_DATA7
D6 PB_DATA6
D5 PB_DATA5
D4 PB_DATA4
D3 PB_DATA3
D2 PB_DATA2
D1 PB_DATA1
D0 PB_DATA0
MSU_ST1 (MDM_IRQ)
NM
NM
NM

C320 C332 C326 C322

C323
C324
C325

10KJ 10KJ 10KJ 10KJ

NM
NM

NM

1 1
C328
C329

C331

NM
NM
NM
NM

C330 C321 C333 C327

C334

10KJ 10KJ 10KJ 10KJ

C335
C336
C337

A B C D E
 A B C D E

MCU PWB (Scanner I/F section) 14/16

4 4

To Scanner unit
Copy Lamp Inverter 12V EN5V
24V

CP18 Q5 2SJ537 L12 CP14 CP15

0603SFF150FM/32-2 1 2 220UH 0603SFF150FM/32-2
VCL 0603SFF150FM/32-2

TWKA-221K VCC3 TP886

R318
3 910J 3 L17 3
1J <1608>
D48
1
R322 CN4
3
C338 + D49 + C339 C340 R319 12KJ 2 AFE_DB#0 AFE_DB#1
47U/35V 11EQS06 15KJ AFE_DB#2 32 31 AFE_DB#3
47U/35V 0.1U/50V<1608> R320 AFE_DB#4 30 29
1KJ KDS226 AFE_DB#6 28 27 AFE_DB#5

R321
C341 33P 26 25 AFE_DB#7
(5) mt_at_home 24 23
(5) AFE_SCK# 22 21
(5) ADCLK# 20 19 AFE_SEN# (5)
C342

5.6KJ1/4W<3216>
(2) CL (5) CCD_PHI1# 18 17
(5) CCD_PHI2# 16 15 AFE_SDI# (5)
R323 Q6 1000P
(5) CCD_CP# 14 13 BSAMP# (5)
15KJ R324 KTC3198
(5) CCD_RS# 12 11
56KJ
(5) CCD_TG# 10 9 VSAMP# (5)
8 7
VCL 6 5 VCL
4 3
2 1

PGND FF4-32-S15D5

PGND PGND

2 2
(2) AFE_DB[7..0]
BR86 33JX4
AFE_DB0 1 8 AFE_DB#0

AR-208S/208D CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 14 - 14

AFE_DB1 2 7 AFE_DB#1
AFE_DB2 3 6 AFE_DB#2
AFE_DB3 4 5 AFE_DB#3
AFE_DB4 1 8 AFE_DB#4
AFE_DB5 2 7 AFE_DB#5
AFE_DB6 3 6 AFE_DB#6
AFE_DB7 4 5 AFE_DB#7

BR87 33JX4

AFE_DB0
AFE_DB1
AFE_DB2
AFE_DB3
AFE_DB4
AFE_DB5
AFE_DB6
AFE_DB7

C109C318C132C314C313C319C315C316

47P 47P 47P 47P 47P 47P 47P 47P

1 1

A B C D E
 A B C D E

MCU PWB (NIC I/F section) 15/16

4 4

VCC3 EN5V

CP19
CP20

0603SFF150FM/32-2
0603SFF150FM/32-2
TP905 TP906

L18 L19
0J <1608> 0J <1608>

3 To NIC PWB 3
CN39

24
23
22
R326 21
(5) /NIC_RST 20

0.1U
1KJ PARAD0 TP672 1 8
R327 PARAD1 TP673 19
(1) /RES_NIC 2 7 18
NM PARAD2 TP674 3 6
PARAD3 TP676 17

C106
4 5 16
PARAD4 TP678 1 8 BR94 33JX4
PARAD5 TP679 15
2 7 14
PARAD6 TP680 3 6
PARAD7 TP717 13
4 5 12
/ACK_O BR95 33JX4
(2) /ACK_O 11
BUSY_O
(2) BUSY_O 10
PE_O
(2) PE_O 9
SLCT_O

12P
12P
12P
12P
12P
12P
12P
12P
(2) SLCT_O 8
/FAULT_O
(2) PARAD[7..0] (2) /FAULT_O 7 VCC3 EN5V
/STB_I
(2) /STB_I 6
/AUTOFD_I
(2) /AUTOFD_I 5
/SLCTIN_I
(2) /SLCTIN_I 4
/INIT_I

C388
C387
C389
C391
C390
C392
C393
C394
(2) /INIT_I 3
/REV_O R402 NM C345 C346 C343 C344
(2) /REV_O 2
1 0.1U 0.1U 0.1U 0.1U
24FMN-BTK-A

AR-208S/208D CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 14 - 15

2 2

1 1

A B C D E
 A B C D E

MCU PWB (CRUM I/F section) 16/16

4 CRUM Control 4
24V

TP721 R348 NM
CN6
(6) TCS_AN
1 To DV Unit
EN5V (8) TCS 2
VCC3
(8) DVSEL 3 (To Analog Tonner Sensor)
4
NM_B4B-PH-K-R

(Red)
R334
NM R335
IC49 10KJ
3.3V Vcc 5 5V
TP883 1 2 TP884
(1) CRUMSDA A B (CRUMSDA)

R337 0J C348
TP715 4 3 0.1U
(5) /ASIC_RST OE GND
TC7SBD385AFU
24V EN5V
R341 To DV Unit with CRUM
10KJ
D34 D35 (To Analog Tonner Sensor)
1 1
3 3
2 2
R279
10J KDS226 KDS226
CN7
3 3
R280 300J
1 2
EN5V 3 4 (CRUMSDA)
5 6 (CRUMSCL)
7 8 R281 300J
9 10
B10B-PHDSS-B(LF)(SN)
3.3V 5V
C350 (White)
IC51
0.1U 5
1
4 TP887
(1) CRUMSCL (CRUMSCL)
2
3

TC7SET08F

FB8

FB10 FB14
2 2
0J or CHIP INDUCTER(NM) <1608>
F-GND 1 0J or CHIP INDUCTER(NM) <1608> 0J or CHIP INDUCTER(NM) <1608>
F-GND 3 F-GND 6

AR-208S/208D CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 14 - 16

FB9
FB11 FB15

0J or CHIP INDUCTER(NM) <1608>

0J or CHIP INDUCTER(NM) <1608> 0J or CHIP INDUCTER(NM) <1608>
F-GND 2
F-GND 4 F-GND 7

FB12

1 1
0J or CHIP INDUCTER(NM) <1608>
F-GND 5

PGND

A B C D E
 A B C D E

OPERATION PWB (LED/LCD section) 1/3

LCDDB7#
LCDDB6#
LCDDB5#
LCDDB4#
5V LCDE#
LCDRS#

1 3 LED_V1
4 Q303 LED301 LED302 LED304 LED303 4
KRA225S COPY CS1L HPL SJAL 5VEN

100p
100p
100p
100p
100p
100p

C332
C327
C328
C329
C330
C331
LTL-1LHG-002A LTL-1LHG-002A LTL-1LHEE-002A OPEN R344
Q304 100J
2 KRA225S
To LCD
1 3 IC301
LED_V2
10
LED308 LED307 LED314 LED309 R335 0J GND
LCDCONT 9
V5
2. OPERATION PWB

PRINT CS2L SPFL BPL 8

R334 100J LCDRS# VDD
LCDRS 7
RS
LCDDB[7..4] 6
R333 100J LCDE# R/W
LCDE 5
LTL-1LHG-002A LTL-1LHG-002A LTL-1LHG-002A LTL-1LHG-002A LCDDB4 R332 100J LCDDB4# E
4
Q305 LCDDB5 R331 100J LCDDB5# DB4
3
2 KRA225S LCDDB6 R330 100J LCDDB6# DB5
2
LCDDB7 R329 100J LCDDB7# DB6
1 3 LED_V3 1
DB7
LED306 LED305 LED310 GPM181C0
SCAN FAX RPL
0.1u
0.1u

R328 D304
10kJ
LTL-1LHG-002A LTL-1LHG-002A LTL-1LHG-002A ZENER_3.3V

2
C338
C333

TP12
TP13
TP14
3 3
R324 R325 R326
0J 0J 0J

TP3
TP2 TP4
DATA1
TP1

5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
IC304

TB62725AF

/OUT0
/OUT1
/OUT2
/OUT3
/OUT4
/OUT5
/OUT6
/OUT7

VCC
S-IN
CLOCK
/LATCH
/ENABLE
S-OUT
R-EXT
GND

2
3
4
1

16
13
14
15

AR-208S/208D CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 14 - 17

2 2

TP5
TP6
TP7
TP8
TP9
TP10
R327 C323
3.3V 820J
3.3V open
R306 5VEN
OPEN
C322

R323 0.1u LED311

10KJ PSL
R305
0J

LTL-1LHG-002A
R304 100J Q307
OP-DATA
R303 100J 3 TP15 R301 470J
OP-CLK
TP11 R302 100J
Q302 2
PSL
3

2 C305 C306 C307

OP-LATCH
1 1000p 1000p open 1
KRC106S
1

C308

Open KRC106S

1
A B C D E
 A B C D E

OPERATION PWB (KEY / Buzzer section) 2/3

5VEN

4 4
BZ301

1
D301
2
PS1720P02
1SS133 KEY321 KEY320 KEY322 KEY316 KEY306 KEY314 KEY312 KEY301
ESRT NM2K NM6K RAT NM9K RK NM1K MODK
R339 10kJ

SKQNABD010 SKQNABD010 SKQNABD010 SKQNABD010 SKQNABD010 SKQNABD010 SKQNABD010 SKQNABD010

D302

Q306 1SS133 KEY325 KEY323 KEY318 KEY309 KEY315 KEY313 KEY311 KEY302
3 LK NM8K CLK NM0K SHPK ENT NM4K BPK
BZR 2
SKQNABD010 SKQNABD010 SKQNABD010 SKQNABD010 SKQNABD010 SKQNABD010 SKQNABD010 SKQNABD010
D303

1SS133 KEY324 KEY319 KEY317 KEY308 KEY307 KEY305 KEY304 KEY303

KRC106S

1
MENU NM5K NM3K ASTK CAK EXP NM7K 2SIDE

SKQNABD010 SKQNABD010 SKQNABD010 SKQNABD010 SKQNABD010 SKQNABD010 SKQNABD010 SKQNABD010

3 3

5V IC303

16
VCC TP19
R338 1kJ TP16 1 15
KEYSC1 R337 1kJ TP17 2 A Y0
14
KEYSC2 R336 1kJ TP18 3 B Y1
13
KEYSC3 C Y2
12
C321 Y3 TP20
6 11 F-KEYSC1
G1 Y4 TP21
4 10 F-KEYSC2
C318 C319 C320 0.1u G2A Y5 TP22
5 9 F-KEYSC3
G2B Y6 TP23
7
Open Open Open Y7
8
GND
74HC238

IC302
2 TP24 6 4 TP26 R314 100J 2
W D0 F-KEYIN1
3 TP27 R313 100J
D1 F-KEYIN2
R318 33J TP25 5 2 TP28 R312 100J
KEYIN Y D2 F-KEYIN3
1 TP29 R311 100J
D3 F-KEYIN4

AR-208S/208D CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 14 - 18

5V 15 TP30 R307 100J
D4 F-KEYIN5
5V 14 TP31 R308 100J
D5 F-KEYIN6
13 TP32 R309 100J
D6 F-KEYIN7
C315 16 12 TP33 R310 100J
VCC D7

2kJ
2kJ
2kJ
47pF C312 11 TP34
A TP35
10
0.1u B TP36 C337 R342 C335 R341 C334 R340 C313 R319 C314 R320 C316 R321 C317 R322 C336 R343
9
C
8 7
GND G Open 2kJ Open 2kJ Open 2kJ Open 2kJ Open 2kJ Open 2kJ Open 2kJ Open 2kJ

R346
R347
R348
74HC151
R317 1kJ
SELIN3 R316 1kJ
SELIN2 R315 1kJ
SELIN1

C311 C310 C309

Open Open Open

KEY310
PSW
1 PSW 1
SKQNABD010

C304

Open

A B C D E
 A B C D E

OPERATION PWB (Connector section) 3/3

4 To MCU PWB 4

3.3V 5V 5VEN

C303 C324 C302 C325 C301 C326

CN302 47uF/16v 0.1u 47uF/16v 0.1u 47uF/16v 0.1u

1 To FAX Key PWB
2 TP37 To Drum Initial Detector
3
4 TP38
5
6
7
8 TP39
SELIN1
9 TP40 CN301
SELIN2
10 TP41
SELIN3
11 TP42 1
KEYIN F-KEYSC3
12 TP43 2 CN303
KEYSC3 F-KEYSC2
13 TP44 3
KEYSC2 F-KEYSC1
14 TP45 4 DRST
3 KEYSC1 F-KEYIN7 1 3
15 TP46 5
BZR F-KEYIN6 2
16 TP47 6
LCDCONT LCDDB[7..4] F-KEYIN5 3
17 TP48 7
LCDRS F-KEYIN4
18 TP49 8
LCDE F-KEYIN2
19 TP50 LCDDB4 9 S3B-PH-K-S
F-KEYIN3
20 TP51 LCDDB5 10 F-KEYIN1
21 TP52 LCDDB6 11 LED_V3
22 TP53 LCDDB7 12 LED_V2
23 DRST 13 LED_V1
24 TP54 14
PSL DATA1
25 PSW 15
26 TP55
OP-DATA
27 TP56
OP-CLK
28 BM15B-GHS-TBT
29 TP57
OP-LATCH
30
31
32

32FMN-BMTTR-A-TB

Open
R352

AR-208S/208D CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 14 - 19

2 2

1 1

A B C D E
 DHAI-0519QSPZ DHAI-0287QSZZ CN11 CN3 DHAI-0517QSPZ CN302 CN303 DHAI-0270QSZZ
1 LEDPPD2 1 1 LEDPPD2 D-GND 1 32 D-GND DRST 1 1 DRST
PPD2 2 PPD2 2 2 PPD2 BL 2 31 BL 2 2 D-GND DRST
3 D-GND 3 3 D-GND INFOLED 3 30 INFOLED D-GND 3
4 RTH_IN OP_LATCH 4 29 OP_LATCH
5 D-GND D-GND 5 28 D-GND AL MODEL ONLY
Thermistor 2 D-GND 2 B5B-PH-K-S OP_CLK 6 27 OP_CLK
OP_DATA 7 26 OP_DATA
PSW 8 25 PSW
CN16 PSL 9 24 PSL
1 VFMOUT DRST 10 23 DRST
2 FANLK LCDD7 11 22 LCDD7 LCD_OPE
Fan MT 3 /VFMCNT LCDD6 12 21 LCDD6
4 PGND LCDD5 13 20 LCDD5 PWB FAX Model/FX13 Optional KIT only
B4B-PH-K-S LCDD4 14 19 LCDD4
LCDE 15 18 LCDE DHAI-0543QSPZ
LCDRS 16 17 LCDRS
LCDCONT 17 16 LCDCONT CN301 CN401
BZR 18 15 BZR F-KEYSC3 1 15 F-KEYSC3
CN27 KEYSC1 19 14 KEYSC1 F-KEYSC2 2 14 F-KEYSC2
1 24VSFTMT KEYSC2 20 13 KEYSC2 F-KEYSC1 3 13 F-KEYSC1
2 /SFTMT_0 KEYSC3 21 12 KEYSC3 F-KEYIN7 4 12 F-KEYIN7
SHIFTER MT 3 /SFTMT_1 KEYIN 22 11 KEYIN F-KEYIN6 5 11 F-KEYIN6
4 /SFTMT_2 SELIN3 23 10 SELIN3 F-KEYIN5 6 10 F-KEYIN5
5 /SFTMT_3 SELIN2 24 9 SELIN2 F-KEYIN4 7 9 F-KEYIN4 FAX_OPE
SELIN1 25 8 SELIN1 F-KEYIN3 8 8 F-KEYIN3
(1) MCU section (1/3)

D-GND 26 7 D-GND F-KEYIN2 9 7 F-KEYIN2

EN5V 27 6 EN5V F-KEYIN1 10 6 F-KEYIN1 PWB
CN20 D-GND 28 5 D-GND LED_V3 11 5 LED_V3
1 24VDupMT 5V 29 4 5V LED_V2 12 4 LED_V2
2 /DMT_0 D-GND 30 3 D-GND LED_V1 13 3 LED_V1
DUPLEX MT 3 /DMT_1 VCC3 31 2 VCC3 DATA1 14 2 DATA1
4 /DMT_2 D-GND 32 1 D-GND D-GND 15 1 D-GND
5 /DMT_3
B05B-XASK-1
Duplex Model only CN22
OUTA+ 1
OUTB+ 2 SCANNER
DHAI-0286QSZZ CN26 OUTA- 3
1 LEDPOD OUTB-
MT
4
POD 2 POD
B4B-PH-K-R
3 D-GND
B3B-PH-K-S
CN4 DHAI-0268QSZ4
P-GND 1 1 P-GND
P-GND 2 2 P-GND SCANNER
DHAI-0530QSP1 CN42 VCL 3 3 VCL Carriage
- HSYNC 8 1 /SYNC VCL 4 4 VCL
12V 5 5 12V
UN
D-GND 7 2 D-GND
+5V 6 3 INT5V 12V 6 6 12V
EN5V EN5V
3. ACTUAL WIRING DIAGRAM

D-GND 5 4 D-GND 7 7
- LDEN 4 5 /LDEN D-GND 8 8 D-GND
- VIDEO 3 6 /VIDEO (VSAMP) 9 9 (VSAMP)
- S/H 2 7 SHOLD CCD-TG 10 10 CCD-TG
D-GND 11 11 D-GND
CCFL
D-GND 1 8 D-GND
B08B-CZHK-B CCD-RS 12 12 CCD-RS CN2
LD (BSAMP) 13 13 (BSAMP) AC VOUT 1
CCD-CP 14 14 CCD-CP GND 3
(AFE_SDI) 15 15 (AFE_SDI)
DHAI-0529QSP1 CN41 CCD_PHI2 16 16 CCD_PHI2 VCL 1
24V D-GND D-GND P-GND 2
INVERTER
5 1 24V 17 17
P-GND 4 2 P-GND CCD_PHI1 18 18 CCD_PHI1 PWB CCFL
/PMD 3 3 /PMD (AFE_SEN) 19 19 (AFE_SEN) CN3
PMRDY 2 4 PMRDY (ADCLK) 20 20 (ADCLK) AC VOUT 1
PMCLK_A 1 5 PMCLK_A D-GND 21 21 D-GND GND 3
B05B-CZHK-B (AFE_SCK) 22 22 (AFE_SCK) CCD
POLYGON MT (AFE_DB7) 23 23 (AFE_DB7)
mt_at_home 24 24 MHPS

DHAI-0423QSZZ 1
CN28
MCU (AFE_DB5)
(AFE_DB6)
25
26
25
26
(AFE_DB5)
(AFE_DB6)
PWB
2 PD1 D-GND 27 27 D-GND
PD1 3 D-GND (AFE_DB4) 28 28 (AFE_DB4)
B3B-PH-K-M (AFE_DB3) 29 29 (AFE_DB3)
(AFE_DB2) (AFE_DB2)
FAX Model only
PWB (AFE_DB1)
30
31
30
31 (AFE_DB1)
(AFE_DB0) 32 32 (AFE_DB0)
DHAI-0514QSPZ CN12 FF4-32-S15D5
INT24V 1 1 INT24V
PGND 2 2 PGND
/MMD 3 3 /MMD CN7 DHAI-0516QSPZ
MMLD 4 4 MMLD 5VEN 2 2 5VEN
/MMCLK 5 5 /MMCLK (CRUMSDA) 4 4 (CRUMSDA)
B5B-PASK-1 (CRUMSCL) 6 3 (CRUMSCL)
MAIN MT D-GND 8 1 P-GND
24V 1 P18-FX-4S-C
TCS 3
CN25 DVSEL 5 CRUM
1 TMA_O D-GND 7
TONER MT 2 TMB_O 9
B2P-VH 10 AR model only
B10B-PHDSS-B

CN18 CN6 DHAI-0526QSPZ

RESIST ROLLER 1 24V 24V 1 1 24V 1
2 /RRS TCS 2 2 TCS 2 TCS DV

AR-208S/208D CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 14 - 20

SOLENOID 3 DVSEL DVSEL
3 6 6
B3B-PH-K-E D-GND 4 5 D-GND 5 un
B4B-PH-K-R 8 BIAS 8

CN15 DHAI-0515QSPZ
CASSETTE PAPER 1 24V 1 BIAS MC 1
2 /CPFS1 2 F-GND
SOLENOID 3
B3B-PH-K-S DHAI-0273QSZZ
CN2 DHAI-0525QSPZ MCFB 1
INT5V 1 1 INT5V GRID 4
INT24V 2 2 INT24V
DHAI-0269QSZZ CN21 P-GND 3 3 P-GND HVT PWB
CED1 1 1 CED1 P-GND 4 4 P-GND DHAI-0292QSZZ
CED1 D-GND 2 2 D-GND /BIAS 5 5 /BIAS TC 1
3 D-GND /TC 6 6 /TC
B3B-PH-K-K /GRIDL 7 7 /GRIDL
/MC 8 8 /MC DHAI-0267QSPZ
B24B-PNDZS-1 BC 1

DHAI-0289QSZZ CN24
1 LEDPPD1
PPD1 2 PPD1
CN2 DHAI-0525QSPZ
3 D-GND D-GND 9 1 D-GND
B3B-PH-K-R P-GND 10 2 P-GND DHAI-0510QSP1 (for 100V area)
D-GND 11 3 D-GND DHAI-0536QSPZ (for 200V area) THERMOSTAT
3.3VIN 12 4 3.3VIN HLL 1
CN14 EN5V 13 5 EN5V 2 1 HLL 1
MPFS 1 24V 3.3VIN 14 6 3.3VIN HLN 3 2 HLN 2 HL
SOLENOID 2 /MPFS 5V 15 7 5V
3 5 /POFF 16 8 /POFF DHAI-0511QSP1 (for 100V area)
4 MFD 12VIN 17 9 12VIN POWER DHAI-0537QSPZ (for 200V area)
5 DGND 24V 18 10 24V SUPPLY For 120V area
B5B-PH-K-R FW 19 11 FW
24V 20 12 24V PWB
/PR 21 13 /PR AC-CORD
DSW L 1
DHAI-0272QSZZ CN10 HLOUT 22 14 HLOUT N 2
1 24V P-GND 23 15 P-GND
2 24V1(DSWS) P-GND 24 16 P-GND
B2P-VH-R B24B-PNDZS-1

For 200V area AC-CORD

AC-INLET

DHAI-0491QSZZ
 (2) RSPF section (2/3)

CN30 DHAI-0533QSPZ DHAI-0541QSPZ

LED_SRJD 1 3 LED_SRJD 3 3 LEDSRJD
DGND 3 2 D-GND 2 2 DGND SRJD
SRJD 5 1 SRJD 1 1 SRJD
LED_SPPD 2 3 LED_SPPD 3
DGND 4 2 D-GND 2
MCU SPPD 6 1 SPPD 1 DHAI-0540QSPZ
LED_SCOD 7
DGND 9 3 LEDSPPD
PWB SCOD 11 2 DGND SPPD
LED_SPID 8 3 LED_SPID 3 1 SPPD
DGND 10 2 D-GND 2
SPID 12 1 SPID 1
24VSPFSOL 17 1 24V 1
SPUS 19 2 _SPUS 2
24VSPFSOL 21 1 24V 1 3 LEDSCOD
SRVC 23 2 SRVC 2 2 DGND SCOD
SPMT_3 14 1 SCOD
24VSPFMT 22
SPMT_1 16
SPMT_0 20
24VSPFMT 24 DHAI-0539QSPZ
SPMT_2 18 3 LEDSPID
24VSPFSOL 13 2 DGND SPID
NC 15 1 SPID

B24B-PNDZS-1

SPUS

RSPF UNIT
SRVC

AR-208S/208D CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 14 - 21

1 /B
2 COMB
3 B
4 A SPMT
5 COMA
6 /A
 DHAI-0306QSZZ CN19
2 /CPFS2 2 1 /CPFS2
CPFS2 1 24V 1 2 24V
4 5V
(3) 2nd cassette section (Optional)

7 PPD3
8 D-GND
5V 3 11 PD2
PPD3 PPD3 2 12 D-GND
D-GND 1 13 CED2
14 D-GND
3
5
AL 2nd cassette 6
PD2 1 Model only 9
PD2 D-GND 2 10
B14B-PHDSS-B
AR-D33 only
MCU PWB
CED2 1
CED2 D-GND 2

14 /CPFS2 1
13 24V 2
2nd CASSETTE UN 11 5V 4
8 PPD3 7
7 D-GND 8
6 PD2 9
4 D-GND 11

AR-208S/208D CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 14 - 22

2 CED2 13
1 D-GND 14
9 FG 6
DHAI-0442QSZZ 12 3 DHAI-0441QSZZ
10 5
5 10
3 12

AR 2nd cassette / AR-D33

Model only
 FAX Model / FX13 Optional Model Only

DHAI-0538QSPZ
AL-2050CS/AL-2060 only CN5 CN2 CN3
1 MODEM_IN 2 MODEM_IN 1 BT1
2 D-GND 1 D-GND 2 LT1 Speaker
3 MCU_D6 4 MCU_D6 B02B-PH-K-S
CN1 DHAI-0518QSPZ CN39 4 MCU_D7 3 MCU_D7
D-GND 1 1 D-GND 5 MCU_D4 6 MCU_D4
DIR3 2 2 /REV 6 MCU_D5 5 MCU_D5
/IT3 3 3 /INIT 7 MCU_D2 8 MCU_D2
/SELIN3 4 4 /SLCTIN 8 MCU_D3 7 MCU_D3
/AFFFD3 5 5 /AUTOFD 9 MCU_D0 10 MCU_D0
NIC /STB 6 6 /STB 10 MCU_D1 9 MCU_D1
/FLT 7 7 /FAULT 11 MCU_nCS 12 MCU_nCS FAX
PWB SLCT 8 8 SLCT 12 /RD 11 /RD
PFRR 9 9 PE 13 PB_DATA7 14 PB_DATA7
PBSY 10 10 BUSY 14 MCU_INT 13 MCU_INT
Main
/PACK 11 11 /ACK 15 PB_DATA5 16 PB_DATA5
CN8 P7 12 12 PARAD7 MCU 16 PB_DATA6 15 PB_DATA6 PWB
TX+ 1 P6 13 13 PARAD6 17 PB_DATA3 18 PB_DATA3
TX- 2 P5 14 14 PARAD5 18 PB_DATA4 17 PB_DATA4
CT 3 P4 15 15 PARAD4 19 PB_DATA1 20 PB_DATA1
(4) Network box and FAX section (Optional)

NC 4 P3 16 16 PARAD3
PWB 20 PB_DATA2 19 PB_DATA2
NC 5 P2 17 17 PARAD2 21 PB_ADDR7 22 PB_ADDR7
To CT 6 P1 18 18 PARAD1 22 PB_DATA0 21 PB_DATA0
LAN RX+ 7 P0 19 19 PARAD0 23 PB_DATA5 24 PB_DATA5
RX- 8 /RESET 20 20 /OA_RST 24 PB_ADDR6 23 PB_ADDR6 MJ2
LeftLED_A 9 VCC3 21 21 VCC3 25 PB_ADDR3 26 PB_ADDR3 1 BT1
LeftLED_K 10 5V 22 22 EN5V 26 PB_ADDR4 25 PB_ADDR4 2 LT1 To
RightLED_A 11 5V 23 23 EN5V 27 PB_ADDR1 28 PB_ADDR1 3 TEL1 TEL
RightLED_K 12 D-GND 24 24 D-GND 28 PB_ADDR2 27 PB_ADDR2 4 TEL2
24FMN-BTK-A 29 PB_NCS1 30 PB_NCS1 5 LT2 Communication
30 PB_ADDR0 29 PB_ADDR0 6 BT2 Line
31 PB_NWE 32 PB_NWE
32 PB_NAE0 31 PB_NAE0
33 FAX_RST 34 FAX_RST
34 PB_NOE 33 PB_NOE MJ1
35 24V 36 24V 1 NC
36 MDM_IRQ 35 MDM_IRQ 2 NC To
37 VCC3 38 VCC3 3 L1 TEL
38 EN5V 37 EN5V 4 L2
39 D-GND 40 D-GND 5 NC
Communication
40 P-GND 39 P-GND 6 NC Line
CN8 USB Cable CN1
TPTX+ 1 VBUS 1 1 5V
TPTX- 2 D- 2 2 D-
TPRX+ 3 D+ 3 3 D+
NC 4 GND 4 4 GND
NC 5 FG 5 5 FG
To TPRX- 6
NC 7 CN9
LAN

AR-208S/208D CIRCUIT DIAGRAM 14 - 23

NC 8
ST_LED 9
5V 10
LK_LED 11
5V 12
NW Box
PWB
PJ1
VCC 2
GND 3

POWER
DHAI-0544QSPZ CN3
1 L 1 1 L SUPPLY
AC adapter 2 N 2 3 N PWB

AR-NB2A Optional Model only

[15] FIRMWARE DOWNLOAD 2) Select "Option" "Serial Number Setting" on the menu bar.

PROCEDURES
[Preparation]
Write the download data (extension .dwl) into the main unit.
A USB port is required for the PC.
Create "MaintenanceTool " flooder in the PC, and copy the following
files to the folder.
Necessary for program download
Maintenance.exe ( Tool program)
ProcModelQ.fmt
ProcModelQ.mdl
Driver
Drivers/Vista/Mainte.inf (For Windows Vista)
Drivers/2kXP/Mainte.inf (For Windows XP/2000) 3) Set the serial number according to the following.
Drivers/Win9xME/Mainte.inf (For Windows Me/98SE)
Drivers/Win9xME/UsbScan.sys (For Windows Me/98SE)
Download file
Download file (extension .dwl)
Note: Copy the download data file (extension .dwl) to the folder in
which the maintenance program is included.
When making a folder for the maintenance tool in the PC, do
not put a long folder name in the absolute path.
[Example]
Erroneous case: c:\Mainte nance Tool Download
Proper case: c:\MaintenanceTool

1. Initial setting
(Serial number setting procedures)
The serial number is set to the PC which is used for downloading.
Setting is required once only, and there is no need to set again
when rebooting the program.
Note: This setting is required only when downloading the default
data of E2PROM, and is not required when downloading
firmware only.
1) PC side: Boot "Maintenance.exe" and select "AR-208/203E/
5420/M200/M201 series" in the "Select Model" menu.
(Only to set the serial number, the PC should not be connected
to the machine.)
AR-208/203E/5420/M200/M201
series
Product Code (P): Enter number (0 99)
Enter the product code of "3."
ID Code(I): Enter number (0 99)
Assign an individual code to each PC uses
"Maintenance.exe."
After completion setting, press [OK] key.
4) The serial number has been assigned.
2. Download procedures
1) Main unit side: Execute Test command No. 49-01 (Flash ROM
program write mode).
Check that "DOWNLOAD MODE" is displayed on the LCD of
the operation panel. (Press and hold [C] key and [ZOOM
DOWN] key (left key) together, and turn on the power simulta-
neously.)
2) Connect machine and the PC with a USB cable. (Connect it to
the USB port on the main unit without fail.
3) PC side: Boost "Maintenance.exe" and select "AR-208/203E/
5420/M200/M201 series" in the Select Model menu.

AR-208/203E/5420/M200/M201
series

AR-208S/208D FIRMWARE DOWNLOAD PROCEDURES 15 - 1

4) PC side: Check that the "Simulation Command List" tree is dis- 8) PC side: Specify the download file (*****.dwl) to be used.
played on the integration maintenance program.
5) PC side: When the integration maintenance program is boosted
and "The copier is not turned on." is displayed at the bottom of
display, select "File" "Reconnect" on the menu bar.

9) PC side: When a download file is specified, downloading is per-

formed automatically.

6) PC side: Check that trees are displayed in the "Special (MCU/

IMC2/Facsimile)" folder in the integration maintenance pro-
gram. (If trees are not displayed, check that the USB connector
is connected, and select "Reconnect" in procedure 5) again.)

10) PC side: When download is completed, the following message

is displayed.

7) PC side: Double-click "Special (MCU/IMC2/Facsimile)" in the

main tree to develop its sub trees, and double-click "Download
DWL Data Area" in the sub trees.

Note: Since, however, the machine enters the download data write
state, do not turn OFF the power of the machine at this
moment.
11) Main unit side: Wait until "DOWNLOAD COMPLETE!" is dis-
played on the LCD of the operation panel. When "DOWNLOAD
COMPLETE!" is displayed, download is completed.
Turn OFF the power of the machine, and disconnect the USB
cable.
12) Terminate the integration maintenance program, and turn ON
the machine again.
Download is completed with the above procedures.

AR-208S/208D FIRMWARE DOWNLOAD PROCEDURES 15 - 2

Note: When another machine is connected, connect the USB cable 4) PC side: Check that the "Simulation Command List" tree on the
again and select "File" "Reconnect" on the menu bar of integration maintenance program.
the integration maintenance program. Repeat the above pro-
cedures from 5).

5) PC side: Boot the integration maintenance program. If "The

copier is not turned on." is displayed, select "File" "Recon-
* Inhibition during download (Important) nect" on the menu bar.

If download is failed, the next download may not be executed. Use

great care not to execute the following items during download.
Never turn off the machine.
Never disconnect the download cable (USB cable).
* If the above inhibition item occurs during
downloading, turn OFF/ON the power.
1) When "DOWNLOAD MODE" is displayed on the operation
panel, execute the download procedure again.
2) If "DOWNLOAD MODE" is not displayed on the operation
panel, turn OFF the power and press and hold [C] key and
[ZOOM DOWN] key (left key) and turn ON the power. Check
that "DOWNLOAD MODE" is displayed on the operation panel,
and execute the download procedure again.
If "DOWNLOAD MODE" is not still displayed, replace the MCU
with a new one.
6) PC side: Check that trees are displayed on "Special (MCU/
3. Version acquisition procedures IMC2/Facsimile" in the integration maintenance program. (If
trees are not displayed, check that the USB cable is connected
1) Main unit side: Execute Test command No. 49-01 (Flash ROM and select "Reconnect" again in procedure 5).
program write mode).
Check that "DOWNLOAD MODE" is displayed on the operation
panel of the main unit. (Press and hold [C] key and [ZOOM
DOWN] key (left key) together, and turn on the power simulta-
neously.)
2) Connect the machine and the PC with a USB cable.
3) PC side: Boost "Maintenance.exe" and select "AR-208/203E/
5420/M200/M201 series" in the "Select Model" menu.

AR-208/203E/5420/M200/M201
series

AR-208S/208D FIRMWARE DOWNLOAD PROCEDURES 15 - 3

7) PC side: Double-click "Special (MCU/IMC2/Facsimile)" in the 4) PC side: Check that "Simulation Command List" tree is dis-
main tree items to develop its sub trees. Select "Get Version" in played in the integration maintenance program.
the sub trees.

5) PC side: Boot the integration maintenance program. If "The

8) Check that the following display is shown. copier is not turned on." is displayed on the lower side of the
display, select "File" "Reconnect" on the menu bar.

With the above procedures, version acquisition is completed.

The display of "**.**" means its version is not downloaded. The 6) PC side: Check that trees are displayed on "Special (MCU/
downloaded versions are displayed in a version number as IMC2/Facsimile" in the integration maintenance program. (If
shown in "MCU Boot Version" and "MCU program Version". trees are not displayed, check that the USB cable is connected
and select "Reconnect" again in procedure 5).
4. EEPROM data acquisition procedure
EEPROM data is acquired to the PC. Use this procedure as data
maintenance of EEPROM.
1) Main unit side: Execute Test command No. 49-01 (Flash ROM
program write mode).
Check that "DOWNLOAD MODE" is displayed on the operation
panel of the main unit. (Press and hold [C] key and [ZOOM
DOWN] key (left key) together, and turn on the power simulta-
neously.)
2) Connect the machine and the PC with a USB cable.
3) PC side: Boot "Maintenance.exe" and select "AR-208/203E/
5420/M200/M201 series" in the "Select Model" menu.

AR-208/203E/5420/M200/M201
series

AR-208S/208D FIRMWARE DOWNLOAD PROCEDURES 15 - 4

7) PC side: Double-click "Special (MCU/IMC2/Facsimile)" to
develop its sub trees, and select "Upload EEPROM Data Area"
in the sub trees.
8) PC side: Enter a desired file name, and select "Save."
9) PC side: When upload is completed, the complete message is
displayed.
With the above procedure, the EEPROM data acquisition is com-
pleted.
Data acquired by the EEPROM data acquisition procedure are
saved in a file with extension of .eep.
AR-208S/208D FIRMWARE DOWNLOAD PROCEDURES 15 - 5
5. Installing procedures
<USB integration maintenance program installation>
Driver installation is made on plug-and-play.
<Installation on Windows Vista>
1) Main unit side: Execute Test command No. 49-01 (Flash ROM
program write mode).
Check that "d" is displayed on the LCD of the operation panel.
(Press and hold [C] key and [ZOOM DOWN] key (left key)
together, and turn on the power simultaneously.)
2) Connect the machine and the PC with a USB cable.
3) The [Found New Hardware] display is shown as below. Select
[Locate and install driver software (recommended)].
Note: A message to confirm the administrator of the computer is
displayed. Press [Agree] button.
4) The [Found New Hardware - DOWNLOAD] display is shown.
Click [I don't have the disc. Show me other options.].
5) When the following display is shown, select [Browse my com- 8) The path to the folder which includes the maintenance tool
puter for driver software (advanced)]. driver (Maintenance.inf) is displayed. Press [Next] button.

6) The following display is shown. 9) When the following display is shown, select [Install this driver
software anyway].

10) When the following display is shown, close [Close] button to

complete installation.

7) Press [Browse] button, specify the folder which includes the

maintenance tool driver (Maintenance.inf), and press [OK] but-
ton.

AR-208S/208D FIRMWARE DOWNLOAD PROCEDURES 15 - 6

<Installation on Windows XP> 5) Select the folder which includes the maintenance tool driver
1) Main unit side: Execute Test command No. 49-01 (Flash ROM (Mainte.inf) and press <OK> button.
program write mode). (Suppose that the driver is included in
Check that "DOWNLOAD MODE" is displayed on the LCD of C:\MaintenanceTool\Drivers\2kXp folder.)
the operation panel. (Press and hold [C] key and [ZOOM
DOWN] key (left key) together, and turn on the power simulta-
neously.)
2) Connect the machine and the PC with a USB cable.
3) The following display is shown.
Select [Install from a list or specific location] and press <Next>
button.

6) Check the path to the folder which includes the maintenance

tool driver (Mainte.inf), and press <Next> button.

4) Select [Include this location in the search;]. If the search loca-

tion is not the folder which includes the maintenance tool driver
(Mainte.inf), select <Browse>. If the search location is the folder
which includes the maintenance tool driver, press <Next> but-
ton to go to procedure 7).

7) When the following display is shown, press [Continue Anyway]

button.

AR-208S/208D FIRMWARE DOWNLOAD PROCEDURES 15 - 7

8) When the following display is shown, installation is completed. 5) Select [Specify a location] and press <Next> button.
Press <Finish> button.

6) Select [Include this location in the search;]. If the search loca-

With the above procedures, installation (on Windows XP) of the tion is not the folder which includes the maintenance tool driver
integration maintenance program is completed. (Mainte.inf), select <Browse>. If the search location is the folder
which includes the maintenance tool driver, press <Next> but-
<Installation on Windows 2000>
ton to go to procedure 9).
1) Main unit side: Execute Test command No. 49-01 (Flash ROM
program write mode).
Check that "DOWNLOAD MODE" is displayed on the LCD of
the operation panel. (Press and hold [C] key and [ZOOM
DOWN] key (left key) together, and turn on the power simulta-
neously.)
2) Connect the machine and the PC with a USB cable.
3) Check that the Found New Hardware Wizard is displayed, and
press <Next> button.

7) Specify the folder which includes the maintenance tool driver

(Mainte.inf), and press <Open> button.

4) Select [Search for a suitable driver for my device] and press

<Next> button.

AR-208S/208D FIRMWARE DOWNLOAD PROCEDURES 15 - 8

8) Check that the path to the folder which includes the mainte-
nance tool driver (Mainte.inf) is displayed, and press <OK> but-
ton.
(Suppose that the maintenance tool driver is included in
C:\MaintenanceTool\Drivers\2kXp folder.)
9) Press <Next> button to start installation.
10) When the following display is shown, installation is completed.
Press <Finish> button.
11) Restart the PC.
With the above procedures, installation (on Windows 2000) of the
integration maintenance program is completed.
AR-208S/208D FIRMWARE DOWNLOAD PROCEDURES 15 - 9
<Installation on Windows Me>
1) Main unit side: Execute Test command No. 49-01 (Flash ROM
program write mode).
Check that "DOWNLOAD MODE" is displayed on the LCD of
the operation panel. (Press and hold [C] key and [ZOOM
DOWN] key (left key) together, and turn on the power simulta-
neously.)
2) Connect the machine and the PC with a USB cable.
3) The following display is shown on the PC side.
Select [Specify the location of the driver], and press <Next> but-
ton.
4) Select [Specify a location], specify the folder which includes the
maintenance tool driver (Mainte.inf) as the search location, and
press <Next> button.
If the search location does not include the maintenance tool
driver (Mainte.inf), press <Browse> button to specify the folder
which includes the maintenance tool driver (Mainte.inf).
(Suppose that the maintenance tool driver is included in
C:\MaintenanceTool\Drivers\Win9xMe folder.)
5) Select the folder which includes maintenance tool driver
(Mainte.inf), and press <OK> button.
(Suppose that the driver is included in
C:\MaintenanceTool\Drivers\Win9xMe folder.)

6) Check that the path to the folder which includes the mainte-
nance tool driver (Mainte.inf) is displayed, and press <Next>
button.

7) When the following display is shown, installation is completed.

Press <Finish> button.

8) Restart the PC.

With the above procedures, installation (on Windows ME) of the
integration maintenance program is completed.

AR-208S/208D FIRMWARE DOWNLOAD PROCEDURES 15 - 10

Memo
LEAD-FREE SOLDER
The PWBs of this model employs lead-free solder. The LF marks indicated on the PWBs and the Service Manual mean Lead-Free solder.
The alphabet following the LF mark shows the kind of lead-free solder.

Example:

<Solder composition code of lead-free solder>

Solder composition Solder composition Solder composition code

code (Refer to the Sn-Ag-Cu a
Lead-Free table at the right.)
Sn-Ag-Bi
b
Sn-Ag-Bi-Cu
Sn-Zn-Bi z
5mm
a Sn-In-Ag-Bi
Sn-Cu-Ni
Sn-Ag-Sb
n
s
i

Bi-Sn-Ag-P p
Bi-Sn-Ag

(1) NOTE FOR THE USE OF LEAD-FREE SOLDER THREAD

When repairing a lead-free solder PWB, use lead-free solder thread.
Never use conventional lead solder thread, which may cause a breakdown or an accident.
Since the melting point of lead-free solder thread is about 40C higher than that of conventional lead solder thread, the use of the exclusive-use
soldering iron is recommendable.

(2) NOTE FOR SOLDERING WORK

Since the melting point of lead-free solder is about 220C, which is about 40C higher than that of conventional lead solder, and its soldering capacity is
inferior to conventional one, it is apt to keep the soldering iron in contact with the PWB for longer time. This may cause land separation or may exceed
the heat-resistive temperature of components. Use enough care to separate the soldering iron from the PWB when completion of soldering is
confirmed.
Since lead-free solder includes a greater quantity of tin, the iron tip may corrode easily. Turn ON/OFF the soldering iron power frequently.
If different-kind solder remains on the soldering iron tip, it is melted together with lead-free solder. To avoid this, clean the soldering iron tip after
completion of soldering work.
If the soldering iron tip is discolored black during soldering work, clean and file the tip with steel wool or a fine filer.
 CAUTION FOR BATTERY REPLACEMENT
(Danish) ADVARSEL !
Lithiumbatteri Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig hndtering.
Udskiftning m kun ske med batteri
af samme fabrikat og type.
Levr det brugte batteri tilbage til leverandoren.
(English) Caution !
Danger of explosion if battery is incorrectly replaced.
Replace only with the same or equivalent type
recommended by the manufacturer.
Dispose of used batteries according to manufacturers instructions.
(Finnish) VAROITUS
Paristo voi rjht, jos se on virheellisesti asennettu.
Vaihda paristo ainoastaan laitevalmistajan suosittelemaan
tyyppiin. Hvit kytetty paristo valmistajan ohjeiden
mukaisesti.
(French) ATTENTION
Il y a danger dexplosion s il y a remplacement incorrect
de la batterie. Remplacer uniquement avec une batterie du
mme type ou dun type quivalent recommand par
le constructeur.
Mettre au rebut les batteries usages conformment aux
instructions du fabricant.
(Swedish) VARNING
Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte.
Anvnd samma batterityp eller en ekvivalent
typ som rekommenderas av apparattillverkaren.
Kassera anvnt batteri enligt fabrikantens
instruktion.
(German) Achtung
Explosionsgefahr bei Verwendung inkorrekter Batterien.
Als Ersatzbatterien drfen nur Batterien vom gleichen Typ oder
vom Hersteller empfohlene Batterien verwendet werden.
Entsorgung der gebrauchten Batterien nur nach den vom
Hersteller angegebenen Anweisungen.

CAUTION FOR BATTERY DISPOSAL

(For USA, CANADA)
"BATTERY DISPOSAL"
THIS PRODUCT CONTAINS A LITHIUM PRIMARY
(MANGANESS DIOXIDE) MEMORY BACK-UP BATTERY
THAT MUST BE DISPOSED OF PROPERLY. REMOVE THE
BATTERY FROM THE PRODUCT AND CONTACT YOUR
LOCAL ENVIRONMENTAL AGENCIES FOR INFORMATION
ON RECYCLING AND DISPOSAL OPTIONS.

"TRAITEMENT DES PILES USAGES"

CE PRODUIT CONTIENT UNE PILE DE SAUVEGARDE DE
MMOIRE LITHIUM PRIMAIRE (DIOXYDE DE MANGANSE)
QUI DOIT TRE TRAITE CORRECTEMENT. ENLEVEZ LA
PILE DU PRODUIT ET PRENEZ CONTACT AVEC VOTRE
AGENCE ENVIRONNEMENTALE LOCALE POUR DES
INFORMATIONS SUR LES MTHODES DE RECYCLAGE ET
DE TRAITEMENT.
 COPYRIGHT 2008 BY SHARP CORPORATION
All rights reserved.
Printed in Japan.
No part of this publication may be reproduced,
stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted,
in any form or by any means,
electronic; mechanical; photocopying; recording or otherwise
without prior written permission of the publisher.

Trademark acknowledgements
Microsoft, Windows, Windows 98, Windows Me, Windows 2000,
Windows XP, Windows Vista and Internet Explorer are registered trademarks
or trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the U.S.A. and other countries.
Adobe, the Adobe logo, Acrobat, the Adobe PDF logo, and ReaderTM are
registered trademarks or trademarks of Adobe Systems Incorporated in the United
States and other countries.
IBM, PC/AT, and PowerPC are trademarks of International Business Machines
Corporation.
Sharpdesk is a trademark of Sharp Corporation.
All other trademarks and copyrights are the property of their respective owners.

SHARP CORPORATION
Digital Document System Group
CS Promotion Center
Yamatokoriyama, Nara 639-1186, Japan
2008 June Printed in Japan